| ‘The Victorian Naturalist Published by The Field Naturalists Club of Victoria since 1884 FNCV DIARY General Meetings Held on the second Monday of the month (except for public holidays), 8.00 p.m. at the National Herbarium, corner of Birdwood Avenue and Dallas Brooks Drive, South Yarra. Meetings include a talk by a guest speaker. All members of the public are welcome. Monday 12th February Monday 9th April “The new V.C.E. Geology course for “The work of the marine research years 11-12”. Speaker Mr Darold Clind- group of the National Museum”. worth. Speaker Mr Clarrie Handreck. Monday 19th March “Beetles”. Speaker Mr Peter Kelly. FNCV Excursions Held on the First Sunday of each month and open to all FNCV members and visitors. For bookings or further details contact the excursion secretary Mrs. Joan Harry (850 1347). Sunday 4th February Naturalists Club. For further details see Excursion to the Belgrave and Sher- inside back cover of November/ brooke area. Meet at the Belgrave December Victorian Naturalist or station car park at 10.15 a.m. Train phone the Excursion Secretary. leaves station at 8.43 a.m. Leader i Sunday Ist April Hillary Weatherhead. General Excursion by bus to the Friday 9th (evening) - 12th March Tallarook area. Bus departs Batman Annual Victorian Field Naturalists Avenue 9.30 a.m. Leader Mr Peter Labour Day get-together at Ocean Kelly. Grove. Hosted by the Geelong Field Group Activities Fauna Survey Group The group contact is Julian Grusovin (Phone 543 8627 A.R.). Meetings 8 p.m. on the first Tuesday of the month, National Herbarium. March 6th Annual General Meeting. Excursions Sat. 10th - Sun. 11th February Sat. 3rd - Sun. 4th March Water rats at Werribee. Bettong survey, Barmah Forest. Saturday 17th February Sat. 10th - Mon. 12th March Stag watch for Leadbeater’s Possum, Nooramunga. Powelltown 7.00 p.m. (cont. inside back cover) Registered by Australia Post, Publication No. V.B.P. 1268 Victorian Naturalist Volume 107 (1) February, 1990 Editors: Tim Offor and Robyn Watson. MCGHOTIAL/ NOTICES. cs sag cc ccyacsennnnctrgnqoneryavcastenbnsbso ccarpsntns Ans bens tht rhs sb en behea sh dats és Commentary Threats to Victorian native freshwater fish by J. D. Koehn and W. G. O°CONNOS........0.eccereeeee teen eect e teens Contributions A review of the conservation status of native freshwater fish in Victoria by J. D. Koehn and A. K. EVIOTISONi: eR aca et A new locality for the Two-spined Blackfish (Gadopsis bispinosus) outside Victoria by M. Lintermans and T. Rutzou A species list for the Merri Creek area (Melbourne, Victoria) compiled in 1896 by I. Clarke ........:.::ceeeeeeeeneenenee ete eeeeeeeeeeeeeees News ISSN 0042-5184 35 Cover photo: Trees and wood debris in steams provide important fish habitat (see Koehn and O’Connor p.5) Photo J. Koehn. Notices From the Editors To mark the start of a new decade we have redesigned the front cover in a style similar to that used during Norman Wake- field’s time as editor. We feel that this more traditional design reflects the long history of The Victorian Naturalist which is now in its 107th year, a fact of which the FNCV is proud. During 1989 we have endeavoured to broaden the content of the Vic. Nat. so that readers have a blend of informative articles on topical issues, research reports of scientific significance and naturalist news. We have established an editorial policy and new guidelines for contributors (see page 38) to encourage contributions from a wide range of readers. Letters also are always welcome. This issue contains three articles on A New FNCV Publication Wildflowers of the Stirling Range by Bruce Fuhrer and Neville Marchant Special offer to members $7.00 plus $1.75 pack./post. Order from: Sheila Houghton, FNCYV, C/- National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, South Yarra 3141. native freshwater fish and together they encapsulate the Vic. Nat. approach to presenting natural history. The article by Koehn and O’Connor (p.5) provides an overview of the adverse effects of inap- propriate stream management on fish. Koehn and Morison (p.13) review the current conservation status of our native freshwater fish and Lintermans and Rutzou (p.26) describe a new locality for the uncommon Two-spined Blackfish. With the current interest in revegetation, Ian Clarke’s article (p.28) on an early species list for the Merri Creek, Melbourne is timely. This list was orginally compiled by the eminent naturalist, the Reverend H. M. R. Rupp in 1896. We hope you enjoy this issue of the Vic. Nat. SUBSCRIPTIONS FOR 1990 DUE NOW! Alpine Park Management Plans The following Proposed Man- agement Plans are now avail- able from CF&L offices and the Information Victoria Centre. Submissions due by 31st March. e Wonnangatta-Moroka e Dartmouth © Cobberas-Tingaringy Victorian Nat. Commentary Threats to Victorian native freshwater fish J. D. Koehn! and W. G. O’Connor? During the process of assessing the conservation status of native freshwater fish species in Victoria (Koehn and Mori- son 1990) it became apparent that there were serious declines in the range and abundance of many species. While such declines are well documented for some species (e.g. Macquarie Perch Macquaria australasica; Cadwallader 1981), the status of others remains relatively unknown (e.g. Yarra Pigmy Perch, Edelia obscura). The exact reasons for such declines may vary between species, from location to location, be unknown or be a combination of factors, but there has been one com- mon, overwhelming cause: habitat altera- tion. Changes to habitat have accelerated since the arrival of Europeans to Australia and have often continued almost unnotic- ed. Dr Peter Maitland whilst addressing the Australian Threatened Fishes Confer- ence as a visiting representative of the International Union for the Conservation of Nature, put it succinctly: ‘The major single cause throughout the world of the extinction of populations of fish (and indeed most other species of both plants and animals) is the destruction of habitat’ (Maitland 1987). A fish’s habitat consists of both its surrounding medium, the water and assoc- iated physical structures. These physical structures include streambanks, substrate, instream debris (logs, branches, etc), aquatic and streambank vegetation, all of which may be used for shelter, food supply, spawning and rearing areas and territories. These provide the diversity of habitat necessary to provide the needs for the range of fish species present. Often fish numbers can be correlated to the suitability of the habitat. From a managerial and aesthetic viewpoint, this diversity often ‘118 Waterdale Road, Ivanhoe, 3079 253 Davis Street, North Carlton, 3052 Vol. 107 No. 1 (1990) constitutes what appears to be an untidy, cluttered and inefficient arrangement of instream structures. A stream is completely dependent on the surrounding land and vegetation in its catchment and is consequently subjected to the effects of actions carried out there. The areas surrounding a stream and its tributaries are especially important in determining the quality of the stream, A stream is also a system of habitats linked together by a continuous one-way flow of water, so the actions on a stream at one point can also affect areas downstream. The majority of native freshwater fishes occur in rivers and streams which form most of the freshwater aquatic habitats in Victoria. Few species are completely dependent on lentic (non-flowing) habitats such as lakes, swamps, billabongs and wet- lands. Although this paper primarily con- cerns itself with lotic (flowing) ecosystems it is recognised that lentic habitats face a wide variety of threats and that habitat changes such as drainage can be rapid and dramatic. Unlike terrestrial ecosystems, fish and their environments are hidden below the water surface and hence the degradation of their habitats and other threats they face often pass unnoticed. In a recent poll, the majority of public considered a lack of stocking, pollution and Carp to be the most important issues facing freshwater fisheries (Fisheries Division 1987). Such responses fail to consider the most serious threats to freshwater environments. Eco- logical factors are not generally widely recognised by the public as major concerns to freshwater fisheries. In an attempt to redress this imbalance, this paper presents a review of the major threats to native freshwater fish in Vic- toria. Commentary Bankside Vegetation Removal Naturally occurring native vegetation surrounding a stream is essential for the well-being of the aquatic ecosystem, and there is a continuous interaction between this zone and the stream, Most of the in- stream habitat available for fish eg. fallen trees, logs, wood debris, leaves, bark, tree roots, ete. originates from the surrounding bankside vegetation. In many streams, such organic matter forms the major pri- mary source Of nutrients for the aquatic food chain. The supply of this material rom streamside vegetation replaces energy used in biological processes and lost by downstream displacement. Introduced deciduous species such as willows or poplars alter the timing, quality and consistency of this energy supply. Addi- tional fish food in the form of terrestrial invertebrates also originates from_ this verelation. By helping consolidate stream banks, the rool systems of bank vegetation prevent erosion and hence sedimentation (P. Jackson pers, comm.). Submerged roots also provide instream habitat. Streamside vegetation acts as a buffer strip helping to filter sediment, pasture effluent and chemicals in water run-off from sur- rounding areas and is important in protect- ing bank areas from disturbances such as stock damage (Anon 1983). Shading helps to reduce summer stream temperatures and provides habitat areas for species avoiding sunlight. The clearing of bank vegetation has been widespread in Victoria, and is par- ticularly prevalent in lowland streams flowing through agricultural areas. The impact of this action, especially clearing right up to the waters edge, on stream eco- systems has not been fully realised. The loss of a nutrient source (organic matter) alone may have reduced the overall pro- ductivity of streams. Certainly the loss of inputs of instream habitat can lead to a reduction in fish numbers, especially of those species dependent on logs and wood debris for habitat or spawning sites. Fig. 1. Removal of streamside vegetation remains a major environmental problem. Victorian Nat. Commentary Habitat Removal The removal of instream habitat by de- snagging and clearing of streams remains a widespread practice in Victoria. Fish use snags and other habitat to shelter from water velocity, predators, competitors and sunlight; as territorial ‘markers’, for spawning sites and for food supply sour- ces. Species such as Murray Cod (Maccul- lochella peeli) and Freshwater Blackfish (Gadopsis marmoratus) are known to lay adhesive eggs on or in logs and the removal of such spawning sites is likely to lead to reduced breeding success. Both of these species have suffered serious declines in range and abundance (Jackson and Lle- welyn 1980; Cadwallader and Gooley 1981) and the removal of snags is probably a contributing factor (Cadwallader 1978). Channelization can remove almost all instream habitat. The Western Port catch- ment provides many examples of this extreme form of habitat alteration and fish populations have been shown to be adver- sely affected (Hortle and Lake 1983; Koehn 1986a). The concrete channels in Dandenong Creek have been shown to contain few (or no) fish (Koehn 1986b). Similarly, the widespread drainage of swamp and wetland areas has reduced the Fig. 2. Channelization removes almost all habitat attributes. Vol. 107 No. 1 (1990) preferred habitat areas for species such as the Southern Pigmy Perch (Nannoperca australis) and Dwarf Galaxias (Galaxiella pusilla). Control of flooding can also lead to reductions in off-stream habitats such as swamps and billabongs. Sedimentation Point sources of sediment such as dam and road constructions, mining opera- tions, unmade roads and cattle access points are all readily recognised. More widespread, but less recognisable inputs arise from agricultural and forest areas where over clearing and poor land man- agement practices have occurred. The removal of bankside vegetation contributes to sedimentation by increasing bank erosion and allowing runoff from surrounding areas to enter the stream unfiltered. While the damage to a hillside gully or streambank is visual evidence of the problems of erosion, the damage to the aquatic environment usually remains hidden under the resultant turbid water. The major effect of sedimentation is the blanketting of the substrate and the filling of pools and scour holes. This decreases substrate variation and hence usable habi- tat areas, A diversity of habitat is necessary for the requirements of different species and their different life stages. Clogging of the substratum removes spaces between particles which are used as rearing and habitat areas by juvenile fish, small species and stream invertebrates. The eggs of species such as Macquarie Perch (Mac- quaria australasica) which are deposited in gravel substrate are liable to smothering by sediment. Species such as Freshwater Blackfish which lay adhesive eggs, require relatively clean sites for attachment. If such sites are coyered with sediment, spawning may not be possible. The eggs and larvae which remain attached to the spawning site for several weeks may also be smothered by sediment (Blyth and Jackson 1985). Commentary Reduced Water Quality Although water quality problems are usually associated with the input of toxic pollutants, they can also include the de- terioration of a wide variety of water quality parameters. Fish kills from toxie discharges are readily recognised and occur frequently in urban waters. Similar kills in rural areas can often be attributed to the use of pesticides. Toxic pollutants which do not kill fish immediately, may have sub-lethal effects leading to reduced feeding or spawning ability, poisoning through bio- accumulation in the food chain, or the loss of the invertebrate food supply. Some toxins such as heavy metals accumulate in the tissues leading to a gradual deteriora- tion of the health of a fish. Unlike birds or terrestrial animals, fish have no means of escape from the contamination of their environment. Lesser changes in levels of other chemicals may have more subtle effects on fish populations by providing a less suitable environment. Water provides dissolved oxygen for respiration, temperature for metabolism and flow of nutrients through the eco- system. Dams and reservoirs in particular have the capacity to seriously alter all of these parameters. It is common for the bottom layers of reservoirs to form cold layers completely lacking in oxygen. This not only produces habitat areas within the impoundments which are unsuitable for fish, but can also result in the release of de-oxygenated water into the stream. Impoundments are also a major cause of changes to the water temperature in streams. Most impoundments in Victoria utilize only bottom outlets which release cold water from the lower levels of the water column. A reduction in stream tem- perature may severely limit the growth rates of fish. Often releases are made for irri- gation purposes during summer when stream temperatures are normally high. This is when many species such as Murray Cod breed, and if optimal temperatures are not reached, then sexual development and successful spawning may not occur. The feeding activity and metabolic rate of fish also depend on water temperature. Each species has a specific temperature tolerance level and fish kills may occur due to high temperatures, particularly when associated with reductions in dissolved oxygen levels. Water temperatures can increase markedly in summer months, par- ticularly where there is a lack of shading from streamside vegetation. Impoundments may also act as nutrient traps by allowing organic particles which normally flow down the stream to settle out. The water released downstream is therefore not as rich in nutrients as the inflow and so the productivity of the stream may be reduced. High turbidities and salinities may also have adverse physiological or behavioural effects on fish. Stratification of pools due to temperature or salinity gradients may result in deoxygenated, saline bottom layers (Anderson and Morison 1990). These conditions may be exacerbated by reduced flows. Increased nutrient inputs from effluents or fertilizers may be directly toxic or have indirect adverse effects reducing oxygen levels or enhancing algal blooms. Algae may be toxic or dramatic- ally reduce oxygen levels (Larkin and Northcote 1969). A deterioration of water quality over the long term may be as serious as a direct toxic kill. Reduced environmental suit- ability increases stress, leaving fish more susceptible to disease, predation and lowered reproductive success. Flow alterations Water storages have the capacity to dra- matically alter the flow regime. Discharges from storages used for irrigation purposes generally reverse natural flows, resulting in high flows during summer and low flows during winter. Natural fluctuations in water levels and seasonal flooding are reduced. Stages of the lifecycles of many fish species are reliant on natural flow events Victorian Nat. Commentary and alterations to, or the removal of such events may have serious consequences. Flooding is particularly important for the migration and spawning of many species. For example, the adults of Australian Bass (Macquaria novemaculeata) require sea- sonal high flows to migrate downstream to estuarine spawning grounds (Harris, 1986). A rise in water level during spring is thought to be a ‘trigger’ for spawning in such species as Silver Perch (Bidvanus bidyanus) (Lake 1967). If such conditions do not occur, or occur to a lesser extent due to flow regulation, then spawning may not take place. Reduced flooding also means that high- ly productive floodplain areas which pro- duce plankton blooms are not utilized. The production of such an abundant food supply is necessary for the rearing of fry and the flood-plain habitat provides nur- sery areas for the juveniles of many species (Geddes and Puckeridge 1988). Reduced flooding also reduces the chance to flush sediment and areas of poor water quality which may occur over long periods of low flow. Sudden reductions in water levels, par- ticularly such as those associated with the end of irrigation releases or the operation of hydro-electric schemes may leave fish and/or their eggs stranded above the water level. Certain species such as the Fresh- water Blackfish whose eggs and larvae need to remain attached to the spawning, site for several weeks may be particularly susceptible to a sudden drop in water level. Water storages often result in a dramatic reduction in downstream flow, This can severely reduce the amount of habitat available to fish. Flow immediately below the Upper Yarra Dam for example, has been completely stopped, leaving the streambed almost dry for several kilo- meters before being fed at reduced flows by downstream tributaries. Streamflow studies have been conducted by the Fish- eries Division (Department of Conserva- tion, Forests and Lands) on waters such Vol. 107 No. 1 (1990) as the Thomson River to determine suit- able flows to maintain adequate amounts of fish habitat (B. Tunbridge pers. comm,). Reductions in streamflow also oecur due to the damming of small tributaries and water extracuion for irrigation purposes. The effects of water extraction can be severe as this practice is most prevalent during low summer flows. Barriers To be of use to fish, habitat areas must be accessible. As the majority of fresh- water species in coastal drainages move to sea at some stage of their life cycle they need to be able to recolonize these fresh- water habitat areas. Barriers prevent this, and indeed some species have been found absent from drainages where barriers occur (Koehn 1986a). Water storages also form major barriers to fish passage in Victorian streams. lish passage may also be obstructed by flood barriers, drop structures, causeways and road crossings. Many species also need to migrate to spawn. Golden Perch (Macquaria ambi- gua) may make extensive upstream migra- tions prior to spawning, whilst the Com- mon Galaxias (Galaxias maculatus) migrates downstream to spawn in the estuary. If migrations to spawning areas are obstructed, then spawning may not be possible. Several coastal species such as the Broad-finned Galaxias (Galaxias brevi- Fig. 3, Water storages cause barriers to fish passage and other environmental prob- lems, Commentary pinnis) spawn in freshwater, but their eggs or larvae are swept to sea. If the larvae are swept into a water storage their survival is uncertain. At present few barriers incorporate any type of ‘fish ladder’ and so fish passage remains a major environmental problem for many species in Victoria. Introduced Species The most widely distributed introduced species is Brown Trout (Sa/mo trutta) (Cadwallader and Backhouse 1983). Together with Rainbow Trout (Oncorhy- nchus mykiss), these species are widely stocked (Barnham 1989) and as voracious predators pose a major threat to smaller native fish. The effects of Brown Trout on the distribution and abundance of Moun- tain Galaxias (Galaxias olidus) have been comprehensively documented with mu- tually exclusive populations often occur- ring (Tilzey 1976; Cadwallader 1979; Fletcher 1979; Jackson and Davies 1983). Overlap in the diet of Brown Trout and Freshwater Blackfish and the deleterious effects on the distribution of other native species has been found by Jackson (1978) and Jackson and Williams (1980). Despite the overlap in diet, blackfish coexist in streams with Brown Trout, probably be- cause the two species occupy different habitat areas (Jackson 1978). Trout have been noted as a particular threat to the endangered Brown Galaxias (G, olidus var. ‘fuscus’), (Koehn and Morison 1990) and may also prey on Australian Grayling (Pro- totroctes maraena). Mosquitofish (Gam- busia affinis) are known to eat fish eggs, juveniles, and aggressively attack fish by nipping their fins. It is thought to have been responsible for the extinction of several fish species in Africa and South- east Asia (Cadwallader and Backhouse 1983), but its effect in Australia has not been documented. Mosquitofish may be detrimental to species which inhabit similar habitats such as the Dwarf Gal- axias and Southern and Yarra Pigmy Perches. 10 Competition for both food and habitat space also occurs between other native and introduced species. The diets of Murray Cod and Golden Perch for example over- lap with Redfin (Perca fluviatilis) Carp (Cyprinis carpio) Roach (Rutilus rutilus) and Goldfish (Carassius auratus). The effects of Carp numbers on native fish is unclear. Dietary overlap between Carp and native species does occur (Hume et al. 1983), and in large numbers Carp must produce considerable pressure for habitat space. The destruction of weed- beds in lakes may also remove native fish habitat. Redfin may pose a special threat to native fish species through the spread of Redfin virus (Langdon ef a/ 1986). Preliminary tests have shown that Moun- tain Galaxias and Macquarie Perch are both susceptible to this virus (Langdon 1988). Several exotic species used in the aquarium trade are known to have es- tablished populations in Victoria (Cad- wallader and Backhouse 1983; Allen 1984). Fishing The removal of fish from a stream can obviously only decrease the abundance of that species. Overfishing of native fish stocks by commercial fishermen and poachers in the Murray-Darling river systems has probably contributed to their decline in many areas. Angling during the spawning migration has been suggested as having a deleterious effect on Macquarie Perch stocks in Lake Eildon (Cadwallader 1978) and for this reason, the population of this species in Lake Dartmouth is sub- jected to a closed season during spawning. Angling is often suggested as a reason for the decline of other species, but this re- mains unsubstantiated, As only 9 of the 42 native freshwater fish species may be considered of angling importance (Barnham 1983), fishing can- not explain the serious declines suffered by populations of other species. Compar- ed to the deleterious effect of habitat Victorian Nat. Commentary modifications previously discussed in this paper, with the exception of occasional specific instances, angling should not be considered a threat to most native fresh- water fish species. Conclusion General deterioration of a fish’s envir- onmental conditions does not usually cause death, but is likely to have other effects which lead to a general decline in population. A less than optimal habitat may lead to reduced longevity, growth rates and spawning success. Over several years this accumulative decline may lead to the demise of a fish population. The threats discussed have been con- sidered in isolation, but often more than one threatening process is in operation and interactions between such processes may increase their effects. Similarly, the effect of one threatening process may affect many areas of the ecosystem and several fish species e.g. sedimentation may remove spawning sites and reduce food supply. Although an overall ecological ap- proach is required for the effective management of these problems, steps can be taken to alleviate most of the afore- mentioned threats: 1. Replacement and maintenance of indigenous, native streamside vegeta- tion zones at least 20 m in width (Clin- nick 1984). 2. Minimization of habitat removal. 3. Adequate controls of sediment inputs from point sources and a general im- provement in catchment land use. 4. Adequate controls over toxic spills, effluent discharges, chemical spraying and the provision of multi-level outlets from water storages. 5. Use of streamflow studies to determine and implement environmentally sensi- tive flow regimes; regulation of water extraction. 6. Provision of fish ladders and removal or modification of structures to provide fish passage. 7. Careful stocking and restrictions on the spread of introduced species. Vol. 107 No. 1 (1990) 8. Regulation of commercial and recrea- tional fishing in sensitive areas. Some of these actions are already in operation, but concerted efforts are needed to implement widespread manage- ment decisions in these areas before these threats to our native freshwater fish are reduced. Acknowledgements The authors wish to thank all those compatriots whose conversations have led to a better understanding of the environ- mental threats to freshwater fishes. Thanks to Tim Doeg for comments on the manu- script and to David Anderson for word- processing. References Allen, S, (1984). Occurrence of juvenile Weatherfish Misgurnus anguillicaudatus (Pisces: Cobitidae) in the Yarra River. Victorian Nat. 101: 240-2. Anderson, J. R. and Morison, A. K. (1989). Environmental flow studies for the Wimmera River, Victoria, Summary report. Arthur Rylah Institute for Environmetal Research Technical Report Series No. 78. Anon. (1983). ‘The State of the Rivers’, (Government Printer: Melbourne). Barnham, C. (1983), Report on the census of angling clubs 1983. Fisheries and Wildlife Division, Min- istry for Conservation, Melbourne, Victoria, 34pp. Barnham, C. (1989), Summary of immediately avail- able records of non-indigenous and indigenous fish stockings in Victorian public waters 1871 to 1988. Internal Working Report No.2 (Draft), Freshwater Fish Management Branch, Fisheries Division, Melbourne. Blyth, J. D. and Jackson, P. D. (1985). The aquatic habitat and fauna of East Gippsland, Victoria. Aust. Soc. Limnol. Bull. No. 10: 89-109, Cadwallader, P. L. (1978). Some causes of the decline in range and abundance of native fish in the Murray-Darling River System. Proc. Royal Soc. Vict. 90; 211-224 Cadwallader, P. L. (1979). Distribution of native and introduced fish in Seven Creeks River System, Victoria. Aust.J. Ecol. 4: 361-385. Cadwallader, P. L. (1981). Past and present distributions and translocations of Macquarie perch Macquaria australasica (Pisces: Perci- chthyidae), with particular reference to Victoria. Proc, Royal Soc. Vict. 93: 23-30. Cadwallader, P. L. and Backhouse, G. N. (1983). ‘A Guide to the Freshwater Fish of Victoria’, (Goy- ernment Printer: Melbourne). ll Commentary Cadwallader, P. L. and Gooley, G. J. (1984). Past and present distributions and translocations of Murray cod Maccullochella peeli and trout cod M. macquariensis (Pisces: Percichthyidae) in Victoria. Proc, Royal Soc. Vict, 96: 33-43. Clinnick, P.F. (1984). Buffer strip management in forest operations. Soil Conservation Authority ‘Technical Report Series. Fisheries Division. (1987). Morgan poll shows im- portance of fishing. Recreational Fisheries Newsletter October 1987 1(2); 1-3. (Department of Conseryation, Forests and Lands). Fletcher, A. R. (1979). Effects of Salmo trutta on Galaxias olidus and macroinvertebrates in stream communities. M.Sc. thesis, Department of Zoo- logy, Monash University, Clayton, Victoria. Geddes, M. C. and Puckeridge, J. T. (1988). Survival and growth of larval and juvenile native fish: the importance of the flood plain, Jn ‘Proceedings of the workshop on native fish management’. (Murray Darling Basin Committee). Harris, J. H. (1986). Reproduction of the Australian Bass, Macquaria novemaculeata (Perciformes Percichthyidae) in the Sydney Basin. Aust. J. Mar. Freshwater. Res, 37: 209-235. Hortle, K. G. and Lake, P. S, (1983). Fish of the channelized and unchannelized sections of the Bunyip River, Victoria. Aust, J. Mar. Freshwater. Res, 34: 441-450. Hume, D. J., Fletcher, A. R. and Morison, A. K. (1983). Final report: Carp program. Arthur Rylah Institute for Environmental Research, Ministry for Conservation. 213pp. Jackson, P. D. (1978). Benthic invertebrate fauna and feeding relationships of brown trout, Salmo trutta Linnaeus, and river blackfish, Gadopsis mar- moratus Richardson, in the Aberfeldy River, Victoria. Aust, J. Mar, Freshwater Res. 29: 725-742. Jackson, P. D. and Davies, J. N. (1983), Survey of the fish fauna in the Grampians region, south-west- ern Victoria, Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria 95: 39-51. Jackson, P. D. and Llewellyn, L. C. (1980). Family Gadopsidae: River Blackfish. /n ‘Freshwater Fishes of South-Eastern Australia’. Ed. R. M. McDowall. (Reed: Sydney) pp. 160. Jackson, P. D, and Williams W. D. (1980). Effects of brown trout Salmo trutta Linnaeus, on the dis- tribution of some native fishes in three areas of southern Victoria, Australia, Aust. J. Mar, Fresh- water Res. 31: 61-67. Koehn, J, D, (1986a). Western Port catchment: fishes, their habitats and management recommenda- tions. Arthur Rylah Institute for Environmental Research Technical Report Series No. 40. 34pp. (Department of Conservation, Forests and Lands: Melbourne) 12 Koehn, J. D. (1986b). Dandenong Creek: fishes, their habitats and management recommendations, Arthur Rylah Institute for Environmental Research Technical Report Series No, ,41, (Department of Conservation, Forests and Lands: Melbourne). Koehn, J. D. and Morison, A. K. (1990). A review of the conservation status of native freshwater fish in Victoria. Victorian Nat. 107: 13-25. Lake, J. S, (1967). Rearing experiments with five species of Australian freshwater fishes. Aust, J. Mar. Freshwater Res. 18; 137-153. Langdon, J. S. (1988). Prevention and control of fish diseases in the Murray-Darling Basin. Jn: ‘Proceedings of the Workshop on Native Fish Management, Canberra, 16-17 June 1988’ (Murray Darling Basin Commission) pp. 163-172. Langdon, J. S,, Humphrey, J. D, Williams, L. M., Hyatt, A. D. and Westbury, H. A. (1986). First virus isolation from Australian fish: an. iri- dovirus-like pathogen from redfin perch, Perca Siuviatilis L. J. Fish Diseases 9: 263-268. Larkin, P. A. and Northcote, T. G. (1969). Fish as indices of eutrophication. Jn ‘Eutrophication: Causes, consequences, correctives’. (National Academy of Sciences: Washington D.C.). Pp. 256-73. Maitland, P. S. (1987), Conserving freshwater fish in Australia. /n: ‘Proceedings of the Conference on Australian Threatened Fishes’. Ed J. H, Harris, (Australian Society for Fish Biology: Sydney) Tilzey, R. D. J. Observations on interactions between indigenous Galaxiidae and introduced Salmon- idae in the Lake Eucumbene catchment, New South Wales. Aust. J. Mar. and Freshwater Res, 27: 551-564. Victorian Nat. Contributions A review of the conservation status of native freshwater fish in Victoria J. D. Koehn' and A. K. Morison? Introduction The conservation status of native freshwater fish in Victoria was first documented in November 1982 (Cadwall- ader et a/. 1984), This was seen as part of an Australia-wide review of the conserva- tion status of native freshwater fish. In August 1985, the Australian Society for Fish Biology held a conference on Aus- tralian Threatened Fishes to define the criteria used for classification of the conservation status of Australian fish species and to publish a preliminary classification of species at risk nationwide (Harris 1987). Recommendations formu- lated at this conference were ratified by the Society and a Threatened Fishes Committee formed. This committee now meets annually to review the national listing. Cadwallader et a/. (1984) recommended that the Victorian conservation listing should be revised every five years. This document contains the first official revision. Since the original review in 1982, there has been an increase in knowledge of freshwater native fish in Victoria. New species have been described formally, additional species have been located in Victoria, many fish surveys have been conducted and the relationships between some species and their environment have been investigated. The conservation status of several species has come under revision in recent publications (Brumley ef a/. 1987; Jackson and Koehn 1988). The importance of a listing of the Con- servation Status of species in Victoria has ' Fisheries Division Arthur Rylah Institute for Environmental Research, 123 Brown Street, Heidelberg, 3084 ? Fisheries Division Kaiela Fisheries Research Station P.O. Box 1226, Shepparton, 3630 Vol. 107 No. 1 (1990) been highlighted by the determination of conservation priorities and management plans within government departments and the initiation of the Flora and Fauna Guarantee legislation by the Victorian State Government. This legislation allows for the listing of flora, fauna and habitat areas for protection throughout the State. The purpose of the Flora and Fauna Guarantee and proceedures for its imple- mentation have been outlined by Watson and Offor (1989). The conservation categories adopted by Cadwallader ef a/. were based on Ahern’s (1982) modifications of definitions from the Red Data Book (Holloway 1979) of the International Union for the Conservation of Nature (1.U.C.N.). The definitions and classification scheme used for the national conservation listing (Harris 1987) differed somewhat from those used by Cadwall- ader et al. (1984). Such changes have necessitated a review of the conservation status listing of Victorian native freshwater fish. The conservation status of each species was considered for Victoria only, with historical data on distribution and abundance elsewhere only relevant to their vulnerability in this State. The Review A meeting was held at the Arthur Rylah Institute for Environmental Research on 12 August 1989 to review the listings. Participants included Fisheries biologists, fish taxonomists, native fish naturalists and personnel with knowledge of the Flora and Fauna Guarantee legislation. The purpose of the meeting was to: a) decide whether or not to adopt the con- servation categories used for the nation- al listing (Harris 1987), or those used by Cadwallader ef al. (1984). b) decide the conservation status of each 13 Contributions species considered by Cadwallader et al. (1984), after presentation and consid- eration of all available, relevant infor- mation, c) decide the conservation status of additional species not previously listed. d) provide a summary of the revised classification of conservation status of Victorian native freshwater fish to the meeting of the Australian Society of Fish Biology Threatened Fishes Com- mittee meeting on 25 August 1989, Results The participants agreed that the cate- gories used for the national conservation listing (Harris 1987) should also be adopted for this review of the Victorian listing. Two slight alterations were made to this classification scheme: the ‘extinct’ category definition was qualified by the addition of ‘presumed in Victoria’, and for completion, a further category of ‘present- ly common and/or widespread in Victoria’ was added. This is similar to the category ‘common and secure’ used by Cadwallader et al. (1984). This additional category provided a complete listing of all native freshwater fish taxa considered and ensures revision of their status in following reviews. Conservation Status Category Definitions PRESUMED EXTINCT IN VICTORIA Taxa which are no longer found in the wild or ina domesticated state in Victoria. ENDANGERED Taxa which have suffered a population decline over all or most of their range, whether the causes of this decline are known or not, and which are in danger of extinction in the near future. (Special management measures required if the taxa are to continue to survive.) VULNERABLE Taxa not presently endangered but which are at risk by having small popu- lations and/or by occupying restricted habitats susceptible to rapid environmental 14 change and/or populations which are de- clining at a rate that would render them endangered in the near future. (Special management measures required to prevent the taxa becoming endangered or extinct.) POTENTIALLY THREATENED Taxa which could become vulnerable or endangered in the near future because they have a relatively large population in a restricted area; or they have small popu- lations in a few areas; or they have been heavily depleted and are continuing to decline; or they are dependent on specific habitat for survival. (Require monitoring.) INDETERMINATE Taxa which are likely to fall into the Endangered, Vulnerable or Potentially Threatened categories but for which in- sufficient data are available to make an assessment. (Require investigation.) RESTRICTED Taxa which are not presently in danger but which occur in restricted areas, or which have suffered a long-term reduction in distribution and/or abundance and are now uncommon. UNCERTAIN STATUS Taxa whose taxonomy, distribution and abundance are not known but which are suspected of being restricted, PRESENTLY COMMON AND/OR WIDESPREAD Taxa presently common, abundant or widespread which face no immediate threat to their survival. ‘Endangered’, ‘Vulnerable’ and ‘Potent- ially Threatened’ are categories that are considered to contain Victoria’s threatened fish. Harris (1987) recommended that action be taken to initiate conservation programs for species which fall into these categories on a national basis. Similar action is recommended for Victorian species in these listings. Further taxa may be placed in these categories after investi- gation of those whose status is presently listed as ‘Indeterminate’. Victorian Nat. Contributions Using the revised classification each species was assigned to a particular con- servation category after the presentation and discussion of its distribution, abun- dance and environmental requirements (including habitat, breeding, feeding, movement and water quality needs). Par- ticular attention was given to observed changes to distribution and abundance, and to potential threats to that species. The status of each species, on the basis of the categories, is given in Table 1. The Fisheries Division has a breeding and re-stocking program underway for Table 1: Conservation status of native freshwater fish species in Victoria. (Nomenclature follows Cadwallader and Backhouse 1983). SPECIFIC NAME COMMON NAME SPECIFIC NAME COMMON NAME Presumed Extinct in Victoria Mogurnda adspersa Southern Purple-spotted Gudgeon Ambassis agassizi Agassizis Perch* Endangered Nannoperca variegata Galaxias olidus vat. ‘fuscus’ Maccullochella macquariensis Potamalosa richmondia Ewens Pigmy Perch Brown Galaxias Trout Cod Freshwater Herring Vulnerable Macquaria ausiralasica Galaxias cleaveri Macquarie Perch Tasmanian Mudfish Prototroctes maraena __ Australian Grayling Bidyanus bidyanus Silver Perch Maccullochella peeli Murray Cod Tandanus tandanus Freshwater Catfish Potentially Threatened Edelia obscura Geotria australis Yarra Pigmy Perch Pouched Lamprey Macquaria novemaculeata Australian Bass Galaxiella pusilla Dwarf Galaxias Broad-finned Galaxias Spotted Galaxias Golden Perch Galaxias brevipinnis Galaxias truttaceus Macquaria ambigua Indeterminate Gadopsis marmoratus _ Freshwater Blackfish Galaxias rostratus Flat-headed Galaxias Galaxias olidus Mountain Galaxias Gobiomorphus coxii Cox’s Gudgeon Indeterminate (cont.) Gobiomorphus australis Craterocephalus stercusmuscarum Craterocephalus eyresti Restricted Gadopsis bispinosus Nematalosa erebi Melanotaenia fluviatilis Uncertain Status Hypseleotris klunzingeri Hypseleotris spp. Philypnodon sp. Mordacia praecox Striped Gudgeon Freshwater Hardyhead Lake Eyre Hardyhead Two-spined Blackfish Bony Bream Crimson-spotted Rainbowfish Western Carp Gudgeon Midgley’s/ Lake’s Carp Gudgeons** Dwarf Flat-headed Gudgeon Non-parasitic Lamprey Presently Common and/or Widespread Anguilla reinhardtii Anguilla australis Galaxias maculatus Pseudogobius olorum Arenigobius bifrenatus Favonigobius tamarensis Philypnodon grandiceps Mordacia mordax Macquaria colonorum Nannoperca australis Retropinna semoni Pseudaphritis urvillii Atherinosoma microstoma *Zoological Catalogue of Australia Volume 7, p. 484. **Hoese et al. 1980. Vol. 107 No. 1 (1990) Long-finned Eel Short-finned Eel Common Galaxias Blue-spot Goby Bridled Goby Tamar River Goby Flat-headed Gudgeon Short-headed Lamprey Estuary Perch Southern Pigmy Perch Australian Smelt Tupong Small-mouthed Hardyhead 15 Contributions several warmwater native fish species. The program concentrates on three species of conservation concern: Trout Cod, Murray Cod and Macquarie Perch. The primary purpose of the program for these species is to improve their conservation status to and establish viable, self-sustaining popu- lations. Golden Perch are released into many waters specifically to improve recre- ational angling but the establishment of breeding populations is not an essential part of the program. Although this pro- gram has been underway for several years, the success of stockings is still being eval- uated and the establishment of self-sus- taining populations has not been verified. For this reason, the reviewers decided that the re-stocking program should not be taken into consideration in assessing the conservation status of these species. Of the 46 taxa of Victorian native fresh- water fish considered, two are now pre- sumed extinct in this State and another 17 are considered to be under threat. Four taxa have been placed in the ‘En- dangered’ category, which previously contained Trout Cod only (Cadwallader ef al, 1984), Distribution areas and locality records for the two species ‘presumed extinct in Victoria’ and the four ‘Endan- gered’ species are given in Fig, 1, and these species are illustrated in Fig’s 2-7. 2 \ 2 06 \ ; os » °G \ 4 J \ \ v SF 3 ) NS \ : mv. ~ a4 :0,001, *** p ¢ 0.001. BURNT UNBURNT 95% Cis 95% ron SPECIES mean lower upper mean lower upper Alcaena echinata 1.3 0.8 2.1 — Agrostis avenacea oat Ives) 7.9 _— “Aira cupaniana o45c 10 113; — *Briza maxima 7.8 2.0. 31.3 4.7 tes 16.7 “Briza minor 16" ** 53 256 — *Bromus hordeaceus — 4,0* Pal 15.0 *Cicendia quadrangularis 13 0.7 Deg = Convolvulus erubescens 2.0 1.0 3.9 iw) 0.8 2.6 *Cyperus tenellus ey 0.8 15.0 Danthonia spp! Det 1.0 4.8 — Deyeuxia quadriseta 1.4 0.6 aa8 — *Hypochoeris radicata 353 0.3 8.5 2.2 0.9 a Isolepis spp. 1.6 0.8 Jeo — Juncus bufonius Tot 1.5 41.4 — “Juncus capitatus 1.4 0.7 2.9 — *Lolium rigidum 1.4 0.7 3.0 Oxalis perennans 1.6 0.8 | — Plantago gaudichaudii 4.3 1.1 16.6 les 0.8 2.6 *Romulea rosea 606*** 461 799 23 10.3 49.5 Schoenus apogon 19 0.9 4.3 — *Sonchus oleraceus iS 0.8 2.6 _ Stipa spp.’ lee 0.8 Li? -- Themeda triandra (seedlings)* SSiher 0.8 22.8 — *Vulpia bromoides 849" 391 1845 8.0 2.6 24.9 . Danthonia spp. — . lsolepis spp. . Stipa spp. — mostly S. bigeniculata Sewn mostly D. caespitosa and D. setacea — mostly /. hookeriana and J, marginata Densities of seedlings of 7. triandra were underestimated (see text) Victorian Nat. Research Reports While six percent of native perennials from dry sclerophyll forest and 27 percent of those from heath and heathy woodlands were obligate seed regenerators, no grass- land perennials employed this strategy. Further, only 19 percent of native peren- nials in the grassland were observed to regenerate from seed compared with over 60 percent of native perennials in forest, heath and heathy woodland environments. A previous study at Derrimut found that the soil seed bank was dominated by exotic species, and contained few individuals of few native species (Lunt 1990b). The seed bank of native species was assumed to have been depleted during 80 years of stock grazing, due to continual predation on flowers, seedlings and established plants. The post-fire plant densities recorded in this study correspond broadly with seed densities in the soil, although spatial variability prevents a detailed comparison. Except for Acaena echinata, Agrostis avenacea, Spergularia rubra and a Stipa species, all natives that regenerated after fire from seed were recorded previously from the seed bank. *Vulpia bromoides and *Romulea rosea were the most abundant species in the seed bank and post-fire regeneration, with an average of 3199 viable seeds and 849 plants per m? of *l/ bromoides, and 1483 viable seeds and 606 plants per m? of *R. rosea in species- poor Themeda grassland (Lunt 1990b). The paucity of seedling regeneration by native species after this autumn fire pro- bably reflects pre-fire land use (grazing) rather than the regenerative potentials of grassland species. The recent removal of stock grazing may perhaps permit con- solidation of the native seed bank and enhanced seedling regeneration (of re- maining species) after future fires. Implications for management The post-fire abundance of exotic species presents a critical problem for conservation management of long-grazed T. triandra grasslands, as any benefit bestowed by burning to the diversity of Vol. 107 No. 2 (1990) native species is offset by the dramatic promotion of exotics. In this instance, four species of exotics accounted for 97 percent of individuals after fire: *Vulpia bro- moides, *Romulea rosea, *Briza minor and *Aira cupaniana. The imposition of a three to five year burning regime, which is widely recommended to maintain the diversity of native species in 7. (riandra grasslands (e.g. Robertson 1985, Stuwe 1986, McDougall 1987, 1989), will un- doubtedly maintain high densities of these exotics. Further, despite considerable debate on the impact on exotics of spring and autumn burning (see Robertson 1985, Stuwe 1986, McDougall 1987), any such differences appear minor in long-grazed grasslands. Robertson (1985) found that the post-fire densities of exotic annuals were similar after both spring and autumn burning at Gellibrand Hill. Propagules of exotic species are so abundant at Derrimut that differences in post-fire densities are perhaps inconsequential. It is worthy of note however that fire did not promote all exotic annual grasses: *Bromus hordeaceus decreased after burning at Derrimut, as occurred at Laver- ton North (McDougall 1989). Given this gross promotion of exotics by fire, it could be argued that too great an emphasis is presently placed on burning as the primary tool of vegetation manage- ment. If an aim of management is to promote natives at the expense of exotics, then more intricate techniques of vege- tation manipulation will have to be de- vised. The pertinent question for manage- ment of any invaded ecosystem then becomes not, “which of spring or autumn burning promotes the least exotics?”, but rather, “which combination of manipul- ative techniques promotes less exotics than either?” Degraded, invaded and isolated vege- tation remnants should not be managed solely by burning; burning should be integrated with other methods of vege- tation control, such as weeding, poisoning and perhaps manipulated, seasonal graz- ing by native or introduced herbivores. The 49 Research Reports role of fire in the management of invaded ecosystems may eventually prove similar to that in agricultural systems, where “fire plays its greatest part in weed control by improving the efficiency of other control methods” (Johnson and Purdie 1981). Acknowledgements Special thanks to Cathy Molnar for helping to count thousands of seedlings; to Bob Parsons and Keith McDougall for comments on the manuscript; and to David Jones of the Department of Conser- vation, Forests and Lands for adminis- trative assistance throughout the project. References Ashton, D.H. (1981). Tall open-forests. Jn Australian Vegetation. Ed. R.H. Groves, pp. 121-151. (Cambridge University Press: Cambridge). Cheal, D.C., Lau, J.A., Robinson, RW., Ellis, J.E. and Cameron, DG. (in press). Vegetation Survey and Sites of Botanical Significance in the Melbourne Area. (Department of Conservation, Forests and Lands Victoria: Melbourne). Christensen, P., Recher, H. and Hoare, J. (1981). Responses of open forests (dry sclerophyll forests) to fire regimes. J Fire and the Australian Biota. Eds A.M. Gill, R.H. Groves and I.R. Noble, pp. 367-393. (Australian Academy of Science: Canberra). Egler, FE. (1954). Vegetation science concepts. I. Initial floristic composition - a factor in old-field vegetation development. Vegetatio 4: 412-417. Forbes, S.J, and Ross, J.H. (1988). A Census of the Vascular Plants of Victoria. 2nd ed, (National Herbarium of Victoria: Melbourne). Gullan, P.K., Cheal, D.C, and Walsh, N.G. (1989), Victorian Rare or Threatened Vascular Plant Species, (Department of Conservation Forests and Lands: Melbourne). Johnson, RW. and Purdie, RW. (1981). The role of fire in the establishment and management of agricultural systems. Jn Fire and the Australian Biota. Eds A.M. Gill, R.H. Groves and IR. Noble, pp. 497-528. (Australian Academy of Science: Canberra). Kirkpatrick, J.B. (1986). The viability of bush in cities —ten years of change in an urban grassy woodland. Aust. J. Bot. 34; 691-708. Lunt, I.D. (1990a). A floristic survey of the Derrimut Grassland Reserve, Melbourne, Victoria, Proc. R. Soc, Victoria, 102 (in press). Lunt, .D. (1990b). The soil seed bank of a long-grazed Themeda triandra grassland in Victoria. Proc. R. Soc. Victoria. 102 (in press). McDougall, K. (1987). Sites of Botanical Significance in the Western Region of Melbourne. (Melbourne 50 Western Region Commission and Department of Conservation, Forests and Lands: Melbourne). McDougall, K.L. (1989). The Re-establishment of Themeda triandra (Kangaroo Grass): Implications for the Restoration of Grassland. Arthur Rylah Institute for Environmental Research Technical Report Series No. 89. (Department of Conservation, Forests and Lands: Melbourne). Mueller-Dombois, D. and Ellenberg, H. (1974). Aims and Methods of Vegetation Ecology. (John Wiley and Sons: New York). Noble, I.R. and Slatyer, R.O. (1981). Concepts and models of succession in vascular plant communities subject to recurrent fire. Ja Fire and the Australian Biota. Eds A.M. Gill, R.H. Groves and I.R. Noble, pp. 311-335, (Australian Academy of Science: Canberra). Purdie, RW. (1977). Early stages of regeneration after burning in dry sclerophyll vegetation. II. Regeneration by seed germination, Aust. J. Bot. 25: 35-46. Purdie, RW. and Slatyer, R.O. (1976). Vegetative succession after fire in sclerophyll woodland communities in south-eastern Australia. Aust. J. Ecol. 1: 223-236. Robertson, D. (1985). Interrelationships between Kangaroos, Fire and Vegetation Dynamics at Gellibrand Hill Park, Victoria. (Ph.D. Thesis, University of Melbourne: Melbourne). Rohlf, F.J. (1985). NT-SYS. Numerical Taxonomy System of Multivariate Statistical Programs. (State University of New York: New York). Scarlett, N.H. and Parsons, R.F. (1982). Rare plants of the Victorian plains. J Species at Risk: Research in Australia, Eds. R.H. Groves and W,D.L. Ride, pp. 89-105, (Australian Academy of Science: Canberra), Sokal, R.R. and Rohlf, F.J. (1981). Biometry. 2nd ed, (W.H, Freeman and Co.: New York). Specht, R.L. (1981). Conservation of vegetation types. Jn Australian Vegetation. Ed R.H. Groves, pp. 393-410, (Cambridge University Press: Cambridge). Stuwe, J. (1986). An Assessment of the Conservation Status of Native Grasslands on the Western Plains, Victoria and Sites of Botanical Significance. Arthur Rylah Institute for Environmental Research Technical Report Series No, 48. (Department of Conservation, Forests and Lands: Melbourne). Stuwe, J. and Parsons, R.F. (1977). Themeda australis grasslands on the Basalt Plains, Victoria: floristics and management effects, Aust. J Ecol. 2: 467-476, Wark, M.C., White, M.D., Robertson, D.J. and Marriott, P.H. (1987). Regeneration of heath and heath woodland in the north-eastern Otway Ranges following the wild-fire of February 1983. Proc. R. Soc. Viet, 99: 51-88. Victorian Nat. Research Reports Appendix 1. Post-fire regenerative strategies and the incidence of flowering in 1987 for all species recorded from the area burnt in April 1987, * = exotic'species V = vegetative regrowth S = seedling regeneration Perennials Acaena echinata VEs Amphibromus nervosus VF Asperula conferta VF Bothriochloa macra VF Brachyscome heterodonta VF Calocephalus citreus VFs Calotis anthemoides VF Carex inversa VF Chloris truncata VF Comesperma polygaloides VF Convolvulus erubescens VFs Craspedia chrysantha VF Danthonia auriculata VF Danthonia caespitosa VF Danthonia duttoniana VF Danthonia setacea VF Desmodium varians VF Deyeuxia quadriseta VF | Dianella revoluta VF Dichelachne crinita| VF Dichondra repens Vv Elymus scabrus VF Eryngium ovinum — VFs Eryngium vesiculosum VF Haloragis heterophylla VF Helichrysum apiculatum VFs Helichrysum rutidolepis VF *Holcus lanatus 2F Hypericum gramineum VF Vol. 107 No. 2 (1990) MS Lo F = *Hypochoeris radicata Juncus subsecundus *Leontodon taraxacoides Leptorhynchos squamatus Minuria leptophylla Myriophyllum sp. Oxalis perennans Pimelea curviflora Pimelea serpyllifolia *Plantago coronopus Plantago gaudichaudii *Plantago lanceolata Poa sieberiana Podolepis jaceoides Ptilotus macrocephalus Ptilotus spathulatus *Romulea rosea Rumex dumosus *Salvia verbenaca Schoenus apogon Solenogyne dominit Stackhousia monogyna Stipa bigeniculata *Stipa neesiana Stipa rudis Stipa setacea Themeda triandra *Tribolium acutiflorum Tricoryne elatior Velleia paradoxa Vittadinia cuneata Wurmbea dioica vegetative regrowth with minor seedling regeneration = regenerative strategy uncertain flowered during spring-summer 1987 VFs Annuals All species regenerated from seed and flowered in 1987 Agrostis avenacea *Aira cupaniana *Arctotheca calendula *Briza maxima *Briza minor *Bromus hordeaceus *Centaurium tenuiflorum *Cicendia filiformis *Cicendia quadrangularis *Cuscuta epithymum *Cyperus tenellus Isolepis marginata Juncus bufonius *Juncus capitatus *Linaria pelisseriana *Lolium rigidum *Parentucellia latifolia Sebaea ovata *Sonchus oleraceus Spergularia rubra *Trifolium angustifolium *Trifolium campestre *Trifolium dubium *Trifolium glomeratum *Trifolium striatum *Vulpia bromoides *Vulpia myuros forma megalura Wahlenbergia gracilenta 51 Research Reports Mammals of The Gurdies, Westernport Bay, a proposed Flora and Fauna Reserve Cc. G. Wilson* Abstract The MSGV recorded a total of 17 native and 2 introduced species of mammal in 5 surveys of The Gurdies between 1972 and 1987. A general description of the study area is presented, and the significance of the survey results are discussed, Introduction The Mammal Survey Group of Victoria Inc. (MSGY) is a voluntary organization with a main purpose of conducting surveys of the native land mammals of the State. The Gurdies, on the eastern shore of Westernport Bay, is in the Land Conser- vation Council (LCC) Melbourne Study Region (District 2), A list of mammals for the region, including early records of the MSGY, was published in 1973 (LCC 1973). More recently a locality list of mammals for the Westernport Region using a 5 minute latitude by $5 minute longitude grid systern was published (Andrew ef al. 1984), although no additional surveys were undertaken in The Gurdies. The Gurdies urea was recommended as a Flora and Fauna Reserve by the LCC 13 years ago (LCC 1977) and recognized by Andrew et al. (1984) as a site of zoological significance. Its current legal status: is Unreserved Crown Land, however man- agement is being undertaken by the Dep- artment of Conservation and Enyiron- ment in anticipation of full legal status. This paper summarizes the species of mammals recorded by the MSGV in The Gurdies between 1972 and 1987. Description of the Study Area Located on the Bass Highway approxi- mately 12 km south-east of the intersection * Mammal Survey Group of Victoria Ine, oe 6 Alphington Street, bairfield, Victoria, 3078. wa bh with the South Gippsland Highway, the survey area (Fig. 1) is representative of some of the largest remaining areas of native vegetation on the eastern shore of Westernport Bay. Having rural residential boundaries, The Gurdies (206 ha) includes vacant Crown land which is timbered and scrub covered, apart from two gravel pits, the northern one being still in use. Vegetation consists of open forest, the general canopy level being at a height of 10-15 m, and comprising mainly Messmate (Lucalyptus obliqua), and Narrow-leaved Peppermint (£. radiata). The understorey is sparse with a variety of wattles, chiefly Blackwood (Acacia melanoxylon), and eucalypt saplings to a maximum height of about 10 m. Shrub vegetation includes Variable Sallow Wattle (Acacia mucron- ata), Hop Wattle (A. séricta), Prickly Moses (A. verticilata), Silver Banksia (Banksia marginatay, Showy Bossiaea (Bossiaea cinerea), Sweet Bursaria (Bursaria spinosa), Dogwood (Cassinia aculeata), Black She-oak (Casuarina lit- toralis), Scrub She-oak (C. paludosa), Prickly Tea-tree (Leplospermum juniper- inum), Heath Tea-tree (L. siyrsinoides), Spike Beard-heath (Leucopogon australis), Snowy Daisy-bush (Olearia lirata), and Prickly Geebung (Persoonia juniperina). Except for some dense heathy patches of vegetation, the shrub layer is generally sparse and ranges from about 2-4 m in height. Density of ground cover varies considerably throughout the study site and includes Austral Bracken (Pteridium esculentum), various sedges, grasses and leaf litter. Several fern species are associ- ated with wetter areas such as the creek environment. Observations by the MSGY suggest that the area has occasionally been used as a source of firewood and fence posts. The Victorian Nat. Research Reports 145° a5'EF WESTERN Tho Gurdies. PORT Fig. 1. Location map of The Gurdies indicating the study site surveyed (shown stippled). Map reference (AMG) 8021 - 749495. land scouring effects of mining, regular motorcycle and horseriding activities are also evident; during the last visit to the study area (1987), both of the latter re- creational activities were witnessed. Methods Data was collected by surveys and chance encounters over the periods, 29-31 January 1972, 11-12 September 1982, 28-30 January 1984, 15-16 September 1984, and 9-10 May 1987. Surveys consisted of trapping, spot- lighting on foot, and the observation of any incidental evidence. At each survey period the number of personnel and hence the number of traps set and hours spent spotlighting varied. Vol. 107 No. 2 (1990) Wire cage traps (36 x 20 x 15 em), baited with a mixture of rolled oats, peanut butter and honey, wrapped in medical gauze, were set each afternoon by 1700 h and collected the following morning by about 0800 h. Captured animals were released in the precise locality where they were caught. Spotlighting was undertaken after dusk using 12 v sealed beam spotlights and batteries. The number of spotlights carried in each party was no greater than two, Bat trapping was undertaken at every camp except the first (1972). These mammals were surveyed using two collaps- ible bat traps (Tidemann and Woodside 1978) placed in potential bat flyways. Chance encounters included daylight records of specimens seen alive, those killed on the roads within one kilometre of the study site, and scats and diggings. The identification of all live specimens relied upon the experience of the observers. No rare species (for the area) was recorded unless identified by at least two observers or by someone familiar with the species, and no data were recorded unless identi- fication was beyond reasonable doubt. Scientific and common names used for mammals follow Walton (1988), except for Eptesicus darlingtoni (Kitchener ef al. 1987), Results Small Mammal Trapping A total of 91 individuals of 5 species were trapped in 737 trap-nights, giving an average trapping rate of 12.3% (Table 1). Brown Antechinus (Antechinus stuartii) and Bush Rat (Rattus fuscipes) were trapped in all periods while only one specimen each of Swamp Antechinus (Antechinus minimus) and Southern Brown Bandicoot (/soodon obesulus) was trapped, both in summer. Spotlighting A total of 214 individuals of 8 species were seen in a total of 56.5 spot-hours, giving an average spotlighting rate of 3.8 53 Research Reports Table 1. Small mammal trapping results for The Gurdies (1972-1987). Species trapped: Antechinus stuartit (Brown Antechinus) Antechinus minimus (Swamp Antechinus) Tsoodon obesults (Southern Brown Bandicoot) (Bush Rat) (Swamp Rat) Rattus fuscipes Rattus lutreolus Number of individuals: N ap-nights: Trapping rate (%): ber of tr Survey Perio Total Jan Sep Jan Sep May Individuals 1972 1982 1984 1984 1987 Trapped 6 4 8 6 13 37 i] 1 1 1 it 8 13 11 4 47 1 4 5 18 12 23 17 21 91 161 115 246 96 119 737 Laie 10.4 9.3 LT 17.6 12.3 animals/spot-hour (Table 2). Common Ringtail Possum (Pseudocheirus pereg- rinus) comprised 90.6% of animals seen and Eastern Grey Kangaroo (Macropus giganteus) 4.2%. Bat Trapping A total of 30 individuals of 4 species of bat were trapped in 9 trap-nights (Table 3). Little Forest Eptesicus (Epfesicus vulturnus) comprised 63% of bats caught and 73% of bats were trapped in summer. Daylight sightings and incidental evidence Evidence for an additional 3 species of Table 2. Spotlighting results for The Gurdies (1972-1987). mammal was collected (Table 4). European Rabbits (Oryctolagus cunniculus) were seen, a dead Common Brushtail Possum (Trichosurus vulpecula) was observed on a road, and diggings and scats of Common Wombat (Vombatus ursinus) were recorded. : Discussion A total of 17 native species of mammal, including one species of monotreme and 4 species of bat, and 2 introduced species of mammal were recorded in the survey of The Gurdies. This represents 47% of the native mammal fauna (excluding marine mammals) found in the whole Survey Perio: Total Jan Sep Jan Sep May individuals 1972 1982 1984 1984 1987 recorded Species recorded; Tachyglossus aculeatus (Short-beaked Echidna) 1 1 Tsoodon obesulus (Southern Brown Bandicoot) 1 1 Petaurus breviceps (Sugar Glider) 1 1 2 Pseudocheirus peregrinus (Common Ringtail Possum) 13 A2 58 37 14 194 Macropus giganteus (Eastern Grey Kangaroo) ve 3 1 2 1 9 Wallabia bicolor (Swamp Wallaby) 1 1 2 1 5 Phascolarctos cinereus (Koala) 1 1 Vulpes vulpes (Fox) 1 1 Number of individuals: 19 47 63 40 45 214 Spot-hours: 13.5 10 15 73 10,7 56.5 1.4 4.7 4,2 6.5 4.2 3.8 Spotting rate (animals /spot-hour): 54 Victorian Nat. Research Reports Table 3. Bat trapping results for The Gurdies (1982-1987). Survey Period Total Sep Jan Sep May Individuals 1982 1984 1984 1987 Trapped Species trapped: Chalinolobus gouldii (Gould's Wattled Bat) 2 2, Eptesicus darlingtoni (Large Forest Eptesicus) ws 2 Eptesicus vultumus (Little Forest Eptesicus) 14 ist 19 Nyctophilus geoffroyi (Lesser Long-eared Bat) 6 1 7 Number of individuals: (0) Ze 7 ] 30 Number of bat trap-nights: 1 4 2 2 9 Westernport Region since 1970. The region comprises a total of 3240 km?* which includes the Mornington Peninsula, the eastern edge of Westernport Bay, French Island, Phillip Island, and north to Gem- brook and Neerim South (Andrew et al. 1984). The records of Swamp Antechinus and the 4 bat species, Little Forest Eptesi- cus, Large Forest Eptesicus (Epfesicus darlingtoni), Lesser Long-eared Bat (Nyc- tophilus geoffroyi; Fig. 2) and Gould’s Wattled Bat (Chalinolobus gouldii) are new records for the survey area, although they have all been recorded elsewhere in Fig. 2. Lesser Long-eared Bat Nyctophilus the region (Andrew et al. 1984). geoffroyi. Photo J. Olden. Table 4. Daylight sightings and incidental evidence of mammals in The Gurdies (1972-1987). Survey Period Total Jan Sep Jan Sep May individuals 1972 1982 1984 1984 1987 sighted Species recorded: Tachyglossus aculeatus (Short-beaked Echidna) 1 1 2 Antechinus stuartii (Brown Antechinus) 1 1 Trichosurus vulpecula (Common Brushtail Possum) 1 1 Macropus giganteus (Eastern Grey Kangaroo) 1 14 15 Wallabia bicolor (Swamp Wallaby) 4 2 1 7 Vulpes vulpes (Fox) 2 1 3 Oryctolagus cuniculus (European Rabbit) 1 1 Number of individuals: 8 1 6 15 10) 30 Incidental evidence: Echidna diggings x x x x x Bandicoot diggings Sugar Glider calls Wombat diggings and scats Bat/s spotlit Rabbit seats x * Recorded in survey Vol. 107 No. 2 (1990) 55 Research Reports The Southern Brown Bandicoot and the Koala (Phascolarctos cinereus) were only recorded in 1972, however diggings ascribed to bandicoot spp. were observed in 1982 and 1984. In the context of urban sprawl, Dixon (1966) and Seebeck (1977) have indicated that habitat destruction and predation pressures are factors which will continue to threaten populations of the Southern Brown Bandicoot in the West- ernport catchment. The lack of tree species commonly used as food may account for the Koalas low density (for details of Koala habitat and tree preferences, see Lee and Martin 1988). The record of a Swamp Antechinus (Fig. 3) represents the fourth, and possibly the most recent, record of the species in the Westernport catchment area since 1970. The animal (adult, female) was captured at a trapping site in open forest having a dense heathy shrub layer of Prickly Tea-tree, Heath Tea-tree, Silver Banksia and Scrub She-oak. Ground cover at the trapping site was also dense. The Swamp Antechinus is considered endan- gered in Victoria because of its restricted (generally) coastal distribution coupled with the associated risk factors as indicated above for the Southern Brown Bandicoot (for details of habitat requirements of the Swamp Antechinus, see Wainer and Gib- son 1976). In contrast to the Swamp Antechinus, the Brown Antechinus, an- other of the insectivorous marsupials, is common and well dispersed throughout the study area. Unlike the Swamp Antechinus, the Brown Antechinus has a comparatively widespread distribution and inhabits widely differing vegetation types in south-eastern and eastern Australia (Wakefield and Warneke 1967; Hampton ef al. 1982). The Common Ringtail Possum was the most abundant and widespread species surveyed. Other arboreal species were rarely observed; only one road-killed specimen of the Common Brushtail Possum on the Bass Highway, outside the forested area, and 2 Sugar Gliders (Petaurus breviceps) were sighted. 56 Fig. 3. Swamp Antechinus Antechinus minimus. Photo J. Olden, Of the macropods, 2 species, the Eastern Grey Kangaroo and the Swamp Wallaby (Wallabia bicolor) are well represented; within the study area there is cover for refuge and shelter during the day, an important habitat requirement (Caughley 1964; Edwards and Ealey 1975). The Bush Rat, a native rodent, is com- monly dispersed throughout the study area. Less commonly trapped, the native Swamp Rat (Raftus /utreolus) has a distribution localised centrally within the forest and only where dense ground cover occurs. The introduced rodents, House Mouse (Mus musculus) and Black Rat (Rattus rattus) were not captured during the survey, although House Mouse has been recorded in the area and Black Rat nearby (Andrew et al. 1984). Using similar methodology, overall average small mammal trapping and spot- lighting success rates for all study areas of Victoria surveyed by the MSGV between 1972 and 1987 are 12.6% and 1.8 animals/ spot-hour, respectively (J. Poynton, MSGV Records Officer). A comparison indicates The Gurdies had a similar average small mammal trapping success rate (12.3%), and a higher than average spotlighting success rate (3.8 animals/spot-hour). The MSGV survey of The Gurdies indicates that the area contains a significant proportion of the native mammal fauna of the Westernport Re- gion. Nevertheless, The Gurdies is small in area and has a current legal status as Victorian Nat. Research Reports Unreserved Crown Land, so its long-term future is not assured. Government enact- ment of the 13-year old recommendation of the LCC, to create a Flora and Fauna Reserve, should aid its long-term conserv- ation in terms of habitat and species protection. The data presented in this paper would be useful in the planning of an appropriate management strategy for the Flora and Fauna Reserve. Acknowledgements Data presented in this paper was collected by members of the MSGV be- tween 1972 and 1987. The author wishes to acknowledge Mr. J. Barnett for com- ments on the manuscript. Mr. J. Olden kindly provided the two photographs. Protected species of mammals were hand- led under the provisions of permits issued by the Fisheries and Wildlife Division of the Department of Conservation, Forests and Lands. Equipment used in the survey and part maintenance costs were provided by grants from the M.A. Ingram Trust. References Andrew, D.L., Lumsden, L.F. and Dixon, J.F. (1984), Sites of Zoological Significance in the Westernport Region. (Dept. Conserv. For. and Lands: Melbourne). Environ. Stud. Publ. No, 327. Caughley, G.J. (1964). Density and dispersion of two species of kangaroo in relation to habitat. Aust. J. Zool., 12: 238-49, Dixon, J.M. (1966). Bandicoots — Partial survival in times of possible extinction. Vict. Res., 8: 62-3, Edwards, G.P. and Ealey, E.H.M., (1975). Aspects of the ecology of the Swamp Wallaby, Wallabia bicolor (Marsupialia: Macropodidae). Aust. Mammal, 1: 307-17. Hampton, JW.F., Howard, A.E., Poynton, J. and Barnett, J.L. (1982). Records of the Mammal Survey Group of Victoria, 1966-80, on the distribution of terrestrial mammals in Victoria. Aust. Wildl. Res., 9: 177-201. Kitchener, D.J., Jones, B. and Caputi, N. (1987). Revision of Australian Eptesicus (Microchiroptera: Vespertilionidae), Rec. West. Aust. Mus. 13: 427-500. Land Conservation Council (1973), Report on the Melbourne Study Area. (Govt. Printer: Melbourne). Land Conservation Council (1977). Final Recom- mendations for the Melbourne Study Area. (Govt. Printer: Melbourne). Vol. 107 No. 2 (1990) Lee, A. and Martin, R. (1988). The Koala, a Natural History, pp. 25-33. (New South Wales Uni: Kensington). Seebeck, J.H. (1977). Mammals in the Melbourne metropolitan area Victorian Nat., 94: 165-70, Tidemann, C.R. and Woodside, D.P. (1978), A collapsible bat-trap and a comparison of results obtained with the trap and mist nets. Aust, Wildl. Res., 5: 355-62. Wainer, JW. and Gibson, R.J. (1976). Habitat of the Swamp Antechinus in Victoria. Distribution and habitat requirements of the mainland Swamp Antechinus, Anlechinus minimus maritimus (Finlayson) (Marsupialia: Dasyuridae). Victorian Nat., 93; 253-5. Wakefield, N.A. and Warneke, R.M. (1967). Some revision in Anfechinus (Marsupialia) — 2. Victorian Nat., 84: 69-99, Walton, DW. (Ed) (1988). Zoological Catalogue of Australia. Vol. 5. Mammalia, Bureau of Fauna and Flora. (Aust. Govt. Pub. Service: Canberra). 57 Contributions The pond hunters dream D. E. McInnes The pond hunter is that odd person who may be seen occasionally, dipping with his pond net into a lake or pond and trans- ferring the contents into jars which he then takes home. Here he eagerly pours the water into shallow dishes, places them under the microscope and looking through the microscope hopes that he will see some of those wonderful pond creatures that are so well illustrated in the books on pond life. Every pond collection always has some form of pond life to be seen, you never come home empty handed. Sometimes only a few things other times quite a few and that great occasion when you see something you have never seen before. Pond hunters in their rambles always have that dream of the pond that has all the interesting forms of life they read about but never come across in their samples of pond life. Well last November | came across the Dream Pond close to home, it was the lake in the lovely Hedgely Dene Gardens in East Malvern. My equipment to take a sample could not be simpler. It consisted of two plastic (“Muesli”) bags, one inside the other to make sure they don’t leak, a couple of thick rubber bands (I pick up the ones the postman throws onto the footpath) and an old bootmaker’s knife to cut roots. At the lake I go to the spot where an old Willow tree grows near the bank. Here the willow roots can be seen growing out from the bank under the water level, the roots make an ideal place for all sorts of pond life that live attached. First I fill up the plastic bag with pond water and place it upright so it does not spill (not so easy), the water is a bright green colour, full of microscopic plants, to the creatures living in the pond it is like living in a world of vegetable soup. All you 58 have to do is open your mouth and swal- low. What a life of luxury. Next job is to cut with the boot makers knife the end pieces of willow root about 25 cm in length, cut some from different places and fill up the plastic bag, secure the top of the bag with the rubber bands. When home, empty the bag into a shallow container, a 4 litre icecream container is ideal. To view the pond life I use large and small petri dishes, these can be made by cutting rings of plastic downipipe that is 45 mm and 90 mm in diameter, the rings being 10 mm and 20 mm wide. Stick the rings to squares of glass (2.0 mm thick or less) with Selleyes window and glass cem- ent. A hint, clean the glass with detergent then polish with ‘Bon Ami’. The method to examine the material is to first look at the attached forms then look at the free swimming forms, so cut several pieces of the roots about 6 cm long and place them in a large petri dish with water covering them, (do not have parts sticking out of the water) and examine under a low power stereo microscope or under the lowest power of the ordinary microscope (15 X or 20 X). Look at all the pieces of weed or root. Use top lighting and dark ground lighting, I use both together. When you see an interesting part that needs higher power, cut off a small section 20-30 mm long and transfer to a small petri dish with just enough water to cover the root, examine with 100 X after checking the object is in the field with the lower power. Use darkground lighting to show up the colour then bright field lighting to see most detail. Now to see the free swimmers. Beside the animal free swimmers most of the algae are active swimmers as well and like human beings they all like to be in the Continued on page 59 Victorian Nat. The Victorian Naturalist Index to Volume 106, 1989 Compiled by K.N. Bell Australian Natural History Medal Donations, 167 Medallist, B. Fuhrer, 260 Authors Annable, T.J., 42 Bennet, W.M., 162 Bennett, S. and Mansergh, I., 243 Braby, M.F., 79, 118 Browne, J.H., 236 Calder, D.M., 59 (book review) Cavanagh, A.K., 140 Cheal, D., 258 (book review) Clarke, LC., 155 Coupar, 1.M. and Coupar, P.S., 26 Coupar, P.S. and Coupar, I.M., 26 Craig, S.A., Lumsden, L.F., Linden- mayer, D.B. and Smith, A.P., 174 Crosby, D.F. and Dunn, K.L., 184 Dixon, J.M., 194 Dixon, J.M, and Huxley, L., 4 Dunn, K.L. and Crosby, D.F., 184 Earl, G. and Lunt, I., 205 Editors, 69, 116 Fuhrer, B. and May, T., 133 Goldstraw, P. and Suckling, G.C., 179 Happold, D.C.D., 40 Harlow, P., Shine, R., Shine C. and Ross, G., 138 Hawkeswood, T.J., 93 Houghton, S., 260 Hutchinson, M., 96 Huxley, L. and Dixon, J.M., 4 Laidlaw, W.S. and Wilson, B.A., 224 Lillywhite, P.K., Van Praagh, D.D. and Yen, A.L., 197 Lindenmayer, D.B., Smith, A.P., Craig, S.A. and Lumsden, L.F., 174 Lumsden, L.F., Lindenmayer, D.B., Smith, A.P. and Craig, S.A., 174 Lunt, |. and Earl, G., 205 McCulloch, E.M., 28 McInnes, D.E., 86 McKelvey, MW., Overton, B.M. and Overton, D.S., 30 Mansergh, I., and Bennett, S., 243 May, S.J., 107 May, T., 48 May, T. and Fuhrer, B., 133 Menkhorst, PW., 30 (book review) Millar, B., 98 Overton, B.M., Overton, D.S. and McKelvey, M.W., 30 Overton, D.S., Overton, B.M. and McKelvey, M.W., 30 Paras, G.C., 40 (letter) Pemberton, D. and Skira, I.J., 202 Ross, G., Shine, C., Shine, R. and Har- low, P., 138 Shine, C., Shine, R., Harlow, P. and Ross, G. 138 Shine, R., Harlow, R., Ross, G. and Shine, C., 138 Skira, I.J. and Pemberton, D., 202 Smith, A.P., Craig, S.A., Lumsden, L.F. and Lindenmayer, D.B., 174 Suckling, G.C. and Goldstraw, P., 179 Turner, E.K., 208 (excursion), 252 Twentyman, J.D., 117 (letter) Van Praagh, D.D., Lillywhite, P.K. and Yen, A.L., 197 Wallis, R.L., 76, 172 (letter) Weatherhead, H., 103 Webb, G.A., 148 Williams, J.E., 43 Wilson, B.A. and Laidlaw, W.S., 224 Yen, A.L., Van Praagh, D.D. and Lillywhite, P.K., 197 Book Reviews Bats of South Aust., A Guide (T.B. Reaedon and S.C, Flavel), 29 Native Orchids of Aust. (D.L. Jones), 59 Terrestrial Reptiles of Aust., A Guide (S. Wilson and D. Knowles), 96 Wildflowers of ‘The Millewa’, A Guide (M. Kelly), 258 Botany Asterolasia phebalioides, 30 Banksia, Biology & Ecology: Recent Literature, 140 Botany in service of Medicine, 252 Eastern Underground Orchid, new locality, 43 Mallee vegetation, an overview. (Meet- ing Report), 103 Micromyrtus ciliata, insects as potential pollinators, 148 Rhizanthella Slateri, Eastern Under- ground Orchid, 43 Snow Gum, ecotone dynamics of, 45 Victorian Endemic on King Island, 30 Excursions Canberra and Mt. Kosciusko, 208 Fungal Excursions, 1986-88, 48 Grasses at Laverton & in Long Forest Mallee, 104 Mt. Kosciusko and Canberra, 208 F.N.CV. Approved Research Institute status, 70 Auditors Report, 63 Bylaws, 262 Club News, 33, 69, 109, 163 Council Report, 62 Group annual reports Botany, 106 Day, 107 Fauna survey, 159 Geology, 108 Library, 106 Microscopical, 108 Meeting Reports, 32, 109, 212 Fungi Fungi after fires: 1. Gerronema postii, 133 Gerronema postii, after fires, 133 Insects Butterfly fauna, LaTrobe University, 188 Euproctis baliolalis, skin irritation from, 26 Fungus feeding beetles, host records for, 93 Insects, potential pollinators of Micro- myrtus ciliata, 148 Ocybadistes walkeri sothis, distribution & range extension, 184 Skin irritation from Tussock Moth, 26 Invertebrates Gippsland Giant Worm, 197 Megascolides australis, further inform- ation on, 197 Stalked jellyfish at Black Rock, 86 Terrestrial molluscs, Sunraysia area, 236 Letters Ada tree, 103, 117 Platypus in Melbourne, 40 Mammals Elephant Seals, Tasmania, 202 Gymnobelideus leadbeateri, distribu- tion in Central Highlands, 174 Leadbeater’s Possum, distribution in Central Highlands, 174 Mammals, small, Angahook-Lorne S.P., distribution & habitat, 224 Mammals, Lysterfield-Cardinia Res., 76 Mastacomys fuscus, faecal pellets in field surveys, 41 Petaurus breviceps, Tower Hill, 179 Spotted Dolphin, first Vict. record, 194 Stenella attenuata, first Vict. record, 194 Sugar Glider, establishment at Tower Hill, 179 Thomson, D.F., Mammals of Vict., notes and collection on, 4 Miscellaneous Australia Day Honours, 69 Bryological workshop, 105 Ecological Survey Repts, C., F. and L., 205 Editorial Policy, 116, 215 Flora and Fauna Guarantee, 152 ‘Greenhouse’ and Wildlife Manage- ment, 243 Guidelines for Authors, 166 Microscope donation, 163 Roadside reserves, 162 Sites of Zoological significance, 172 V.ET. (very fast train), 98 von Mueller, Correspondence of, 31 Obituaries Bland, R.M., 242 Sonenberg, E.J., 155 Wheeler, W.R., 28 Places and Localities Angahooke-Lorne S.P., small mammals in, 224 Black Rock, Stalked jellyfish at, 86 Canberra and Mt. Kosciusko, excursion, 208 ill Cardinia Res. - Lysterfield, mammals, 76 Central Highlands, Leadbeater’s Pos- sum in, 174 Kangaroo Island, Vict. endemic on, 30 Kinglake N.P., reptiles of, 79 Lalrobe University, butterfly fauna, 118 Laverton, grasses at, 104 Long Forest Mallee, grasses at, 104 Lysterfield - Cardinia Res., mammals of, 76 Mt. Kosciusko and Canberra excursion, 208 Sunraysia area, terrestrial molluscs, 236 Tasmania, Elephant Seals, 202 Tower Hill, Sugar Glider establishment, 179 Reptiles Litoria caerulea, high body temper- atures, 138 Reptiles of Kinglake N.P., 79 iv Contributions Fig.1. Opercularia (top) and Zoothamnium (bottom). Reprod. from Kent (1882). limelight. Taking a good sample of the pond water in the large dish place it under the stereo or low power microscope and it will be noticed that all will tend to swim to the centre bright field. Take a pipette and suck up the concentrated sample and transfer it to a small petri dish. Examine the sample with 100 X, first with dark ground lighting then with the bright field. After those hints on methods let us look at some of the willow roots. Even with the naked eye many of the roots seem to be covered with fine hairs but under the microscope the growth is seen to be a mass of fine branching stems, at the end of each stem is a “head” like half of a cigar with Vol. 107 No. 2 (1990) a partly opened “lid” at the wide end. The “lid” has a ring of cilia beating furiously and causing a current of water to bring particles of food to the mouth below the “lid”. This is indeed an animal, one of the single celled animals, the only movement is a quick bending of the “head” when disturbed. The “lid” is similar to the operculum of the periwinkle and the name Opercularia Fig. 1 is given to the genus. A point of interest, after a short period all the “heads” will leave the stems and swim away, and just a mass of stems is left behind. On other roots more groups are seen but this time there is only a single stem to each “head” which is bell shaped with the ring of cilia around the bell mouth. Of course they were called “Bell Animalcules’’, now the genus is Vorticella. At the slightest touch the stem will contract like a spiral spring, there is a muscular strand down the centre of the stem that causes the retraction, then slowly the stem stretches out again and the cilia again start their beating. Here and there among the roots there is what seems to be a large bunch of Vor- ticellaon a single stem rather like a bunch of flowers, then all of a sudden the whole bunch shrinks to a tiny ball and the stem also contracts. What is it? It is called Zoo- thamnium Fig. 1 (Animal Bush). The “heads” are similar to the Vorticella and have the muscle strand in the stems but it also continues down the main stem so all the “heads” are drawn into a ball and the main stem into a short spiral. Along the root there is a trumpet shape attached to the root by the narrow end and at the wide end the edge is lined with cilia. Yes you have guessed right, it is the “Trum- pet Animalcule” or Stentor Polymorphus Fig. 2 (many forms) because sometimes it may build a gelatinous tube around itself and at other times may be seen somewhat shortened actively swimming around. In most cases the cilia ring will propel its owner through the water unless attached to something. 59 Contributions Fig.2. Stentor. Reprod. from Kent (1882). Looking around we find many little brown tubes attached to the roots and out of the tubes pops a little head. Checking under the higher power the head appears to be two little wheels and careful examin- ation shows here we have one of the “Wheel Animalcules” or Rotifers. These creatures are the favourites of the pond life hunters with their variety of shapes and ways of living. They all have a ring or corona of cilia which may be irregular or with one ring, two ring, four ring and in one case without cilia. One other common feature is the jaws or “mastax”, these are rather strange. Hold your fists closed and together at the wrists. Open and close your clenched fists at the wrists, this gives the crushing appearance of one type of mas- tax. Now open your fingers half way and open and close your hands at the wrist and this shows how the mastax is used for grasping and chewing. The tube of this rotifer is made of rings (faintly) and is untidy, sometimes there are other tubes growing from the side. The corona has two lobes like a figure eight, the long body 60 inside the tube is attached to the root. The name of this rotifer is Limnias Fig. 3. Careful hunting finds another brown tube but a neater one this time, a closer look shows we have a prize, a rotifer called the “Little Brickmaker”’, its name is F/os- cularia Fig. 3 (in the old books it was Melicerta). The corona has four lobes two larger than the others, the rotifer is very touchy and retreats into the tube at the slightest movement, the cilia causes par- ticles to run right around the corona and into the mouth to be mashed up by the jaws of the mastax. The rotifer spearates the unedible particles, mixes them up into a tight ball and deposits the balls like bricks in neat lines to form the wall of its tube. Fig.3. Limnias (left) Reprod. from Ward and Whipple (1963) and Floscularia (right) Reprod, from Carpenter (1901). Victorian Nat. Contributions Fig.4. Collotheca, Reprod. from Carpenter (1901). The next Rotifer is quite different, it is set in a clear gelatinous tube attached to the root, as it emerges from the tube five lobes start to expand but instead of cilia many very fine rays extend out until they are in straight lines in all directions from the lobes. Small protozoans and motile algae coming in contact with the rays move toward the centre and the mouth where they are gulped down and passed to the mastax to be chewed up. There are two varieties, one has broad lobes but the other has long narrow lobes. The rotifer is named Collotheca Fig. 4 (to add to the confusion it used to be Flos- cularia) and is quite colourful when seen with darkground lighting, one or two oval eggs may be seen alongside the body inside the gelatinous tube. Collotheca is a prize exhibit when shown at a Microscopical Meeting on rare occasions, but here there were hundreds, on one root 5 cm long | Vol. 107 No. 2 (1990) counted 42 and actually had 12 in the field of the microscope at one time. What a pond hunters dream. Quite easy to see and very different were Hydras which have six tentacles that are lined with stinging cells similar to jellyfish to which they are related. Any little water flea bumping the tentacles is stung and the tentacles push the flea to the mouth in the centre, the mouth opens wide to swallow the meal. At the side of the Hydra a bud develops into a new hydra complete with its own tentacles, Growing along a stem is a nearly trans- parent tube, at regular intervals there are protrusions like a narrow volcano. When all is still, out from the volcanoes comes a mass of tentacles, these spread out and it is seen that they are attached to a “U” shaped base, the tentacles are lined with cilia which beat in unison to cause a river of water to flow through the forest of tentacles. Any suitable food particles are guided to the mouth in the centre of the “U” base, particles not suitable for food are let through the tentacles and if large objects arrive one or more of the tentacles will bend out of the way and let them flow away. This spectacular creature is quite a find and it is one of the fresh-water bry- ozoa and the name is Plumatella Fig. 5. The food is passed to the stomach through a short intestine and out through an open- ing at the back of the base of the “U”. At the bottom of the intestine a fine tube branches off and here develops an oval egg which grows a central oval of dark brown with a lighter brown oval around it. The eggs are statoblasts and develop for Winter and Summer. Looking along some roots with a higher power there is a finger shaped form with a narrow stem joining it to the root, all around the top of the finger are rays point- ing out in every direction and at the lower end of the finger there are two bunches of rays. Each ray has a tiny knob at the end of it. In fact it all looks like a fancy pin cushion. There is no movement. How does it live? Well any small single celled 61 Contributions Vip.5. Plumatella (top) Reprod. from Ward and Whipple (1918) and Podophrya (bottom) Reprod. trom Hollowday (1946). creature coming in contact with the “pin- heads” becomes stuck and the “pinhead” penetrates the wall of the victim and then like a vampire all the internal juices are sucked out along the rays. The animal is one of the Suctoria a sub class of the Ciliates, this specimen has no hard lorica and is named Podophrya Fig. 5 (old book) asmaller specimen with a hard lorica and two bunches of rays was from the genus Acineta. So far all the interesting creatures seen have been attached to the roots so if we had just dipped in the pond net for sam- ples we would have missed the prize ex- hibits just described, so now let us look at the free swimmers. Quickly swimming across the field under the mircoscope are a variety of shapes, all attracted to the field of light. Most obvious is one like a large clear plastic bag with a ring of cilia driving it around, inside can be seen all the internal 62 organs including the jaws (mastax) of a rotifer, so it is the rotifer Asplanchna Fig. 6 which is quite carnivorous and will swal- low other small rotifers or water fleas. Sometimes a young Asplanchna can be seen developing inside the rotifer until it is nearly half the size of the mother then it is expelled and both go on their way. Some of the rotifers have a hard shell or lorica and one we see is round in shape with various spines at the front and back ends, the ciliary ring brings food and allows the rotifer to swim about, From the rear end extends a foot like an elephants trunk, lined and pliable with a couple of toes at the end to hold on. Sometimes this rolifer Brachionus Fig. 7 can be seen swimming but anchored by a thread extru- ded from the toes and attached to a surface. Very often one or two eggs will be seen attached to the base of the foot, as these are hatched externally. Another form is a blunt ended cigar with the cilia ring at the blunt end which has a few sharp spikes and extending back are three spines more than twice as long as the body. This is Filinia Fig. 7 (used to be Triarthra) and while swimming around slowly the spines will jerk down suddenly and move the rotifer away from any trouble. | Fig.6. Asplanchna. Reprod from Hollowday (1946). Victorian Nat. Contributions i a ee ——. tnt —_ inten; ST is, Al} fa ih A 3 2 a \ nal \ i\ Fig.7. Brachionus (top left), Filinia (top right) Polyartha (bottom left). Reprod. from Hollowday (1946a) and Keratella (bottom right) Reprod. from Hollowday (1946b). Now you see it and now you don’t is the feature that identifies another tiny rotifer like a wide oblong in shape with a number of short paddle like spines, the name is Polyarthra Fig. 7 (many joints). It will be seen slowly swimming along by means of the cilia ring then it disappears and you will find it in another part of the field. The paddle like spines jerk the rotifer away so Vol. 107 No. 2 (1990) quickly that the eye cannot follow it. One more small rotifer seen was Kera- tella Fig. 7 with a lorica of many plates. The front end has a number of curved sharp spines but at the rear there is a large pair of “cow horns” sometimes a large and a small “cow horn” and at other times just one “cow horn’. 63 Contributions Always crowding into the field of the microscope were very tiny reddish spheres propelled along by a long flagellum, they have a red “eye spot” and always seek to be in the light where they remain station- ary. Gradually the whole field is filled up with them, if you shifted the petri dish to a clear part they would again move and fill up the field. They are one of the algae called Trachelomonas which is related to the Euglena, a torpedo shaped green algae also with a red “eye spot” and flagellum. The Euglena can change its shape to a sphere or back to a torpedo and often does so, it is also a light seeker and swims rapidly. The most prominent algae in the green water of the pond was Dictyosphaerium (net sphere), minute green balls consisting of even smaller spheres in groups of four borne on stalks. Here and there were bright Desmids, one like a crescent moon Clos- terium, another in the shape of a cross Staurastrum. Like a green dust in the water and need- ing magnification of 400 to identify were the algae Scenedesmus, Ankistrodesmus and Selenastrum with an odd Pediastrum. Now and again a graceful square raft of sixteen green cells of Gonium would swim by, propelled by their delicate but vigorous flagella. Last but certainly not least in interest was a small translucent sphere like a dense mass of bubbles, the outer layer a little less dense than an inner circle. Fine rays extend out from all parts of the sphere, the rays are pliable and are covered with proto- plasm that streams up and down to the body. This is Actinosphaerium Fig. 8 one of the Heliozoa. A small protozoan touch- ing the rays becomes caught and is carried down with the layer of protoplasm to the body which engulfs the protozoan. Even a large organism can be caught and the body will rise up towards and absorb it, similar to the action of an amoeba. The Actinosphaerium is like an amoeba with rays. It makes a splendid exhibit under the microscope. 64 Fig.8. from Actinosphaerium. Carpenter (1901). Reprod. Other odds and ends could be men- tioned but this is enough to show that this pond was indeed the ‘pond hunters dream’. Back in 1856 P.H. Gosse in his book “Tenby” wrote wonderful descriptions of living creatures seen under the microscope and today they are still to be seen if you look below the surface of that ordinary looking old pond or lake in your own park. References Carpenter, W.B. (1901). The microscope and its revelations. (J.A. Churchill). Hollowday, E. (1946a). Introduction to the study of Rotifera. The Microscope and the Entomological Monthly. 6(3). Hollowday, E. (1946b). Introduction to the study of Rotifera. The Microscope and the Entomological Monthly. 6 (4). Hollowday, E. (1947), Introduction to the study of Rotifera. The Microscope and the Entomological Monthly. 6(9). Kent, W.S, (1882). A manual of the Infusoria. (D. Bogue Publishers, London). Ward, H.B, and Whipple, G.C. (1918). Freshwater Biology (John Wiley and Sons, New York). Ward, H.B. and Whipple, G.C. (1963). Freshwater Biology 2nd Edition. (John Wiley and Sons, New York), Victorian Nat. Reports FIELD NATURALISTS CLUB OF VICTORIA Report by Council The members of the Council submit herewith the Balance Sheet as at 31 December 1989, and the Statement of Income and Expenditure for the year ended on that date, and report as follows: 1. The names of the members of the Executive Council in office at the date of this report are as follows: Mr. G. Love Mr. J. Grusovin Mr, B, Abbott Dr. J. Douglas Mrs. S. Houghton Miss M. Allender Miss R. Watson Mr. M. McBain Mr. T. Offor Mr. N. Mefarlane Dr. A. Parkin Mr. G. Gillespie . The principal activities and objects of the Club are to stimulate interest in natural history and to preserve and protect Australian fauna and flora, No significant change in the nature of those activities occurred during that period. 3. The net deficit of the Club for the year ended 31 December 1989 was $9,681.00 (1988) surplus $697.00) in the General Account. In addition, surpluses were earned in the following Funds: Building Fund Excursion Fund Publications Fund Special Funds 4. The Club is prohibited from paying a dividend by its Memorandum and Articles of Association; consequently no dividend is recommended and no dividends have been paid. 5. The review of operations for the year: The Club’s groups met regularly throughout the year. The Botany, Day, Geology and Mammal Survey Groups arranged day trips and extended excursions. The Australian Natural History Medallion was administered and awarded to Mr. Bruce Fuhrer. 6. No significant changes in the state of affairs of the Club occurred during the financial year ended 31 December 1989. 7. No matters or circumstances have arisen since the end of the financial year which significantly affected or may significantly affect the operations of the Club, the results of those operations, or the state of affairs of the Club in financial years subsequent to the financial year ended 31 December 1989, 8. The likely developments in the operations of the Club and the expected results of those operations in financial years subsequent to the financial year ended 31 December 1989 are unlikely to have any significant effect on the financial results in future years. w Vol. 107 No. 2 (1990) 9 10, Information of Members of the Council: Graeme Love ~ President Occupation — Public Servant Council Member since 1985 Julian Grusovin ~ Secretary Occupation — Laboratory Technician Council Member since 1987 Bruce Abbott — Treasurer Occupation ~ Public Servant Council Member since 1989 Jack Douglas ~- Member of Council Occupation — Geologist Council Member since 1986 Sheila Houghton ~ Member of Council Occupation — Retired Council Member since 1981 Marie Allender — Member of Council Occupation — Retired Council Member since 1956 Robyn Watson ~ Member of Council Occupation — Botanist Council Member since 1989 Michael McBain ~ Member of Council Occupation ~ Company Director Council Member since 1987 Tim Offer — Member of Council Occupation — Botanist Council Member since 1989 Neil Mefarlane - Member of Council Occupation — Consultant Council Member since 1989 Alan Parkin ~ Member of Council Occupation ~ University Lecturer Council Member since 1989 Graeme Gillespie — Member of Council Occupation - Zoologist Council Member since 1989 Since the end of the previous financial year no member of the Council has received or become entitled to receive any benefit by reason of a contract made by the Club with him or with a firm of which he is a member or with a company in which he has substantial financial interest. SIGNED at MELBOURNE this 30th day of April 1990 in accordance with a resolution of the Council. G. Love, President B. Abbott, Treasurer 65 Reports 6970 8SL Ta Sukh cic Pon pourra eee eae 4eak 104 siding Ge te cope ee aaa sajeS SyOog UO jO1lg Jo JojsuRiL, — Junosoy juawaaoIdWy] qniD L78*‘S ZLS EL a Pe eae dl corn ome ay ots Pa soley ~ sasuadxg ayeisury _— vA sasuadxg uoljepay Aroisty yeIMIeN GS Gren R Age Us Greenies T BSN: sasuedxq [elouey LIE Petty st ecco conor ee ot ee ee toa ae 20uBINSUT OOE (p 210N) UONRIOUNWIZY S.1o1pny 6SP suoneuog 7 suonduosqns ‘seej uonelyyy wntieqisy trl 8ZL‘T BuidAy, 2 Sutdaayyoog OO£ “+ KiquOnels 2 SuNULG CGA | Nr diktcan les Aa eis eenig auoydajay 3 a3e1s0d sasuadxy SUIYIOAA P89°ET Ga here eae aye eet Aansealy syuBly ssa] PR eee Mah RUN Cae oe yoredsaq 2 suNessn{|] ‘sunuud ISIEINJVAN, UBLIOJIIA $ 6861 AYA LIGNAdXa L8p°P7 008*r 697'7 os 7Z0'1 6ST $09°T 697°0E 189°6 Ot‘ T Ieak IOJ WOYEd “sassy Pax Jo aes uo WjOld Seah Frente. pate 3dooso19 11] “*sajesg yOog uO 1JO1d Boy tee ond Pe ae awioouy Aipuns “pina uoTepaW Aloisi [eINIeN * puny drysiaquiay] ast] pases caat.an dy genset TATA eT usodaq ae aati cke Magara AoeBa] IOXTePM WO - spuog ‘AoeSaq 1s WW - Spuog ““spuog yi]eaMuOWUOD qunossy yueg Seren Sees ease ere ps eee tac et gee a “puny Areiqry paalavay S349} U] oink sles oNSAEAS Roe nny 9 ea edres geben Hi peieb mean y Seimiet = 5= s]uawastaApy Rk ara ea TS Ceca JsI[BININ] UPIIOISIA,, JO sayes “ sunioddns pe mereye dasa hap Hk PeeR SH apts eos xe yuanind SEAT Jeveceeeeeertneneeeeeesrssesereeseeeeeteeeees SIBOTIW paataday suondiuosqns AWOONI 6861 WAAWAIAC Ie GAGNA UVAA - AMNLIGNAdXA F ANOONI JO LNAWALVLS VINOLOIA AO A€NTO SLSITVANLIVN GTA Victorian Nat. 66 Reports In the 1. (a) (b) (c) A FIELD NATURALISTS CLUB OF VICTORIA STATEMENT BY MEMBERS OF COUNCIL opinion of the members of the Council: The accompanying Income & Expenditure Account is drawn up so as to give a true and fair view of the results of the company for the financial year ended 31 December 1989, The accompanying Balance Sheet is drawn up SO as fo give a true and fair view of the state of affairs of the company as at the end of the financial year. At the date of this statement, there are reasonable grounds to believe that the company will be able to pay its debts as and when they fall due. 2. The accompanying Accounts have been made out in accordance with Australian Accounting Stand ards and applicable approved accounting standards. This statement is made in accordance with a resolution of the Members of Council. SIGNED at MELBOURNE this 30th day of April 1990, G. Love, President B. Abbott, Treasurer FIELD NATURALISTS CLUB OF VICTORIA BALANCE SHEET AS AT 31 DECEMBER 1989 Notes 1989 1988 Current Assets (OTe Oe ak ie SS a ere I te dat Ae ee 5 27;288 33,976 Receivable 6 : 13 MRIPRIICOTIOS races take cece ee cee ce hiss up behead Aden OG Un LAE Ty aaind aoe dare Rae AgR Eo ake OETA SLY 7 1 206 Total Current As: 35,395 Non-Current Assets : : Iifejor late Ah vatan: 1 Tah cea Mhivel-tetaa ey prey eos EEPEOEE Ber ore Cee CR TeEEE MT LOCUS ONE PELE CC reese 8 9,541 . S41 PRN OSU USO tal et treats oT t tak rravd atte Caer sie tewerev gad evita herd heh ia it Cee ha AT 9 156,430 Total Non-Current Assets 22 2 165,971 Total Assets 257,897 201,366 Current Liabilities ATECItOTS ANC BOLYOWINGS vines issuer's uss ddaet nn Gepey eet ag ts bed enees Aa yeeateyl kites 10 32,294 (18,499 , QU Total Liabilities 32,294 _ 18,499 Net As 225,603 182,867 Shareholders’ Equity Share Capital at eee te te glu lite OT Tapp ean EEete npr PEP Ee her opree ge nes ney nec etre Total S hareholders’ Equity ia 225,603 182,867 225,603 182,867 The accompanying notes form part of these financial statements. Vol. 107 No. 2 (1990) 67 Reports 68 FIELD NATURALISTS CLUB OF VICTORIA NOTES TO AND FORMING PART OF THE ACCOUNTS YEAR ENDED 31 DECEMBER 1989 Statement of Accounting Policies The accounts have been prepared in accordance with the accounting standards issued by the Australian accounting bodies and with the disclosure requirements of the Companies (Victoria) Code, Schedule 7 as in operation on 30th September 1987. The accounts have also been prepared on the basis of historical costs and do not take into account changing money values or, except where stated, current valuations of non-current assets. The accounting policies have been consistently applied, unless otherwise stated. The following is a summary of the significant accounting policies adopted by the Club in the preparation of the accounts: (a ) Investments Investments are valued either at cost less amounts written off for permanent diminution in the value of investments or, at directors’ valuation. Dividends and interest are brought to account when received. (b) Fixed Assets (c (d (e O Fixed assets are valued at cost or valuation. No provision has been made for depreciation of the Library as in the opinion of the Council its value greatly exceeds the value shown in the books of account. Income Tax The Club is not liable to pay income tax. Inventories Inventories are valued at the lower of cost and net realisable value. Club Improvement Account Profit on sale of books is capitalised to the club improvement account to reflect realised capital profit. 1989 1988 perating profit has been determined after: (a) Charging as Expense — Depreciation of plant & Equipment — a Rental expense on operating leases 1,443 1,210 (b) Crediting as Income - (c Interest received from other persons — 2,920 Profit on sale of non-current assets — _— ) Recognising Operating Revenue - Membership subscriptions 16,051 16,699 Interest 22,041 16,748 Proceeds on disposal of non-current assets _ 2,770 Remuneration of Councillors No remuneration was received by the councillors from the Club for the year ended 31 December 1989 a = Auditors’ Remuneration A mount received or due and receivable by the auditors for: Auditing the Accounts 300 265 Other Services — — Cash Cash at Bank 8,245 13,779 Cash at Bank - Bicentennial Grant 19,043 10,197 Australian Savings Bonds at cost — Receivables Sundry debtors _ 213 Victorian Nat. Reports 7. Inventories Badges and sundries 85 85 Books for sale 297 331 Victorian Naturalist Subject Index 765 790 1,147 1,206 8. Property, Plant & Equipment Freehold property - Kinglake (gift of Harold C. Frahm) = = Maryborough, Cosslick Reserve, at cost Pik) 213 Library, furniture & equipment At cost 95328 9,328 Less accumulated depreciation — —_ 9,541 9,541 9. Investments General Fund Australian Savings Bonds at cost — 8,300 Esanda Ltd. - Debentures at cost 8,600 8,000 ANZ Savings Bank - Deposit 6,055 5,472 ANZ Term Deposit 20,352 — Bank of Melbourne - Deposit 4,321 2,443 Building Fund Australian Savings Bonds at cost 900 3,100 Esanda Ltd. - Debentures at cost 4,700 5,900 ANZ Banking Group Ltd. - Cash at Bank 4,723 3,591 ANZ Term Deposit 36,446 — Bank of Melbourne — Deposit 2,172 Daa Publications Fund Australian Savings Bonds at cost 9,100 45,380 Esanda Ltd. - Debentures at cost 2,500 5,000 Telecom - Bonds at cost _— 1,500 ANZ Savings Bank - Deposit 11,956 10,804 ANZ Banking Group Ltd. 17,549 12,248 ANZ Term Deposit 46,067 — Book Stocks at cost 5,841 6,084 Bank of Melbourne - Deposit 5,158 6,916 Excursion Fund Australian Savings Bonds at cost — 1,000 ANZ Savings Bank - Deposit 11,981 10,826 ANZ Term Deposit 1,221 — Cash at Bank 26,949 29,052 Sundry Creditors (6,670) (11,959) 33,481 28,919 TOTAL INVESTMENTS 219,921 156,430 Vol. 107 No. 2 (1990) 69 Reports 10 70 Creditors and Borrowings Subscriptions received in advance Sundry creditors M.A. Ingram Trost Grant in hand lrensury Grants in hand Bicentennial Grant in hand Accumulated Funds General Fund Halance | January Transfer to D, Melnnes Hund Net Surplus (Deficit) for year BALANCE at 41 December 1989 Specific Funds Ruilding Punds Halance atl January Net Surplus for year BALANCE at V1 December 1989 Publications Bund Halanee at 1} danuary Net Surplus for year BALANCE at Jt December 1989 Baxcursion Fund Halance at 1 January Net Surplus for year BALANCE at UE December 1989 Club Improvement Account Halanee att January Net Surplus for year BALANCE al dE December 1989 Kinglake Project Fund Halance at 1} January Net Surplus for year BALANCE at M1 December 1989 Sundry Bequests & Legacies Halanee at | January Net Surplus (Deficit) for year HALANCE at i December 1989 POTAL, SPECTELIG FUNDS LOTAL, ACCUMULATED FUNDS 1,540 9,519 2,154 44 19,044 32,294 13,853 (50) (9,681) 4,122 15,364 43,577 AK 941 87,932 10,239 98,171 28,919 4,562 \4,481 14,909 758 15,667 1,478 2,844 4,322 20,412 487 20,899 221,481 225,603 3,578 2,533 154 2,037 10,197 18,499 13,910 1,454 15,364 78,331 9,601 87,932 25,442 3,477 28,919 13,888 1,021 14,909 1,313 165 1,478 20,178 234 20,412 169,014 182,867 Victorian Nat. Reports ‘ FIELD NATURALISTS CLUB OF VICTORIA STATEMENT OF SOURCES AND APPLICATIONS OF FUNDS YEAR ENDED 31 DECEMBER 1989 SOURCES OF FUNDS Funds from Operations (Note 1) Inflows of funds from operations Less outflows of funds from operations Reduction in Assets Current Assets Cash Inventories Receivables Non-Current Assets Proceeds on disposal of non-current assets Increase in Liabilities Creditors and borrowings Increase in Fund Balance - M. Lester Legacy APPLICATIONS OF FUNDS Increase in Assets Current Assets Cash Receivables Other Assets Investments NOTE 1: Funds from Operations Less - Interest and other items credited direct to Special Funds Add - Profit on disposal of non-current assets Add - Increase in D. McInnes Fund NET OPERATING SURPLUS/(DEFICIT) BUILDING FUND Balance of Fund at 31 December 1988 Interest on investments and bank account Bequest Balance of Fund at 31 December 1989 PUBLICATIONS FUND Balance of Fund at 31 December 1988 Interest on investments and bank account Sundry Surplus for the year from - Fossil Book Balance of Fund at 31 December 1989 Vol. 107 No. 2 (1990) 1989 63,491 63,491 10,811 20,542 50 (9,681) 1878 $ 15,364 1,651 31,926 48,941 1988 $ Reports CLUB IMPROVEMENT ACCOUNT Balance of Account at 31 December 1988 Book sales account profit Balance of Account at 31 December 1989 EXCURSION FUND Balance of Fund at 31 December 1988 Interest on investments and bank account Surplus on tours Sundry Less: Transfer to Kinglake Project Transfer to Library Fund Balance of Fund at 31 December 1989 14,909 13,888 758 1,021 15,667 14,909 28,919 25,442 3,881 3,389 2,646 88 530 = (2,345) = (150) s 33,481 28,919 FIELD NATURALISTS CLUB OF VICTORIA BALANCE SHEET AS AT 31 DECEMBER 1989 ASSETS Current Assets Cash at Bank Cash at Bank - Bicentennial Grant Australian Savings Bonds at Cost Accounts Receivable Stocks on Hand at Cost Badges & Sundries Books for Sale Victorian Naturalist Subject Index Fixed Assets at Cost Library Furniture & Equipment Land — Cosstick Reserve, Maryborough Investment of Funds at Cost Australian Savings Bonds Esanda Ltd. Debentures ANZ Term Deposit ANZ Savings Bank - Deposit Bank of Melbourne - Deposit Building Fund Australian Savings Bonds at cost Esanda Ltd. Debentures at cost Bank of Melbourne — Deposit ANZ Term Deposit Cash at Bank 72 1989 1988 $ $ 8,245 13°7-79 19,043 10,197 — 10,000 — 213 85 85 297 331 765 790 9,328 9,328 213 213 9,541 9,541 = 8,300 8,600 8,000 20,352 a 6,055 5,472 Victorian Nat. Reports Publications Fund Australian Savings Bonds at cost 9,100 45,380 Esanda Ltd. — Debentures at cost 2,500 5,000 Bank of Melbourne — Deposit 5,158 6,916 Telecom - Bonds at cost — 1,500 ANZ Savings Bank — Deposit 11,956 10,804 ANZ Term Deposit 46,067 — Book Stocks at cost 5,841 6,084 Cash at Bank 17,549 12,248 98,171 87,932 Excursion Fund Australian Savings Bonds at cost — 1,000 ANZ Savings Bank 11,981 10,826 ANZ Term Deposit Py227 _ Cash at Bank 26,949 29,052 Sundry Creditors (6,670) (11,959) 33,481 28,919 257,897 201,366 AUDITOR’S REPORT TO THE MEMBERS OF FIELD NATURALISTS CLUB OF VICTORIA We report that we have audited the accounts of the FIELD NATURALIST CLUB OF VICTORIA in accordance with Australian Auditing Standards. In our opinion the accompanying accounts, being the Balance Sheet, Statement of Income and Expenditure, Notes to Accounts, Statement of Source and Application of Funds and Statement by Members of the Council, are properly drawn up in accordance with the provisions of the Companies (Victoria) Code 1981 and so as to give a true and fair view of:- (i) the state of affairs of the company at 31 December, 1989 and of the results of the club for the year ended on that date; and (ii) that other matters required by Section 269 of that Code to be dealt with in the accounts; and are in accordance with Australian Accounting Standards and applicable approved accounting standards. GORDON CLARK & ASSOCIATES MELBOURNE Certified Practising Accountants March 1990 Vol. 107 No. 2 (1990) 73 74 vie GURVE) GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF VICTORIA PUBLICATIONS NOW AVAILABLE DOOKIE 1:100 000 GEOLOGICAL MAP & GEOLOGICAL SURVEY REPORT NO 87 (70 PAGES, 10 PLATES): Price $20 This full colour geological map features a sequence of Cambrian igneous and sedimentary rocks which formed in a "mid-ocean ridge" environment. They are approximately 550 million years old and as such are amongst the oldest rocks exposed in Victoria. The notes describe the surface and subsurface geology as well as the area’s mineral and groundwater potential. ‘The geological history is described and an excursion guide is included. WARRNAMBOOL 1:50 000 GEOLOGICAL MAP & GEOLOGICAL SURVEY REPORT NO 86 (83 pages, 34 diagrams & photos): Price $20 Full colour map and accompanying explanatory notes describing surface and below surface sedimentary and volcanic rocks. It includes an enlargement, description and the eruption history of Tower Hill Volcano, which at 20,000 years old is amongst the youngest and best preserved volcanoes in Victoria. A comprehensive summary of the geological history of the area from 110 million years ago to the present is given. Comments are made on the economic importance of various stone resources and units which contain groundwater and oil and gas potential. CASTLEMAINE 1:100 000 DEEP LEADS MAP: Price $4 Full colour map with insets showing simplified geology with mine shaft locations and positions of deep leads. PALAEOZOIC STRATOTECTONIC & STRUCTURAL FEATURES OF VICTORIA (1:1 000 000): Price $7.50 Full colour map showing the Palaeozoic stratotectonic units in Victoria with the main structural features superimposed. This is the first time such features have been published on a map at this scale allowing a statewide overview to be readily gained. PALAEOZOIC STRUCTURAL FEATURES OF VICTORIA (1:1 000 000): Price $7.50 The map gives a broad overview of bedrock structural trends in Victoria useful for teaching, research and display purposes. The features are colour coded reflecting the association of various features with certain time periods or tectonic events. VICTORIA’s GOLD PROVINCES (1:1 000 000): Price $7.50 This full colour map for general display or teaching purposes shows the main gold provinces with summary text on gold in Victoria. AVAILABLE FROM Sales & Publication centre Department of Industry, Technology & Resources 5th Floor 115 Victoria Parade FITZROY 3065 Phone (03) 412 8000 Victorian Nat. FNCV NEW MEMBERS Metropolitan Country Rosalind Moore and Jeremy Patricia Murphy, Ballarat. Price, Doncaster. Jeanette Tyers, Rhyll. Dean Haywood and Alison Ian Dowling, McCrae. Haywood, Northcote. Susan Taylor, Yarram. Jennifer Gassin and Robert Gassin, Knoxfield. Retired Barry and Margaret Dowling, J.M. McCoy, Boronia. Richmond. Dr. Richard Williams and Dr. Bronwyn Myers, East St. Kilda. Shirley Shannor, Hampton. Jan Pfeiffer, Greensborough. Graeme Challis, Melbourne. Val Define, South Caulfield. Anne Casey, West Brunswick. Ruth Akie, Canterbury. Monique Planter, Eltham. Jean Moy, Kew. Malcolm Warren, Blairgowrie. Peter Himing, Epping. Field Naturalists Club of Victoria In which is incorporated the Microscopical Society of Victoria Established 1880 Registered Office: FNCV, c/ National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, South Yarra, 3141. OBJECTS: To stimulate interest in natural history and to preserve and protect Australian fauna and flora. Members include beginners as well as experienced naturalists. Patron His Excellency, The Rev Dr John Davis McCaughey, The Governor of Victoria. Key Office-Bearers 1989-1990 President: Vice President: Mr. ARTHUR FARNSWORTH, FNCY, National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, South Yarra, 3141. Hon. Secretary; Mr. JULIAN GRUSOVIN, | Warriner Court, East Oakleigh, 3166. (543 8627 A.H.) Hon. Treasurer: Mr. BRUCE ABBOTT, 4/597 Orrong Road, Armadale, 3143. (529 4301 A.H.) Subscription-Secretary; Ms DIANNE CHAMBERS, FNCY, ¢/ National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, South Yarra, 3141 (387 5146). Editors: ROBY N WATSON and TIM OFFOR, FNCYV, c/ National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, South Yarra, 3141 (419 3532). Librarian: Mrs, SHEILA HOUGHTON, FNCYV, c/ National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, South Yarra, 3141 (551 2708) Acting Excursion Secretary; DOROTHY MAHLER (850 9379 A.H.). Club Reporter: Vacant, Conservation Co-ordinator: Mr. WIL. ASHBURNER, National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, South Yarra, 3141, Sales Officer (Books): Vacant. Sales Officer (Victorian Naturalist only): Mr. D. E. McINNES, 129 Waverley Road, East Malvern, 3145 (S41 2427) Programme Secretary: Vacant. Publicity Officer: Miss Margaret Potter, 1/249 Highfield Road, Burwood, 3125. (889 2779), Group Secretaries Botany: Miss MARGARET POTTER, 1/249 Highfield Road, Burwood, 3125 (889 2779), Day Group: Mr. D. &. McINNES, 129 Waverley Road, East Malvern, 3145 (541 2427) Geology: Miss HELEN BARTOSZEWICZ, 16 Euroa Avenue, Nth. Sunshine, 3020 (311 5106 A.H.) Fauna Survey: Mr. JULIAN GRUSOVIN, | Warriner Court, East Oakleigh, 3166. (542 2396 B.H. and 543 8627 A.T1.) Microscopical: Mrs. ELSIE GRAHAM, 147 Broadway, Reservoir, 3073 (469 2509) MEMBERSHIP Membership of the E.N.CY. is open to any person interested in natural history. The Victorian Naturalist is distributed free to all members, the club's reference and lending library is available and other activities are indicated in reports set out in the several preceding pages of this magazine. Subscription rates for 1988 Metropolitan Members (03 area code) $25.00 Joint Metropolitan Members $27.00 Gountry/Interstate/Retired Members $23.00 Joint Country/Interstate/Retired Members $25.00 Student (full-time) $18.00 Junior (under 18; no Victorian Naturalist) $5.00 Subscription to Victorian Naturalist . $23.00 Overseas Subscription to Victorian Naturalist $30.00 Affiliated Clubs $25.00 Subscriber Clubs ' $23.00 Individual Journals $3.50 Late Fee (Renewing Members), after end of March $2.00 JENKIN BUXTON PRINTERS PTY. LTD, 119 ABBOTSFORD ST, WEST MELBOURNE 928-4774 ‘The Victorian Naturalist a ea j Py eee eV) Ln Uti UALg te, ¢ 3 - AUG 1990 June 1990 LIBRARY Published by The Field Naturalists Club of Victoria since 1884 FNCV DIARY General Meetings Held on the second monday of the month (except for public holidays), 8.00 p.m. at the National Herbarium, corner of Birdwood Avenue and Dallas Brooks Drive, South Yarra. Meetings include a talk by a guest speaker. All members of the public are welcome. Monday 13th August Monday 10th September Marine life of Heron Reef. To be announced. Mrs. Julie Marshall FNCV Excursions Special notice: some excursions will be held on Saturdays since public transport is more frequent than on Sundays. For details of excursions contact Dorothy Mahler (Ph. 850 9379 after 6.00 p.m.). Sunday 5th August Sunday 2nd September Blackburn Lake. Meet at Blackburn The 100 Acres, Park Orchards. Meeting Station at 10.30 a.m. Catch 10.03 a.m. 10.30 a.m., Melways: 35 F9. Train trav- train at Flinders Street Station. ellers: Train leaves Flinders St. Station 9.23 a.m. Dorothy Mahler will pick up travellers from Ringwood Station. Please ring Dorothy on 850 9379 (H) or 265 2399 (W) if you are travelling by train to organise pick up. Group Activities Fauna Survey Group Meetings (First Tuesday in the month) Tuesday 7th August Botany Group Group Meetings (Second Thursday) Thursday 9th August Thursday 13th September From Dalhousie to Western Queens- Victoria’s Rainforests. David Cameron. land. Margaret Corrick. Excursions Saturday 28th July Saturday 25th August Mosses. Warburton area. Leader Cranbourne annexe of the Royal Arthur Thies, Botanic Gardens. Leader to be arranged. Geology Group Group Meetings (First Wednesday) Wednesday 8th August Microscopical Group Group Meetings (Third Wednesday) Wednesday 15th August Wednesday 19th September Polarised light and the microscope. Cet slides. Members to make and isplay. Hawthorn Juniors Group Meetings (Last Friday) Friday 27th July Contacts: Gerard Marantelli 497 2281 Alpine Wildlife. Peter Kelleher 337 6405 Friday 31st August To be arranged. Apology The editors apologise for the lateness of the April and June issues of The Victorian Naturalist. Times have been lean both for completed articles and assistance with production. We believe that we have remedied the situation. The August issue is in production and will be out on time. Registered by Australia Post, Publication No. V.B.P. 1268 + a \ “3 - AUG 1990 Th Victorian Naturalist Volume 107 (3) June, 1990 Editors: Tim Offor and Robyn Watson. Research Reports Contributions Naturalist Notes Reviews Reports ISSN 0042-5184 Notes on fruit condition, germinability and seedling morphology of Olearia pannosa Hook. (Velvet Daisy-bush) by M. J. Bartley.... Cliff instability on the Victorian coast by Eric Bird ..........00....0005 Lepilaena cylindrocarpa and L. marina at Swan Bay, Victoria Dy ase SLL OTHET St eavanede doce 4 he PEA easiae ean sue ule by ae nwaetey emt aenet Bush-peas of Victoria - genus Pultenaea Sm. (Fabaceae) no. 24. A key to Pultenaea species in Victoria and an index to previous ATLICLES EDV wiVie Gs SOOTTIGN a Red Bluff Sand )2 5. = Black Rock Sandstone ——~—}— metres Fig. 7. Relationship of cliffs cut in Black Rock Sandstone to the Beaumaris Monocline. HWM =high water mark, Successive surveys of this cliff have shown the importance of seepage and runoff following heavy rains, in cutting the cliff-face rills and carrying down fans of soft sandy material to the cliff base, which are then washed away by waves at high tide. Alternations of erosion by this subaerial runoff and basal undercutting by high tide storm waves have combined to cut this cliff back, but the rate of recession has been very slow (Bird, Cullen and Rosengren 1973; Bird and Rosengren 1986, 1987). A minor promontory has, however, been breached to form an arch, which collapsed in the winter of 1981 to leave a stack, reproducing on a small scale the sequence seen at London Bridge (Fig. 5 in Bird 1987). Cliff recession at Black Rock Point would certainly have been much more rapid if it were not for the protective shore platform of Black Rock Sandstone, the persistence of which has been aided by the induration which occurs in the upper intertidal and supratidal zones on such outcrops. This is the result of accumula- tion of iron compounds leached from internal and higher parts of the rock formation by percolating groundwater and precipitated from seepage in the surficial zone. Similar hardening has been noted on ferruginous rock outcrops at several 92 locations around Port Phillip Bay, notably along the Mornington coast, where it has also retarded cliff retreat. Beaumaris cliffs The undulating Black Rock Sandstone formation rises southward before plunging across the Beaumaris Monocline, and outcrops parallel to this flexure in the line of cliffs facing south-east between Table Rock Point and Mentone (Fig. 7). These are vertical cliffs up to 12 metres high, with a local capping of softer Red Bluff Sand. They have been retreating as a result of intermittent minor rock falls, several of which have occurred during the past two decades. The falls have occurred along joint planes which intersect the Black Rock Sandstone parallel and oblique to the cliff face. As the rock disintergrates, it breaks up into joint-bounded blocks, which fall to the base of the cliffs. Each fall has produced a scar in the cliff and.a heap of ferruginous sandstone boulders at the back of the shore, which soon become indurated by the process mentioned pre- viously, and are then consumed only slowly by marine erosion. Otherwise, there is very little beach material, and the sea floor declines gradually beneath Beau- maris Bay. Victorian Nat. Contributions As itis not exposed to the prevailing south-westerly winds, this stretch of cliffs receives strong wave action only occasion- ally, during episodes of strong southerly or south-easterly wind action. The overall rate of recession in recent decades is too small to be measurable when comparing early maps and air photographs with the present outline. Cliff crest recession as the result of a rock fall is usually very small, up to a few centimetres. The fall on January the Ist 1990, at a site south-west of Keefer’s Pier (near the Beaumaris Hotel), was on a cliff sector about 3 metres wide and up to 4 metres high, and did not produce any cliff-crest recession (Fig. 8). This fall took place along part of a joint plane that had been widened by pene- trating tree roots. The weather at the time was fine and calm, and there is no evidence of any tectonic triggering. There was some speculation as to whether heavy lorry traffic along Beach Road, only a few metres in from the cliff crest, had con- tributed to this instability, but there was no heavy lorry traffic on New Years’ Day. It is unlikely that the fall would have attracted much attention if it were not for the death of the small child: the chances of someone being at precisely this point just when such a rock fall occurred were extremely low. Nevertheless, the incident drew attention to the fact that cliffs are dangerous places, and that anyone who lingers near their crests or immediately beneath them is in fact taking a risk, albeit a small one in comparison, say, with venturing on to a Victorian highway. In April 1990 another cliff fall occurred, close to the site of the January event. Further falls may be expected here, especi- | ally where the cliff base has been undercut by marine erosion, or by people seeking Cheltenhamian fossils from the Mio- Pliocene marls at the base of the Black Rock Sandstone (Bird 1987). | Sandringham cliffs One way in which cliff hazards develop is illustrated on Sandringham beach, to Vol. 107 No. 3 (1990) the north of Red Bluff. The coast here formerly consisted of steep vegetated bluffs behind a wide sandy beach, but this beach, like others on the east coast of Port Phillip Bay, has been gradually depleted in recent decades, There is a marked seasonal alternation on these beaches: during winter, westerly and north-westerly waves drive beach sand southwards, while in summer southerly waves become domi- nant, and move the sand back towards the north, Consequently, in April and May, when the first winter storms occur, the southern parts are much depleted. Under these conditions the Sandringham bluffs have been undercut, and converted into increasingly high cliffs in soft clayey Red Bluff Sand, receding as the result of basal undercutting and intermittent slumping. Response to cliff recession All cliffs are hazardous, but when ac- cidents occur there is invariably a demand that something be done to make them safer. Where rapid cliff recession threatens developed property, the traditional res- ponse has been to stabilise the cliffs, usually by constructing a basal sea wall or boulder rampart, and landscaping the cliff to a more gradually sloping bluff which can be stabilised with planted vegetation. This is what has happened to receding cliffs on several sectors of Melbourne’s bayside coast, notably between Green Point and Hampton and from Black Rock to Quiet Corner. Few people now realise that these stabilised bluffs and undercliff walk are the outcome of engineering works in the late nineteen-thirties, replacing vertical cliffs in soft Red Bluff Sand, which had been receding at about a metre per year, and were threatening to undermine Beach Road (Mackenzie 1939). In 1973 there were proposals to treat the cliffs at Black Rock Point in this way, but there were protests from local residents, who wanted them preserved as an element of scenic variety, and scientists who valued 93 Contributions Fig. 8. The cliff fall at Beaumaris, as seen on January the 2nd 1990, with an ABC television camera crew. 94 Victorian Nat. Contributions Fig. 9. The bluffs south of Quiet Corner, Black Rock, were being undercut until an artificial beach was emplaced to protect them from erosion in 1984. the cliffs for geological and geomorpho- logical teaching and research. Surveys then showed that the erosion rate had been overstated, and that the risk to Beach Roads was remote, and the proposal was abandoned (Bird, Cullen and Rosengren 1973). Black Rock Point was listed as a Site of Scientific Interest by the coastal plan- ners, who now endeavour to maintain such features. However, an important cliff exposure of Pleistocene sediments west of Point Henry, near Geelong, has vanished as the result of coastal engineering works. In 1984 a new approach was initiated south of Quiet Corner, where beach de- pletion had resulted in undercutting of the bluff, threatening Beach Road. Instead of a boulder rampart, an artificial beach was emplaced to act as a protective feature and also improve the recreational resource (Bird 1990). This has been successful (Fig. 9), and a similar artificial beach is to be Vol. 107 No. 3 (1990) established in front of the eroding cliffs at Sandringham. Where the risk of cliff falls has become high, it may be necessary to fence out sectors of cliff, as at Sandringham, to deter people from wandering into a hazardous area. Some councils, aware of the pos- sibility of legal action, have placed warn- ing signs near particularly dangerous cliff sectors. The question of responsibility needs to be resolved. We must surely accept that certain places, such as cliffs, quarries, waterfalls, rivers, and lakes are inherently dangerous: we cannot fence them all off, and too many warning signs are counter- productive. Cliffs are features of scenic and scientific value, and should not be des- troyed by landscaping and engineering works, It should be acknowleged that they are hazardous, but people must be per- suaded to avoid taking unnecessary risks with them, as with other elements of our natural environment. 95 Contributions Acknowledgements I am grateful to Patricia Hoyne, State Library of Victoria, for searching for early photographs of London Bridge, and to Chandra Jayasuriya and Wendy Nicol for help with diagrams and photographs. References Baker, G. (1943). Features of a Victorian limestone coastline. J. Geology 51: 359-86. Baker, G. (1958). Stripped zones at cliff edges along a high wave energy coast, Port Campbell, Vic- toria. Proc. Roy. Soc. Victoria 70: 175-9. Bird, E. C. F. (1987). Geology and Landforms of Beach Park: An Excursion Guide. Sandringham City Council. Bird, E. C. F. (1990). Artificial beach nourishment on the shores of Port Phillip Bay, Australia. Journal of Coastal Research Special Issue 7: in press. Bird, E. C. F., Cullen, P. W. and Rosengren, N. J. (1973). Conservation problems at Black Rock Point, Victorian Naturalist 90: 240-7. Bird, E. C. F. and Rosengren, N. J. (1986). Changes in cliff morphology at Black Rock Point, 1973-1986. Victorian Naturalist 103: 106-13. Bird, E. C. F. and Rosengren, N. J. (1987). Coastal cliff management: an example from Black Rock Point, Melbourne, Australia. Journal of Shoreline Management 3: 39-51. Emery, K. O. and Kuhn, G. G, (1982). Sea cliffs: their processes, profiles, and classification. Bulletin Geol. Soc. America 93: 644-54. Mackenzie, A. D. (1939). Coastal erosion in Victoria. Trans. Inst. Engineers Australia 11: 229-36. May, V. and Heeps, C. (1985). The nature and rates of change on chalk coastlines. Zeitschrift fur Geomorphologie. Supplementband 57: 81-94. 96 Victorian Nat. Contributions Lepilaena cylindrocarpa and L. marina at Swan Bay, Victoria. S. Strother* Introduction Flowering plants which are restricted to life in marine conditions are known as sea- grasses (Den Hartog 1970). The genus Lepilaena is often included with the sea- grasses, tolerating conditions ranging from freshwater to hypersaline and includes species occurring in marine habitats (Robertson 1984). Robertson (1984) in- cludes three species of Lepilaena likely to be present in marine and marine-associ- ated (such as saltmarsh pools) situations in'southern Australia, namely L. preissii (Lehm.) F. Muell., L. cylindrocarpa (Koer- nicke ex Walp.) Benth. and L. marina E.L. Robertson. The latter species was newly described in 1984 and is the subject of this article in relation to the hydrophyte flora of Swan Bay, near Queenscliff, Victoria, The Lepilaena species present in Swan Bay, Victoria: past confusion Earlier work carried out in Swan Bay (Kerr 1982) indicated that Lepilaena cylindrocarpa was present in the saltmarsh pools on the fringe of the bay and that a similar though not identical morphologi- cal form was present on the mudbanks growing in association with Zostera muelleri Irmisch ex Aschers.. Using the taxonomy available (Aston 1973), these forms were both reported as Lepilaena cylindrocarpa. This nomenclature was continued in a later paper (Denning ef al. 1986). During late 1988 and early 1989, Mrs. E.L. Robertson was kind enough to identify specimens from Swan Bay, show- ing that L. marina is present on the mudbanks and L. cylindrocarpa in the saltmarsh pools. The difference in the two species is apparent even by eye in that the mudbank * Department of Biological Sciences, Deakin University, Geelong, Victoria, 3217. Vol. 107 No. 3 (1990) species is a more robust plant than the saltmarsh-pool species. The differences in the fruits distinguish the two species in fertile material, as described in Robertson (1984). Lepilaena preissii, which we have not observed at Swan Bay (E. Kerr pers. comm.), should be easily distinguished from the other two species because it is consistently monoecious whereas the other two species are dioecious. Recently Shepherd and Robertson (1989) reported that the specimen cited as L, cylindrocarpa collected from a mudflat in Swan Bay by King (reference cited) and preserved as a voucher specimen in the Melbourne University herbarium, is now classified as L. marina. This is consistent with the findings reported above. Ecological aspects Lepilaena cylindrocarpa appears to exist only in saltmarsh pools on the fringe of Swan Bay whereas L. marina coexists with Z. muelleri on the highest mudflats. The ecological differences associated with the two species may relate to their competitive ability. Lepilaena cylindrocarpa forms monospecific stands in the pools close to McDonald’s jetty on the western side of Swan Bay. It is possible that some of the pools also include Ruppia species as the Lepilaena/Ruppia association is known from Westernport Bay (Vollebergh and Congdon 1986). Lepilaena marina by comparison competes with Z. muelleri for occupancy of the shallow mudbanks. Vollebergh and Congdon (1986) in their study of L. cylindrocarpa growing in saltmarsh pools around Westernport Bay, showed that this species displayed a ‘‘win- ter annual” reproductive strategy, that is, seeds survive the hypersaline conditions as the pool dries out in summer and germinate in autumn or later in the year. 97 Contributions Lepilaena cylindrocarpa was shown to germinate over a prolonged period under field conditions. This may ensure the maintenance of the population in this unpredictable environment. Unfortun- ately, little seems to be known about the ecology of L. marina but Robertson (1984) states that it is “probably annual”. There is clearly a need for further study of this species and Swan Bay provides an ideal location for such study. Conclusions Lepilaena marina is the mudbank form of Lepilaena established on the mudbanks of Swan Bay and formerly referred to L. cylindrocarpa. Lepilaena cylindrocarpa in the strict sense (Robertson 1984) appears to be confined to pools in the saltmarsh fringe of Swan Bay, suggesting that some ecological differences may be associated with the different morphology of these two species. The range of occurrence of L. marina in Victoria still needs to be established. Acknowledgements The author is grateful to Dr Elizabeth Kerr whose initial mapping of the sea- grasses of Swan Bay provided the back- ground information for this paper, and also to Mrs Enid Robertson who kindly provided unequivocal identification of the Lepilaena specimens from Swan Bay. References Aston, H. I. (1973). Aquatic Plants of Australia. (Melbourne University Press: Melbourne). Den Hartog, C. (1970). The Sea-grasses of the World. (North-Holland Publishing Company: Amsterdam). Denning, N. T., Hudson, H. A., Kerr, E. A, and Strother, S. (1986). Distribution of vascular hydrophytes and description of associated macrofaunal communities in Swan Bay, Vic- toria. Proc. R. Soc. Vict. 98: 139-45. Kerr, E. (1982). The distribution of seagrasses in Swan Bay. Geelong Nat. 19: 59-73. Robertson, E. L. (1984). Seagrasses. In ‘The Marine Benthic Flora of Southern Australia, Part I H. B. S. Womersley, ed. (Government Printer: South Australia). 98 Shepherd, S. A. and Robertson, E. L. (1989). Regional Studies — Seagrasses of South Australia, Western Victoria and Bass strait. In ‘Biology of Seagrasses. A Treatise on the Biology of Seagrasses with Special Reference to the Australian Region. A. W. D. Larkum, A. J. McComb and S. A. Shepherd, eds. (Elsevier: Amsterdam). Vollebergh, P. J. and Congdon, R. A. (1986). Germination and Growth of Ruppia polycarpa and Lepilaena cylindrocarpa in ephemeral saltmarsh pools, Westernport Bay, Victoria. Aquatic. Bot. 26: 165-79. Victorian Nat. Contributions ‘ Bush-peas of Victoria - genus Pultenaea Sm. (Fabaceae) No. 24 A Key to Pultenaea species in Victoria and an index to previous articles M.G. Corrick* In the twelve year period 1976-1978 the Victorian Naturalist has published 23 contributions to this series in which 47 species of Pultenaea have been described and illustrated. Taxonomic problems remain in several species, but it seems more useful to publish a key now rather than wait, possibly years, for problems to be resolved. Generic changes within the tribe Mir- beliae are foreshadowed (M.D. Crisp pers. comm.,), and these will affect Pul/tenaea. Some of the variations in recognized species have been dealt with by keying the same species in more than one place. One apparently un-named taxon appears as P sp. followed by locality. In using the key it should be remem- * 7 Glenluss Street, Balwyn, Victoria 3103 bered that many Pultenaea species are extremely variable and that several hybrid populations are known, KEY TO PULTENAEA SPECIES IN VICTORIA . Style thick and hooked, < twice as long as ovary; stipules up to 0.5 mm long, very inconspicuous, never fused behind the petiole (slender, wiry shrubs of wet eva MTT Ely, Beer crete he yeeniess cle 4 Bet Gok PEMeE CMAP uct AB? RS Sa ate Ur 2 Style slender and gently curved, ) twice as long as ovary; stipules usually more than 0.5 mm long, often partly fused behind the petiole .................. 3 . Flowers up to 7 mm long; stems hairy with long, pale hairs ...... P. paludosa Flowers 8-11 mm long; stems glabrous (very young shoots may be slightly pubescent) ROTEL Sad tion Poe tactta ut COC TT Siri Side Fee eA Hck th Hing ota he, & alten wads P. subumbellata PCAC SCOT OSM HELM WHOIS SO LOCITEC ies, sogttes to a Jassie tede 2) Seedee Sansui sea ciel santos 4 Leaves alternate (rarely sub-opposite in P dentata) .............2.-.0005-. 6 POISE AN GRSUOPIMOSIDC REE aft sasha ns aura giscagteh aie Heere vara odes gal Seg é P. luehmannii TSSAVES Tay W LONI SEE ECON eo, eal opal cule re ges cbse eine Se tapas RENN HOME pees 5 . Leaf blade linear; margin incurved; apex obtuse ................4. P tenella Leaf blade broadly rhomboidal; margin flat; apex conspicuously pungent re) vette eek colar le re tn A ey i Rear ee oh AR at re et ee P. cunninghamii . Flowers terminal, 1 or 2 together at tips of shoots; flowers surrounded by persistent imbricate bracts; flowering shoots often short and spread along branches (new SHOOLS- arisingebElGW=nFlOTESCENCE) = 7. Fs se cas ie tod ea eat 2 polaron ane dea 7 Flowers axillary or in a condensed head-like raceme of about (3-)6-12 flowers; bracts present or absent; if head-like inflorescence composed of <5 flowers then bracts absent or deciduous (new terminal shoots arising from within HNMR ICITE STIG Dep sek ame Scare rt ee Lena Pantene nese, wc hforese: aback ho a0 acs (pe ERE fs 9 . Leaf blade pungent, flat, lower surface with 3-5 parallel veins ..... P. muelleri Leaf blade blunt, tightly inrolled and grooved above, appearing terete, veins CS ESL Comets SOs Ae MNT See EAC He ts Vd te. spat brie wmstalee eG eosin haa e uaPalape| (elo [ae 8 Vol. 107 No. 3 (1990) 99 Contributions 8. 10. 100 Leaf blade broadest above the middle, tip recurved, petiole absent or minute and <1 mm long; stipules broadly triangular, length/width ratio up to 2:1. we DU erateres, AW ae eee Rel d ok Sciche costes RFS & ancitaiie ara D aes anrae P. prostrata Leaf blade broadest at or below the middle, tip straight, petiole distinct 1-2 mm long; stipules narrowly triangular, length/width ratio >) 3:1 ....... P. prolifera Leaf blade broadly ovate to orbicular, 2-4 mm long, 1.5-4 mm wide with short, recurved, pungent apex (uncommon plants of western Victoria, except for an isolated eastern occurrence of P densifolia near Bindi) ............--+--- 10 Leaf blade various, not as above, usually at least twice as long as wide; apex variable, pungent or blunt; if less than twice as long as wide then apex not POULT ay er eg cence gre tr ante ah otent cre cisete te gM ey atm ae otal onttied Aaans arte cian sneahaeet 11 Leaf blade glabrous, broadly ovate or broadly elliptic, 2-4 mm long, 1.5-3 mm wide; flowers sessile (plant of mallee areas in Big Desert and an isolated eastern occurrence rebar feel SUT ae rae rn oly in lrg lee iota engin ns se i mrt oe ees Ath Hert P. densifolia Leaf blade hairy on underside, +orbicular, 2-4 mm diameter; flowers on distinct pedicels up to 5 mm long (plant endemic on Mt. Byron in Black Range) RR Ae A re Ae led ee ett Al ate A PER ete Pek AA teed P. patellifolia . Margin of leaf blade recurved or revolute (leaves occasionally concave or ‘V’ shape in section), if margin flat then leaf darker on the upper surface........... 12 Margin of leaf blade incurved or involute, if margin flat then leaf darker on lower SUIT PACE: Ha Pe ais Path Fe cae Pek acne ee arhucere benia td a hte ete AS tewem tus ceuedion ten? ae catidiobe elskeus 25 . Bracts absent, flowers one per leaf axil on pedicels usually much longer than leaves; usually prostrate, mat-forming plants..............-+++++5- P. pendunculata Bracts present; flowers forming a condensed raceme or head-like cluster, sessile or shortly pedunculate; habit various but not mat-forming .............-- 13 Fe EACTSECECIOUOUS lg oldtiie ru ucre ns FO oe tote enh Seer arity Arete Ty sng stae Fs 14 IATACES: (OGTSIGLEMIU Ae Sates ratieernsn ab 3 rergeteces cutee raster ab dclees aarti eeeuapedh ebotedied nae eran 22 PO Teal apexspuneenty fe. wcyeegcie sea eater alle whe Pedy tans Pane 6 UoaPrinsrn altel en Sunt 15 Leaf apex blunt, but weak, usually recurved mucro may be present ........ 16 . Leaf blade cuneate to oblanceolate, terminating abruptly in a pungent mucro PAE Sathya dtce fos oh at a eternal g ad Sesh ee D tS otette P. daphnoides Leaf blade narrowly eliptic to linear, tapering gradually to a pungent point fee ee eS Ae a SR LA rad SEE T einer ee tera sae teeta erates P. benthamii . Leaf blade broadest below the middle .................---eseuees P. gunnii (widespread form) Leaf blade broadest at or above the middle ...............-.-..---eeee: 17 . Leaf blade widest at the middle, oblong, elliptic or emarginate............ 18 Leaf blade widest above the middle, cuneate, obovate or obcordate ........ 21 . Flowers 5-6 mm long; leaves erect, length usually )}5 times width ....P retusa Flowers 7-10 mm long; leaves spreading, length usually (4 times width ....19 Leaf blade apex blunt, slightly indented, margin thin (on granite hills of N.E. MACTOET AP ee dees coat pies or cpr Oe Ee MR nee eh ee et P. platyphylla Leaf blade apex with weak recurved point, margin thick ................. 20 Upper surface of leaf blade rough with remains of tubercle based hairs; stipules darks brawh; longer than peviGle soy. cre: teeters ois see op poet atetee P. gunnii (Brisbane Range form) Upper surface of leaf blade smooth, stipules light brown, usually not longer than DELILE ee SENT Ole Wc distorted: wlottehe ec eerteey ate on tte a: ours, RnR eeen er eer nega? P. stricta (lowland plant of moist situations) Victorian Nat. Contributions 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. ZT. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. Leaf blade glabrous, both surfaces finely sprinkled with brown dots, upper surface usually much darker than lower (on dried specimens) .............. P. retusa Leaf blade with upper surface scabrid, lower surface with loose, rusty hairs, or SLADE OLAS cee tes hapree teres osc Eroag eae tad aes ca etok ea sits eh ach soc tla fea ee eet ce ace 22 Upper surface of leaf blade scabrid with tubercle based hairs, lower surface with loose, rusty hairs (leaf size and shape very variable) ............... P. scabra Upper surface of leaf blade scabrid but not hairy, lower surface glabrous Phe Forms of P scabra from Grampians including hybids with PR benthamii Lower leaf surface with spreading hairs; leaf tip with long, fragile, glabrous mucro; stems with a mixture of short and long spreading hairs .......... P. polifolia Lower leaf surface with appressed hairs; leaf tip pubescent, either with a short, recurved point, or tapering gradually into a long slender point; stem usually with APTOS MAILS aves at ates else tt es Soe AS py ade Stead « Ueto ake rey 24 FIOWePrstysSuRmn LONE nas Sate Be ote glauca Lee Lapp ew ay ted P. linophylta Flowers (9-)10-12 mm long 02.600 c occ ee ee ete epee eee eens 25 Stipules 4-7 mm long, about 4 length of leaf ....-......+.-.-5. P. paleacea Stipules 1.5-2 mm long, up to % length of leaf..............-. P. capitellata Ovary glabrous or with hairs only at the summit..............---..-+++- 27 Ovary pubescent to the base ......... 06. cece tee ete eee eee eens 33 Bracteoles trifid, divided at or above the middle; central lobe narrow, linear, outer lobes broad, brown and conspicuous ........... 602. ¢ reece ee eee eee 28 Bracteoles entire, or if trifid then divided below the middle with central lobe often leaf-like and outer lobes narrow and inconspicuous ...........++++-s4+5- 29 Leaf apex with long, weak, recurved point; stipules 4-5 mm long, strongly recurved; lower stems leafless with prominent stipular scars; standard length = width c, 10 mm long x 10 mm wide......... P sp. (Splitters Range and Myrtleford) Leaf apex blunt; stipules 2-3 mm long, not recurved, lower stems usually leafy, stipular scars not prominent, standard length > width c, 10 mm long x 7 mm wide Ty ra cede link Gary tere eA en ei ES eee ek ates P. subspicata Leaves blunt; venation not palmate ....-.-.. 6-2 -+ee eee eer ere en eee 30 Leaves 1-4 (-5) mm x 0.5-3 mm, ¢ twice as long as Wide i. 6.4 es: P. foliolosa Leaves 5-15 mm x 1-5 mm ) twice as long as wide .......-..--+++250-00> 31 Bracteoles ovate, shorter than calyx tube........------+- ++ esse P altissima Bracteoles narrowly triangular, longer than calyx TT teat 2 oe toch athe, ore gies bs 32 Leaves spreading; blade + flat with incurved margin; flowers deep orange and brick red; stems and usually whole plant hairy (glabrous plants occur in Rushworth LUT Te Fee eAe Quoc ce re iat ner tities Pag ol Ce Ot aac alkane ik anata ee P. humilis Leaves + erect, terete; flowers pure yellow, stems and usually whole plant glabrous (plants with hairy leaves occur in Kinglake area).........--+++ P. weindorferi Leaf apex pungent......... 06-0 e see e cree cette estes ene en tener ess 34 Leaf apex obtuse or with fragile bristle-like point (often deciduous with eNO Cait ich See HE Roe AR eo ne tecesiet hee ells oy AEE Spe et! 38 Leaves with 5 prominent longitudinal veins on underside (endemic in Grampians) P. costata ee en ie EAE bates a) Pil wile gars oben), A £49) 8 relent: t Darke iae Fee ST Leaves not obviously veined on underside, or with central vein prominent . .35 Vol. 107 No. 3 (1990) 101 Contributions 37: 38. 39. 40. 41. 42. 43. 44, 46. 47. 48. 49, . Bracteoles linear to narrow-triangular, seldom resinous ......-..++...--++ 36 Bracteoles broadly ovate, highly resinous and shining................-++- 37 . Bracteoles much longer than calyx tube, narrowly ovate with long, slender, acute tip; stipules conspicuous and almost obscuring the stem (bracteoles and stipules fringed with: long Hairs). s/s 4.5 dates nines Pectin or eee es P. acerosa Bracteoles usually shorter than calyx tube, narrowly ovate to ovate with short, acute (ip; stipules narrow and not obscuring the stem ..........++4.: P. juniperina Leaves terete; bracteoles about 2 the length of calyx tube (endemic in northern COTAMIPIATIS) Be tees socal reece ss toes pels WaN ime REE Te ato eaaN ys P. williamsoniana Leaves + flat with inrolled margin; bracteoles longer than calyx tube and enveloping it (on granite hills in N.B. Victoria) ..... sees e sewer eee eens P. vrolandii Calyx tube glabrous; hairs, when present, confined to calyx lobes ......--. 39 Calyxstube and lobes hairy sc... tee ee poet mess cee rsa mh e ett ee 40 Flowers 1-3 ina tight cluster at the tips of short lateral branches; stipules lanceolate 2-3 mm long, tapering to a slender point ........4+--.0..0..e ee P. tenuifolia Flowers axillary, usually well spaced along branches; stipules boat shaped c.1 mm long (strongly aromatic, uncommon shrub of western and central Victoria) BL RAR, te es Peri oslo gence ihe ee coe ye tiepbreet: pon P. graveolens Stems glabrous or with appressed hairs ......+-++s0s eee eee eee e eee es 41 Stems with:spreadirig Hairs. .c.c2.. 0. ee oe ee be ed dg See ae ae weet e s 45 Bracteoles trifid, (lateral lobes often obscure in PR laxiflora) .............- 42 BTACtEOIES SINIEGL eX ha ahs led Rie She a, ope Bltael nM oreee In Ate pee terard de Mince batts fen nge se cr She potan 43 Leaves widest at or below the middle, not clustered, tips straight, stems glabrous DA eT A OEE OP NR On 1 es EE eee Pee bodice pry: P. dentata Leaves widest above the middle, usually clustered, tips recurved, stems hairy Ae Se a A re ia ned ata tn ts eh tee thal et eit PH P. laxiflora Bracteoles attached at base of calyx tube (small, weak alpine shrub) Oe es ne le ee UE OE ADE Re 3 oes st: wearer othe ties P. fasciculata Bracteoles attached at middle of calyx tube .........-.. 0.0.0 eee seen ets 44 Leaves conduplicate and recurved, 3-5 (-9) mm x 1-3 mm (rigid divaricate shrub of dry forests, often in auriferous areas) .......-+.+4+--000--- P. largiflorens Leaves + flat, not recurved, 6-8 mm x 2.5-3 mm (rare plant of Grampians, Victoria Range, probabily-sxtinct) ints cnys + pay anne oe donate less P. maidenii , Bractenlessveriomsly- sat Dede. 2 eg ccc ataahrece gat banieertaenty ein gen cre creen e 46 Bracteolés entire, OfteMmTESINOUS ...04 pare paced se wears nce amt e ead 49 Lateral lobes of bracteoles conspicuous, brown and papery and as wide, or wider than centre lobe (uncommon plants of western Victoria) ........-.....+-- 47 Lateral lobes of bracteoles usually inconspicuous, pale and not wider than centre lobe, if wider than centre lobe then dark and resinous ............--+++5: 48 Stipules pale, connate almost to the tips, persistent, overlapping and obscuring the stems. Leaves mucronate, rigid, glabrous except when very young tnt ate Nae ie Pt © erie amen pe ect ed fe tee op Ree Ee ae ge P. vestita Stipules dark, connate only at the base and not obscuring the stem, leaves blunt Te linbecjeriecceayuy-ag akc gp ge ie rereP ett e pr ort ee eat ike ution P. daltonii Leaves + flat, margin incurved but upper surface visible ........ P. hispidula Leaves tightly inrolled, appearing terete, grooved above, leaf blade usually gently WOCUTVER A Wiese a Diente P. mollis (a form from Grampians and SW. Victoria) Flowers rose pink (shrub of higher parts of eastern Grampians) ..P subalpina Flowers yellow-or-oranga™ o. 2) 600 ye Peres he Sette etre aetan snoop teens 50 Victorian Nat. Contributions 50. Leaves 5-9 mm long and 0.5-3 mm wide, flowers 8-10 mm long (a widespread and MET VEvAD RADE STIMU lira se 7) ctlodvetes th ean Ee eee Le. Sil) P. hispidula Leaves 10-23 mm long and 0.5-2 mm wide, flowers 10-14 mm long ........ 5] 51. Flowers inconspicuous, overtopped and + hidden by the leaves (uncommon plant restricted-toscoastal dunes andsclnfs) 43:4 1ne.: otek o.oo, P. canaliculata Flowers conspicuous, not hidden by the leaves...............000.2--000e $2 52. Leaves usually (1 mm wide, margins tightly inrolled, upper surface rarely visible Rete ee te eon, ieee te oe ete ls Meas ids alee wh P. mollis (widespread form) Leaves )1 mm wide, margin inrolled but upper surface visible ............ §3 53. Bracteoles 2.5-3.5 mm wide, longer than calyx tube and usually as long as whole EE Eb cee incrin ewe etary 1A Ary tol Pos MOR th viene AWA tT es ae P. viscosa Bracteoles up to 2 mm wide and about as long as calyx tube........ P. mollis (some forms from southern Grampians and Portland) Index to previous Pultenaea articles Species Victorian Naturalist Vol. page date Pultenaea AGENOSHE hes BY. yOX, BELtM: 2.4. ones tere. Phcuensmedhh vet eded sede, 95: 188-190 (1978) ATISSiIn sh. Mitel exe Benth +: f..tesscre ces eddledcasancaeee adel, 97: 217-221 (1980) MCHA MIME Wl pee a sy, ake, ederes te etry satvitotel toe es cewton ew cals 101: 166-167 (1984) CATA CMA Lats VALCl ie MrCet acer les hep as ess asetedeleaeheaeabineetes 93: 250-252 (1976) Capltellata-micber cx Geass plete sitesteiacivatoereaeleretes 97: 217-221 (1980) COStACA MW TINTATFISOU cea ote dee pov oe tesa oh Oa aN ales aa dee 95: 188-190 (1978) cunninghamii (Benth.) HWilliamson...............cc:seeeeeeee 94: 112-114 (1977) rakeadivoravubsl a Diwan (LPona kt) seesee eee: hoes pecod ack eae cceeact 100: 207-210 (1983) GaP MMOL SSBWeNG lini cops ee seay ee oe aoe ta erin nek se peas eaed 93: 178-179 (1976) CETISIFOMSORINITICN ci 5.o acd beatetostessatsocens aaantashiaetenarnys 100: 55- 58 (1983) entataelss Dil eeyresnss. ee ucete keh ae sigh ots ed oats aces 94: 198-200 (1977) PASCICIMATAE HEMI, Vaossadetsocentacshesancesocdevener arts cnehpersasel 98: 42- 44 (1981) foliolosamtedinn sexe WSU saa, yah staan eames ac cancecdleadas os te 95: 92- 94 (1978) STAVE SITS ALC eeg sd Beas Px eAcaes Cia Lap batacdebisderohetedansedea~ iets 98: 42- 44 (1981) TIMINE AGH IAT elt. cscs as tees eterno. vocal see sataer wseqputa neers 94: 26- 28 (1977) Kibbertinidese DT GOK 7.) si vecate nssencetiwcugpnaeene gestae = P. mollis hispidtila ReBr ExsBenths.ss cetedsacentscessegsvsgecdasitiascaveste 104: 141-144 (1987) Utils: Bent he Cex= MOO Ks ch. acapedurredessose aeieescees sues 97: 19- 22 (1980) fUrIpebirie: Papi Mei etm cksecsseiesaa ee eealesiansnesasaestecees 95: 56- 58 (1978) JargitlorenS IVIL, exBenthy, 354; 10) ean oh conse ws roe ebectcks 94: 148-151 (1977) Hare THLOLA SCL Ty tas hea sesteac knee ivaseeese heh oi picwshe orsehs teens sees 94: 148-151 (1977) TinophyllaScHrader-.....ccas.c.ateer sens cere rttnnsdpatersacateeaias 97: 154-156 (1980) Paehiinanmil WiAlGeHi ee sats sels coat ehe tert hateatuepcdeay sean ete aees 101: 119-122 (1984) MIATCEN TO ROAC CLs pores APLY hE Ess on noses npleochss ateceasate ster s 104: 64- 68 (1987) innvorl biel Byhavel (2a'ee Shot egy eee tr torr ee pCEe Sere tts ce Or Ke PAPE Lee 105: 36- 40 (1988) PMG SHABE Mie nate euaclct se eeecee te este ramtahentisssg nee sen cease 95: 28- 30 (1978) Palencea Wilds if isisssacecensnccverstesseteaeseyfeV esas cnmesernes 97: 151-153 (1980) Paludosa JTHOMPSOMN ..............0csssaasedeseeoedecceessencress 95: 26- 28 (1978) patellifolia H Williamson ............ccccceeeeeseeseeeeeensereeeres 100: 55- 58 (1983) pedunculata Hook, ....1.......202.eeeesccnteeeanecepesseseeceneeeee 94: 198-200 (1977) Vol. 107 No. 3 (1990) 103 Contributions Pultenaea cont. DlatVpnY Ua Wake prcernccveessee creat soaaeet ria ttennreae st ania 95: 58- 60 (1978) polifoliacG Unis ayssouse cremereate reels Menanetcs paseo oun at ee 97: 154-156 (1978) pracumbenseGunmwdicg omc morets ets chiens em esleen tte 95: 92- 94 (1978) prolifera: AWA aIMSOn sais cee g sect ete y Reema 93: 250-252 (1976) Hrostiava: Benth ee val MOO Komeneaaiaieee canna sere raed 94; 68- 70 (1977) HELAD yay (AULD LAA WARS ARR AAR AMARC Sofior Gok erty a aot amineke Sate tack 95: 58- 60 (1978) SCA TASB amend teey: cess tive st Pees Aes irate eh get eet ay nian 101: 200-203 (1984) SUVTCTA «SINS. G rashtar nehthes sind eee oe rcancent heme nee tre Aes 94: 26- 28 (1977) SUbal pina CE Muelle DRUG recess css aaeeniete sae caesneset ys 101: 119-122 (1984) SUDSDISATANGRNIU Mao crabeatter sae tai ted Mehr hotly were eters 97: 19- 22 (1980) SUOUINDElataslO Oki ais eet tay et yok pata aah an re ee ster ees 95: 26- 28 (1978) Res GRSVUE EL 51) chy be PMR aren he ary Mert ny Preset BAN AN Heals nc gets 2, ae PE 94: 112-114 (1977) CEN WItOlh RI BY. EXONS. cou recias ch sderursaeert erent eeEe terse 94: 68- 70 (1977) VESDILAPIR EST. 0d. aeh olive eta ty id uv can ROY othe cee ey arene oe sees 100: 207-210 (1983) VISCOSHAR EL MENe GIT Meera Fenmechesee mcutsmetsaeensera sed baa 105: 36- 40 (1988) VEO LAM CUNT OM a pykce ita eenies toe mera ccrsbe cere uanrza stoned acess 97: 217-221 (1980) WEINGODTETIORGAGEI i pti peri mie a ECCI PMR cMUe eT ey Cogley 97: 217-221 (1980) WilliamisOmiamesj) sel. Wallis, hsaer atten ante tains ee reneecery errs 104: 64- 68 (1987) Acknowledgments ] am most grateful to the staff of the National Herbarium of Victoria for continued access to the collections and facilities; my special thanks to Jim Ross and Don Foreman for advice and assistance with word processing, and to David Albrecht for testing the key and making valuable suggestions. 104 Victorian Nat. Naturalist Notes Communal roosting of the Bell Miner Manorina melanophrys, Meliphagidae Aldo Poiani* The Bell Miner (Manorina melanophyrs, Meliphagidae) is a co-operatively breeding honeyeater (Swainson 1970). Both adult and immature birds live in groups in which the breeders are assisted in their parental duties by one or more helpers-at-the-nest (Skutch 1961). The social behaviour and the reproduc- tive biology of the Bell Miner have been intensely studied during the last years (Smith and Robertson 1978, Clarke 1988). Nevertheless, there are still many aspects of the Bell Miner’s social life which are not entirely understood. Roosting is one of the behaviours we completely lack information about. It is known that roosting communally is a characteristic of several co-operative birds eg. White-fronted Bee-eater Merops bull- ockoides (Hegner et al. 1982), Stripe- backed Wren Campylorhynchus nucalis (Zack and Rabenold 1989), Laughing Kookaburra Dacelo novaguineae (pers. obs.). Moreover, some authors have pro- posed that communal roosting has been a pre-condition favouring selection for helping behaviour in some species (Ligon et al. 1988, Glen and Perrins 1988). Here I record some field observations on roosting in the Bell Miner. On 27 June 1989 I was at the Gresswell Forest in Bundoora. At 17:00, while I was taking down a mist-net with the help of G. Paras, we observed a few Bell Miners starting to perch on a branch 5 m from us and about 2 m high. They initiated roost- ing without displaying to each other as they do, for instance, when performing a corroboree or communal gathering. Three birds soon formed a “core” where they perched in a line touching each other’s body without changing their position for the 25 minute period of observation. * Department of Zoology, La Trobe University, Bundoora Victoria 3083. | Vol. 107 No. 3 (1990) There were four other birds in the group. Once the core was formed, the other four birds started taking positions at the edge of the core with frequent changes of side. These four birds kept changing side for over 25 minutes giving the impression that they were competing for an “inner” place, a position between two birds. This was particularly clear when some bird tried to push itself (always unsuccessfully) between two birds already perched. Ultimately, at 17:25 they stopped swapping sides and formed a continuous line of seven birds. 1 was also looking for roosting groups in the Sir Colin Mackenzie Zoological Park at Healesville in November and December 1989. Nevertheless, after search- ing in the understorey at night I could not find evidence of communal roosting. I did flush two roosting Bell Miners from the understorey, but both were roosting soli- tarily. On 24 February 1990 I observed roosting behaviour at Healesville at sunset. Some of the birds seemed to roost in the same shrub, but they were not forming a roost- ing line as in the Gresswell Forest. There- fore, it is possible that roosting groups might be preferentially formed in winter. Although the data set available is still too meagre to test any hypothesis, it is possible that roosting behaviour may change during the year since the costs and benefits of communal roosting may be different from season to season. For instance, in winter the birds may get benefits in terms of a better thermal insulation by means of roosting com- munally. In summer, the comparatively smaller benefits of increased thermal insulation may be outweighed by possible costs such as increased transmission of ecto-parasites or risk of predation. In conclusion, I report here the first observation of communal roosting in the 105 Naturalist Notes Bell Miner. A more detailed study on roosting behaviour will throw more light on the conditions in which communal roosting occurs. Also, it will enable us to determine which birds form the core and which ones form the edge of the roosting line. Acknowledgments lam very grateful to my wife Marisa for her continuous support of my research. My project on Bell Miners has been finan- cially supported by the Department of Zoology, La Trobe University, The Sir Colin Mackenzie Zoological Park, the M.A. Ingram Trust and the Department of Conservation and Environment. References Clarke, M. F. (1988). The reproductive behaviour of the Bell Miner Manorina melanophrys. Emu 88: 88-100. Glen, N. W. and Perrins, C. M. (1988). Co-operative breeding by Long-tailed Tits. Brit. Birds 81: 630-641. Hegner, R. E., Emlen, S. T. and Demong, N. J. (1982). Spatial organization of the White-fronted Bee- eater. Nature 298: 264-266. Ligon, J. D., Carey, C. and Ligon S. H. (1988). Cavity roosting, philopatry, and co-operative breeding in the Green Woodhoopoe may reflect a physio- logical trait. Auk 105: 123-127. Skutch, A. F. (1961). Helpers among birds. Condor 63: 198-226. Smith, A. J. and Robertson, B. I. (1978). Social organization of Bell Miners. Evu 78: 169-178. Swainson, G. W. (1970). Co-operative rearing in the Bell Miner. Emu 70: 183-188. Zack, S. and Rabenold, K. N. (1989). Assessment, age and proximity in dispersal contests among co- operative wrens: field experiments. An. Behav. 38: 235-247. 106 Victorian Nat. Naturalist Notes A note on Budgerigars in Hamilton P. R. Bird* Budgerigars (Melopsittacus undulatus) are well-known parrots of the inland which often migrate south to the higher rainfall areas. Flocks regularly appear in the little Desert National Park in early October and depart after the breeding season, usually in early March (National Parks Service, 1979). They are an occasional visitor to the Grampians area (McCann, 1982). The most southerly records of budgerigars in Victoria are at two points, just east and west of Hamilton (Emison ef a/. 1987). On 9 January 1982 I first observed a budgerigar wild-type plumage of green and yellow in a River red gum (Eucalyptus camaldulensis) woodland on a 5 hectare block on the northern boundary of Hamil- ton in SW Victoria. Aviary escapees do occur at times near towns but this bird did not display the signs of a lost bird. I kept a record of later sightings and at intervals attempted to record numbers present: 22 November 1983 12 birds flew from the edge of the central drive. 27 November 1983 2 birds feeding on seed heads along the drive. 4 February 1986 1 bird in River red gums along the drive. 26 November 1986 3 birds feeding on grass heads along drive. 6 December 1987 4 birds on native grassland on SE fence. 10 December 1987 14 birds roosting in trees near SE fence. 15 December 1987 20 birds in trees and feeding in short grass in ‘cow’ paddock near SW fence. 22 December 1987 25 or more birds in the above general area. * P.O. Box 180, Hamilton, Victoria, 3300. Vol. 107 No. 3 (1990) 23 December 1987 37 birds in the central drive area. 5 January 1988 13 birds on NE fence, near mown native grass. 14 January 1988 15 birds still feeding on the block. 27 January 1988 4 birds counted. An unforgettable day was the spectacle of 37 feathered gems drifting from the trees, through shafts of afternoon sunlight, to alight on long stalks of Spear grass. The birds usually operated in small groups, feeding actively on the seed heads of grasses; Spear grass (Stipa spp.) in par- ticular, but also Wallaby grass (Danthonia spp.) and they appeared also to forage among introduced species. The birds were not unduly concerned by a cautious approach within a few metres. Approximately 40% of the 5 hectare property had been ungrazed since 1981 to encourage regeneration of native grasses, including Kangaroo grass (Themeda triandra) and Weeping grass (Microlaena stipoides). Other portions were either slashed or burned (20%) or lightly grazed (40%) for fire control purposes, There were areas of Yorkshire Fog grass (Holcus lanatus) and Barley grass (Hordeum sp.), and sparse Onion grass (Romulea rosea), Silver grass (Vulpia bromoides), Perennial ryegrass (Lolium perenne), Bromus spp. and other introductions. Prior to 1981 the entire area had been heavily grazed by sheep but little fertilizer had been used. The recovery of Wallaby grass was spec- tacular after grazing was removed but there was a drastic reduction in this component, and a concomitant increase in Onion grass, on fuel reduction areas that were burned in summer. Frequent mowing also resulted in Onion grass dominance. Themeda was encouraged by annual mowing in early 107 Naturalist Notes summer, with the cutter set high to avoid crown damage, but no birds were seen feeding on this sparsely-seeded species. It appears that the habitat had been sufficiently modified to suit ground- feeding birds. That was also evident by the large numbers of Red-rumped parrots (sometimes as many as 100 birds) and Eastern rosellas that congregated on the block to feed. Another factor was prob- ably the presence of a rather dense (50 or more trees per hectare) population of River red gums of mixed age in the 4 ha of wooded area, with adequate access to grassland around, and water available from troughs, gardens or a dam. Neigh- bouring properties add another 5 or more hectares of trees, rather more sparsely spaced and with more improved pasture, and while the budgerigars did spend some time there (mainly in the trees), they obviously preferred the native pastures. Since leaving that location in 1988 I have not been able to ascertain whether the birds have reappeared. Visits on one oc- casion each in the summers of 1989 and 1990 were fruitless, but my previous experi- ence was that they did not spend all of their time during the months of Nov-Feb in that immediate area. References Emison, W. B., Beardsell, C. M., Norman, F. I. and Loyn, R. H. (1987). “Atlas of Victorian Birds”. Ministry of Conservation Forests and Lands and Royal Australasian Ornithologists’ Union. McCann, I. R. (1982). “Grampian Birds — an illustrated checklist”. Published by Halls Gap Tourist Information Centre. Natonal Parks Service, Victoria (1979). “Birds of Little Desert National Park”. 108 Victorian Nat. Naturalist Notes A trip to Nooramunga with the Fauna Survey Group Joe Leahy The islands of the Nooramunga Coastal Park are forever being bullied into shape by the elements. Huge, hateful breakers batter the islands’ beaches. Squalls surge through the arid heathlands of the area. Wildfires char plants and their roots, allowing the wind to whisk away the fragile dunes of the region. Within this melee of natural forces some of Victoria’s smallest and most timid mammals are believed to live. One of the rarest of these is the New Holland Mouse. The Fauna Survey group visited the area last summer in pursuit of the mouse and I joined them as a novice. The experience proved to be an adventure in both con- servation and learning. We arrived at McLoughlins Beach in South Gippsland amid a fanfare of howl- ing winds. It was Boxing Day 1989. At l p.m. members of the Fauna Survey Group, a division of the Field Naturalists Club of Victoria, were to leave here for a week in the Nooramunga Coastal Park. The former Secretary of the Fauna Survey Group, Mr Julian Grusovin, later said that this expedition was one of nine planned for the period between Easter 1989 and the end of 1990. The work was voluntary. Its aim was to discover exactly what animals were living in the park so that the Department of Conservation and Environment (DC&E) could formulate a management plan for the region. This data would be taken from sightings, diggings, scats, animal remains and the results of pitfall, Elliott and cage trapping. Less officially, or at least in my mind, the aim was to find the rare New Holland Mouse. In Victoria the Fauna Survey Group was a sort of patron saint to this mini-marsupial. According to Julian Grusovin, the first New Holland mice were found in the Hunter Valley Region in New South Wales Vol. 107 No. 3 (1990) in the middle of last century. However the Victorian New Hollanders eluded natural- ists until 1970 when the Mammal Survey Group (now the Fauna Survey Group) discovered them in the Mornington Pen- insula to the immediate south of Mel- bourne. Julian said that today the Victorian range of the mouse is believed to be from Anglesea in south-western Victoria to Reeves Beach on the eastern fringe of the Nooramunga, For habitat the New Holland Mouse prefers recently burnt heath. The Noora- munga park consists mostly of islands making this requirement a problem for the survival of these rodents. [fan island is not burnt for several years, for instance, a colony of New Hollanders living there will be without suitable habitat. Unlike their counterparts on the mainland they will be unable to move to a better area. What exotic features make this mouse stand out from its colleagues? None. In fact, if you saw them foraging in the garden you would probably rush to set the common mouse trap for them, rather than try to catch one live in an Elliott trap, So if ever you are in doubt check the tail of your captive, If it is a New Holland Mouse it should be dark on top and light on the bottom. To be extra sure examine the offender’s teeth, the New Holland Mouse does not suffer from overbite like the introduced species and therefore is without notches on the inside of its incisors. However the mouse was largely my fad — the group had much broader interests. On previous expeditions to the Noora- munga region they had recorded the rare Swamp Antechinus (a marsupial carni- vore), the Eastern Pigmy Possum, bats, water rats, wombats, kangaroos, koala bones, echidnas, the Banjo Frog, the Jackie Dragon, some snakes and several varieties of skink. 109 Naturalist Notes Sitting in the car at windy McLoughlins Beach I knew little of the past activities of the group I was to spend the week with, All I knew was that they were out to catch New Holland Mouse. My association with the Fauna Survey Group began in early December 1989 when a friend of mine, a second year ecology student at La Trobe University, invited me to a meeting to be held that night at the Astronomer’s Residence in the botanical Gardens, South Yarra. Malcolm Turner, a prominent member of the group and a biologist with the DC&E, had told her that membership with the Fauna Survey team could help her career. I attended to give her moral support. The air was hot and rich with pollen in the Botanical Gardens that night. As we trekked through the open parklands yuppy cyclists whizzed by in flurries of fluor- escent limbs and whirling wheels. It was only with difficulty that we eventually found the stately Victorian residence of the Astronomer — we had been searching for a white dome-shaped shed with a telescope sticking out of it. When the Fauna Survey Group were all seated to begin the meeting I surveyed them. | suppose I was expecting to see the stereotype field nats of old; on the one hand the Crosby-Morrison, bushman-type naturalists, on the other the English country gentleman-type naturalists who long ago exchanged their shotguns for binoculars and picnic baskets. The people before me, however, looked more like the congregation of a Catholic church. A distinguished old lady occupied the front seat. However to my ignorant eyes she seemed as though she would be more at home judging poodles at the Royal Dog Show than scratching in the bush for the scats of marsupial rodents. Behind her was an elderly gentleman whose name I later learnt was Tom Sault, a long standing member of the group. More than any other present Tom em- bodied the bushman-naturalist image. 110 However he later told me that he rarely sacrificed life’s common comforts while on camp. He was known for pulling a little campervan on every trip and cooking such wonderful meals in it that it became known as “Tom’s Restaurant”. There was a core of young people in the room who all looked as though they had done some time at university. They had that intangible feeling of leisure about them that three or four years of campus life installs in people. The tall, blonde tradesman Russell Thompson was also present. Returning from the bush on one occasion I showed Russell a slender bone I thought came from a horse. Without lifting his eyes from the curling steam of the cup of tea he was drinking, Russell amiably said, “That’s a swan’s thigh bone”. My friend’s contact, Malcolm Turner, was to provide the main attraction of the meeting - a talk and slides about his recent adventures which included a trip to Queens- land. Malcolm gave a sly grin as he began his talk, as if to say, ‘Look how much fun I’ve been having”. Physically he looked as though he was still in Queensland. While the rest of us had perhaps shed one or two winter jumpers Malcolm arrived wearing shorts and T-shirt. As Malcolm showed us his slides the room took on a warm and homely feeling. I felt at ease with the group as we peered eagerly at the curios of nature that Mal- colm had captured in his slides; things like turtle’s eggs and the great boomerang tails of Southern Right Whales which he had photographed in the cold sea near Warr- nambool, Looking around at the naturalists pre- sent, their faces illuminated by the slides of northern Queensland, I reflected that each face was a slide itself, showing a keen interest in nature - and occasional disgust at Malcolm’s habit of making weak puns. Malcolm flicked the slide machine and a monster-faced Moray Eel swivelled into view. The eel’s head was sticking out of its coral lair and was cupped in the hand Victorian Nat. Naturalist Notes of a scuba-diver - Malcolm. As Mal ex- plained ‘his relationship with the eel, the scene took on the dreamy quality of a distant friendship hatched in some far-off polyp grove. For me Malcolm exuded the love for nature that all keen naturalists share. When such people discuss the natural world it is as though they are talking of an old friend. I first encountered this relationship between the naturalist and the subject of his work as a young boy watching Harry Butler on TV. You could say that I was brought up “In the Wild with Harry Butler” because the show gave me many of my first insights into the bush. Harry’s program left me with two strong needs; a desire to understand the natural world and an urge to preserve it. As the meeting concluded [| felt that this group could become the outlet for these needs that I had been waiting for. Despite this it was still with some re- luctance that I put my name down for the forthcoming trip to St Margaret’s Island. Long camps with family and friends had taught me to be suspicious of spending time at such close quarters with people | had newly met. However the possibility of finding the New Holland Mouse lured me and I ended up signing to go. Nothing went well on the first day of the St Margaret Island camp. We carted our luggage the one hundred metres or so to the end of the McLoughlin’s Beach pier under guerilla attack from squall-force gusts of wind. It was then a matter of waiting for the DC&E launch that had been arranged to drop us at the island. However the launch only stayed long enough for its captain to tell us that one of its motors was out and that they were not going to risk a trip to the island in those conditions. We reloaded our cars and drove to the McLoughlin’s Beach jetty. This long foot- bridge crosses a muddy backwater separat- ing part of the Ninety Mile Beach known as Reeves Beach from the mainland. Vol. 107 No. 3 (1990) We camped the next few nights in a dell behind Reeves Beach, an area, according to Malcolm, where New Holland Mouse had been found. When the winds even- tually died away we emerged from the heath, spread our gear across the middle of the jetty and again waited for the fateful DC&E launch. Standing and sprawling forlornly about the breezy jetty we must have appeared to the locals like a group of refugees. However I was learning too much to worry about the occasional hardship. I had always enjoyed camping and considered myself a lover of the bush but a week with the Fauna Survey Group soon showed me how little I knew of my beloved. The group had immense collective knowledge. There were science graduates like Eva Demetriadus, Sarah Brown, Karen Lester and Malcolm Turner on the trip. Jenny Chappill had a Ph.D in Eucalypt Taxonomy. Russell Thompson was, of course, great with bones and Wendy Clarke was partial to spiders. Whatever the field there were people in the team who knew something about it. As one of several novices in the group I was made to feel welcome. When an animal was caught the experienced people were happy to explain the creature to us and answer our questions. Without complaint everyone who felt the need set about the often difficult tasks before them. There were pitfall lines to be filled in and new ones to be dug. There were traps to be set, 10 to a person, and bat mist nets to be checked at regular intervals before bed. And of course there were morning and night swims to be had on the island’s pristine beaches (that is, when we did get to the island). At night Malcolm took us spotlighting into a grove thick with spiny Grass-trees and saw-leafed Banksia. We were looking for pigmy possums. However our quest for these animals ran like an episode of “Scooby Doo”, the children’s cartoon of the seventies. Whenever Malcolm stopped those in the darker back ranks would keep lil Naturalist Notes/Reviews walking and the result was a multi-person pile-up. If someone thought they had seen something ten torches would instantly spot the area of the sighting, accompanied by a hubbub of excited voices. However throughout it all the New Holland Mouse still eluded us. On our second last night at St Margaret’s, Mal- colm, myself, my ecologist friend and some others boated and waded from St Margaret’s to nearby Hummock Island. We went to the island to catch bats but | knew that Malcolm had set some ground traps there previously. These traps were my last hope of seeing the party-pooping mouse on this trip. We got the nets up after dusk and re- laxed beside a small fire. The word must have been out among the bats and there- fore we did not catch any. The next day we hoisted our ridiculously over-stocked packs and made our way through dense Ttree to the beach, There was one more task we had to do before we left the Noo- ramunga Coastal Park, check the traps. The cage traps produced one or two Swamp Rats. The only traps that had not been checked were the pitfall lines. The first pitfall yielded a tiny Swamp Rat, huddled like a furry egg in the cover pro- vided in the trap. The second contained a House Centipede, The third contained a little, big-eared . . . mouse! Malcolm lent over and picked the rodent up, its small, shivering body dwarfed by his hand. Turning to me he said, ‘You may not want to watch this . . ?” My hopes of seeing the New Holland Mouse were dashed. The victim was a common house mouse, vermin, and had to be destroyed. Tape Review Calls of Victorian frogs Recorded and narrated by Murray Littlejohn Compiled and mixed by Duncan Smith Department of Zoology, University of Melbourne Most naturalists are familiar with the calls of a number of common birds, and (often subconsciously) use the calls as a means of identification. The calls of some of our noisier mammals, such as the bellow of the Koala and the indescribable rattle of the Brush-tailed Possum, are equally well known. But when it comes to frogs, the whistles, trills, barks, growls, squelches and pionks are little more than background noise for most people. The frogs perceive it all differently of course. These sounds are their advertisement calls, which are given only by males, allowing females to distinguish and locate males of their own species, and discouraging ap- proaches by rival males. With the handy acoustic guide produced by Littlejohn and Smith, anyone can learn 112 to eavesdrop on these anuran nighclubs and confidently identify the species re- sponsible for each call. The tape contains 35 recordings, covering all but one of the 34 species likely to be found in Victoria, plus two extra recordings for two species, that show marked geographical variation. A good recording of the missing species, the rare and threatened Spotted Tree Frog, Litoria spenceri, was not obtained until after this tape had been compiled. The recordings are of a generally high standard. All were recorded in the field, and have a pleasing natural quality by virtue of the hubbub created by other frogs and some- times crickets nearby. If you listen closely you may also detect human voices, and even a distant train. Victorian Nat. Reviews The cover notes list the scientific and suggested common names of each species, their distribution within eight Victorian biotic provinces and the months in which they call. There is also a short discussion of the biological function of advertisement calls. The commentary, by Murray Littlejohn, introduces the species featured in each selection by common and scientific name, and lists the species in the background. Disappointingly, the commentary gives no description of the call. Although the background calls rarely intrude, on some selections (e.g. the Common Spadefoot Toad, Neobatrachus sudelli) there is room for confusion which could be avoided if the distinctive features of the call were given. Littlejohn wisely avoided giving onomatopoeic descriptions, which might have become, as in the analogous case of bird calls, far more impressive for the feats of imagination needed to interpret them than they are for their benefits to field recognition. Which bird goes ‘wheat wheat wheat WHITTLE,, for example? However, a brief description can be useful when it acts mnemonically, allowing the listener to recall the name of a species even when the tape has been left at home. The narration goes some of the way towards this for a couple of species, telling us for example that the call of the Victorian Smooth Froglet, Geocrinea victoriana, is given in two parts, but not adding that it is a drawn- out creaking sound followed by a series of short pips, or that the closely-related and sometimes sympatric Southern Smooth Toadlet, G. laevis, leaves off the pipping sequence. Why not mention that the northern call race of the Spotted Marsh Frog, Limnodynastes tasmaniensis, sounds like a machine-gun, that a chorus of Pobblebonk Frogs, Limnodynastes dumerili, give a good imitation of an arpeggio on a banjo, or that Peron’s Tree Frog, Litoria peroni, produces a ‘maniacal cackle’. This criticism aside, the tape is a valu- able aid to the fledgling (or metamor- phling) frogger, as well as to the more experienced listener in an unfamiliar area. At present it is available only from the Department of Zoology, University of Melbourne. At a price of $10.00 it is excellent value. Play it in the car on the way to your favourite pond. Graeme Coulson Institute of Education University of Melbourne Prophetic words “But perhaps the most interesting of the younger associations is that of the Field Naturalists, whose main delight it is to go abroad in company, to visit such districts as are likely to yield a harvest to the devotees of the hammer, of the net, or of the dredge; to the collector of plants or the sticker of insects. Their most notable ramble was that in which they were landed from a steamer on King’s Island, and overhauled that isolated region to carry back their various trophies of fauna, or flora, or mineralogy. The monthly evening meeting of these Field Naturalists is full of interest; each is so zealous about his own department, and all contribute so largely to the store of exhibits that crowd the tables. From these amateur enthusiasts there ought to spring the material for excellent research in future years?’ . From Victoria and its metropolis: past and present, 1888. Vol. 107 No. 3 (1990) 113 Reports E.N.CV. Library report 1989-90 Our library is still in storage, with con- sequent curtailment of service to members. Periodicals have been available at General meetings, together with some new books. Thirty titles have been added to stock this year, including Flora of Australia V3; Fauna of Australia V1A and 1B; Zoo- logical catalogue of Australia V.6 and V.7; D.L. Jones: Native orchids of Australia; Mackness: Prehistoric Australia. We ack- nowledge the receipt of a number of review copies from publishers, amongst which were three titles from the Australian Nat- ural History series, published by New South Wales University Press: Triggs: The wombat; Reilly: The lvrebird and New: Associations between insects and plants. The main beneficiaries from the lib- rary’s resources have been people seeking information about early members of the Club, most notably Charles French, whose great-great-grandson, Michael Jennings, contacted us. Charles French, who was the Government Entomologist, is buried in Cheltenham Old Cemetery, in an un- marked grave. Michael intends to remedy this, with a plaque indicating his great- great-grandfather’s achievements, and Council has requested that the fact that Charles French was the founder of the EN.C\. should also be included. Other enquires concerned Daniel Sullivan, a schoolteacher at Moyston in the Grampians from 1868-1894, who was elected to the Club in 1881; and James File Bailey (not John, as stated in his obituary notice in the Victorian Naturalist V.1. 1884), whose interests were palaeontology and conchology, and who met an untimely 114 death from pneumonia after being caught by the tide at Frankston while in the pursuit of his hobby. He was Club Lib- rarian in 1883-84. We are grateful to Mrs Loris Hornbuckle for a photograph of her grandfather. Film Australia sought information about the removal of koalas from Quail Island in 1943 for a documentary by Paul Scott, Koalas - the Bear Facts, to be shown on TV this year. The bulk of the Club’s archives and historical material up to 1890 has now been listed. The photograpic collection, ranging from albums to individual photographs, now contains 80 listed items. Dr J.H. Ross has agreed to make available to the Club space in the Herbarium library for a filing cabinet in which to store this material. We appreciate his co-operation in this matter, and also that of the librarian, Helen Cohn. Plans for rehousing the library are still very much in the melting pot, but we look forward to a satisfactory resolution of this problem during the coming year. | would like to thank Olive O’Hagan for continuing under difficulties to record the arrival of periodicals. Sheila Houghton Hon. Librarian Notice The Montmorency Field Naturalists Club meets on the second Friday of each month, 8 pm at the Salvation Army Hall, Flodden Way, Briar Hill (Melway 21 C2). Visitors welcome. Enquiries: Elaine Braby, ph. 439 9015. Victorian Nat. Field Naturalists Club of Victoria In which is incorporated the Microscopical Society of Victoria Established 1880 Repistered Olfice: FNC'V, c/ National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, South Yarra, 3141. OBJECTS: To stimulate interest in natural history and to preserve and protect Australian fauna and flora. Members include beginners as well as experienced naturalists. Patron His Excellency, The Rev Dr John Davis McCaughey, The Governor of Victoria. Key Office-Bearers 1989-1990 Vice President: Mv, ARTIWUR FARNSWORTH, FNCY, National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, South Yarra, 3141 Hon, Secretary: Mr, JULIAN GRUSOVIN, | Warriner Court, Hast Oakleigh, 3166, (543 8627 A...) Hon, Treasurer; My, BRUCE ABBOTT, 4/597 Orrong Road, Armadale, 3143, (529 4301 A.HL.) Subscription Secretary: Ms DIANNE CHAMBERS, FNCY, c/ National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, South Yarra, 314d, Editors: ROBY N WATSON and TIM OFFOR, ENCY, c/ National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, South Yarra, S141 (419 9532), Librarian: Mrs, SABILA HOUGEETON, ENCY, c% National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, South Yarra, A141 Acting Excursion Secretary, DOROTIY MALILER (850 9379 A.FL.). Conservation Co-ordinator: Mr. WIL. ASHBURNER, National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, South Yarra, 3141, Sales Officer (Victorian Naturalistonly): My, DE. MeINNES, 129 Waverley Road, Kast Malvern, VWAS (SAL 2427) Publicity Officer: Miss MARGARET POPTER, 1/249 Highfield Road, Burwood, 3125. (889 2779). Group Secretaries Botany: Miss MARGARET POTTER, 1/249 Highfield Road, Burwood, 3125 (889 2779), Day Croup: Mr. D. . MeINNES, 129 Waverley Road, Fast Malvern, 3145 (S41 2427) Geology: Miss HELEN BARTOSZEWICZ, 16 Euroa Avenue, Nth, Sunshine, 3020 (311 5106 A.A.) Fauna Surveys Mr, JULIAN GRUSOVIN, | Warriner Court, Bast Oakleigh, 3166, ($43 8627 A.H,) Microscopical: Mts. ELSIE GRAHAM, 147 Broadway, Reservoir, 3073 (469 2509) MEMBERSHIP \ Membership of the P.N.C\Y, is open to any person interested in natural history, The Victorian Naturalist is distributed tree to all members, the club's reference and lending library is available and other activities are indicated in reports set out in the several preceding pages of this magazine. Subscription rates for 1990 Metropolitan Members (O03 area code) $27 Joint Metropolitan $30 Country/Interstate members $24 Joint Country/Interstate members $27 Concessional rate (Students/pensioners) (proof of entitlement required) $20 Joint Concessional $23 Junior (under 18; No Victorian Naturalist) : , o8 Clubs $28 Subscription to Victorian Naturalist ‘ .. $30 Overseas Subscription to Vietorian Naturalist $35 Aust, Individual Journals , " cre. JENKIN BUXTON PRINTERS PTY, LTD, 11a abnorsrond 81 WEST MELAOURNE apedrra The Victorian Naturalist Vol. 107 (4) August 1990 Published by The Field Naturalists Club of Victoria since 1884 FNCV DIARY General Meetings Held on the second Monday of the month (except for public holidays), 8.00 p.m. at the National Herbarium Hall, corner of Birdwood Avenue and Dallas Brooks Drive, South Yarra. Meetings include a talk by a guest speaker. All members of the public are welcome. Monday, 8th October Monday, 12th November Gannets of the oceans. Reproduction in Echinoderms. Mary Doery. Mark O’Loughlin. SPECIAL NOTICE: Monday, 10th December NOTE CHANGE OF MEETING PLACE OF GENERAL MEETING. “Presentation of Natural History Medallion” to Mrs Ellen McCulloch will be held at the Royal Society Hall at 8.00 pm. (Corner of Victoria and Exhibition Sts). FNCV Excursions For further information on excursions contact Dorothy Mahler (850 9379 A.H.). 29th September-5th October Sunday 4th November Gypsy Point. Contact Marie Allender Courtney’s Road Lysterfield by car. if you are interested (527 2749). Melways 84 D7. Cars meet at reserve at Sunday 7th October 10.30 a.m. Cranbourne annexe of the Botanical Sunday 2nd December Gardens. Private transport. Brisbane Ranges. Bus leaves Batman Ring Pat Carolan (592 5552) if you Avenue 9.30 a.m. Leader: Peter Kelly, on require a lift. beetles. Cost $18.50. Group Activities Botany Group Group Meetings (second Thursday) Thursday 13th September Thursday 8th November Victoria’s Rainforests. David Cameron. Botanical ramblings in France. Thursday 11th October Mary Doery. Oranges and Boronias. The family Rutaceae. Hilary Weatherhead. Excursions Saturday 27th October Saturday 24th November Rare grassland plants. Establishment Hotchkins Ridge Flora Reserve, program at Skipton. Leader: Neville Croydon North. Leader: Cecily Scarlett. Falkingham. Sunday 28th October FNCV Cosslick Reserve and Paddy’s Range. Contact M. Potter (889 2779). Microscopial Group Group Meetings (Third Wednesday) Wednesday 17th October Wednesday, 21st November The Scanning Electron Microscope. The video camera and the microscope. Christine Ashburner. Taken by Gary Richardson. Volume 107 (4) ‘The ictorian aturalist August, 1990 Editors: Tim Offor and Robyn Watson. Commentary Contributions Naturalist Notes Reports Book Reviews Erratum ISSN 0042-5184 What future for the sandy heaths of Wilson’s Promontory? by LVI OY (ROU Cc Aennak ka die CAR BEAR OLOD AEC RAPS Tue A OEE Le he oe 120 First record of An Australian Sea Lion on the eastern Australian COASIE Va MON RIEU TL ates 4 SI e een AEE Sen ails fetta 124 Examination of a gastropod radula, by Jan D. Endersby.............. 126 The ascent of Mt William, by J. A. D. Blackburn ..........0..0. 0.0000 128 The search for Helicarion niger, by Karen van Kuyk .....0..00.00000005 130 “‘The new museum on the South Bank’’. Speaker: Dr J.M. BOMTE BDV ONO LASCITICIOCL | hn lea .cvadae Ses sate cia tae tp 8g rates idencer, ee 132 “Tasmanian sea shells common to other Australian states” by Margaret H. Richmond. Reviewed by R. C. Kershaw ..........0...0.4. 134 “The Mornington Peninsula - A field guide to the flora, fauna and walking tracks” by IIma Dunn, Stephannie Rennick and Caroline Grayley. Reviewed by J. H. WiIliS 0.0... ..ccccccceccceecveveseses 135 Revised Appendix for Lindenmayer ef a/ (1989). Victorian Nat. 106: 117-8 Cover photo: The South Serra Range and Isolate Spur viewed from Mt William. (See the article on Major Mitchell’s ascent on p. 128). Commentary What future for the sandy heaths of Wilson’s Promontory? Tim Offor* The heath communities of Wilson's Promontory are disappearing. Where once there were diverse heath floras there are now, in many places, depauperate closed scrubs of Kunzea ambigua (White Kunzea) and Leptospermum laevigatum (Coast Tea-tree). Where heath remains it is often old and senescent, with dead or dying Allocasurarina pusilla (Dwarf She-oak) and areas of bare ground, The sandy heath communities are gen- erally low growing (( 1m) and are dom- inated by Allocasuarina pusilla (Dwarf She-oak) and Leptospermum myrsinoides (Heath Tea-tree). Other common shrubs of the heath include Banksia marginata (Silver Banksia), Hakea sericea (Bushy Needlewood), Epacris impressa (Common Heath), Jsopogon ceratophyllus (Horny Cone-bush) and Correa reflexa (Common Correa). The heath communities share many species in common with the low open forest communities into which they often grade, but they lack the eucalypt canopy of the forests. As long as 40 years ago scientists noticed that the sandy coastal heaths of Wilson’s Promontory, at the southern most tip of Victoria, were diminishing. Leptosper- mum laevigatum was invading the heaths from the coastal dunes to seaward. At the same time Kunzea ambigua was invading from nearby hillsides, moving from the dry forests of the rocky slopes into the heaths below, Slowly the heaths were disappear- ing beneath dense Kunzea and Lepto- spermum scrubs. There have long been debates about whether or not the invasion of the heath by K. ambigua and L. laevigatum is a ‘natural’ or a human influenced process, Asa corollary to this there has been debate *School of Botany, University of Melbourne, Parkville, 3052. 120 on whether action should be taken to inter- yene and try to arrest and reverse the in- vasion process or whether nature should be left to take its course. In the meantime the invasion of the heaths has continued. A great advantage that both Leprosper- mum laevigatum and Kunzea ambigua have over the heath species is the height to which they can grow on the sandy coast- al soils. In a 0,5-1.0 m high heath, K. ambigua is able to grow to 2.0-2.5 m (Judd 1990), L. laevigatum is able to grow even taller on these sandy soils. Such a height advantage means that the heath species are easily overtopped by K. ambigua and L. laevigatum which often form a dense canopy, greatly reducing the amount of light reaching the shorter statured heath species. Sometimes it is possible to find a spindly A/locasuarina pusilla amongst the Kunzea thicket, a struggling survivor from the invaded heath community. Since the decline of the heathlands has generally been a gradual process, people are often unaware just how much the vegetation of Wilson’s Promontory has changed over the last few decades. Many people are surprised to learn that much of the dense Leptospermum laevigatum scrub surrounding Tidal River camping ground was once low heath. The only reminders are a few scattered heath plants on sunny banks where the ground has been disturbed and the dense L. /aevigatuin overstorey removed. The increased light, warmth and moisture has stimulated the germination of seeds which have remained dormant in the soil for decades. The response of the heath community to fire Dr. Terry Judd of the University of Mel- bourne has been researching the ecology of Kunzea ambigua and Leptospermum laevigatum for the past six years. ““Both Victorian Nat. Commentary Kunzea ambigua and Leptospermum laevigatum are readily killed by fire. In the absence of fire both species have the ability to invade undisturbed plant communities, often forming thick scrubs which contain very few other plant species”. So it seems that it is fire that holds the key to the state of the heathlands at Wilson’s Promontory. Fire is an integral part of Australian heath communities (Specht 1979). The high levels of volatile oils contained in the foliage of the dominant species renders them highly flammable. As a result the plants of Australian heathlands are well adapted to fire. Some species such as Banksia marginata and Hakea nodosa are bradysporous, that is they have their seed protected by woody fruit so that even though the plant may be killed by fire, the seed will survive to germinate, grow and produce a new generation of plants. Other | species are able to survive a fire by poss- essing an underground source of buds in bulbs, rhizomes or lignotubers (synony- mous with the ‘mallee root’ of the mallee ) cucalypts). The destruction of the above } ground parts of the plant triggers the growth of the dormant buds and the plants | rapidly regenerate. In the years immediately following a | fire, the diversity of plant species in a heathland will increase. Posamentier ef al. ) (1981) found that the number of species in a coastal heath at Nadgee Nature Reserve, N.SM. reached a maximum 4 years after | a fire, after which it slowly declined. As | the heathland ages some species will slowly disappear from the heath, represented only ) by their dormant seeds in the soil “seed | bank’. Dominant species such as | Allocasuarina pusilla and Leptospermum myrsinoides senesce and gaps begin to | open up in what was previously a dense shrub layer. So it seems that fire is an | important factor for maintaining high | species diversity in heath communities. Prior to European settlement, Wilson’s | Promontory had long been inhabited by | Aboriginal tribes. The many shell middens | Vol. 107 No. 4 (1990) along the coast are reminders of their presence in the area. We cannot be certain of the fire regime prior to European settle- ment, but we do know that Aborigines used fire to drive game, clear undergrowth and produce new growth to attract game (Recher and Christensen 1981). It is there- fore probable that fire was a common feature in the plant communities at Wil- son’s Promontory during this time. It may take 4 years or more following a fire for the fuel load in a heathland to build up enough to carry another fire (Specht, Rayson and Jackman 1958) so it is unlikely that the heaths were burnt more often that at 4 to 5 year intervals. The fire control measures used in recent times by Government authorities to protect Wil- son’s Promontory from wildfires have undoubtedly reduced the frequency of fires. Many of the heaths have not been burnt for 30-40 years, during which time the number of species present would have markedly decreased, Specht e¢ al. (1958) found that 20 years following a fire, the number of species present in a South Australian sandy heath had decreased from a maximum of 36 species to 20 species. They predicted that probably only 10 of the original 36 would persist after 50 years, Some scientists who have studied the heaths of Wilson’s Promontory have pro- posed that it was frequent fires that kept Kunzea ambigua and Leptospermum laevigatum out of these heathlands (D.H. Ashton pers. comm; Burrel 1969; Judd 1990). There is some evidence for this occuring in heaths at Nadgee, N.SW. When these heaths were protected from fire they became overgrown by shrubs and were invaded by eucalypts (Recher and Christensen 1981), Both L. /aevigatum and K, ambigua produce huge quantities of seed with up to 10 000 seeds falling on 1 m? of ground in one year (Judd 1990), Leptospermum laevigatum has woody capsules that protect the seed from the intense heat of 121 Commentary Kunzea ambigua and Leptospermum laevigatum invading heathland behind Squeaky Beach at Wilson’s Promontory. The Kunzea is in the foreground (tall shrub, right) and dominates the slopes in the background. A row of L. /aevigatum is in the middle distance. a fire. Following the fire the valves of the capsules Open and musses of fine seeds are released. The seed of Aunzea ambigua accumulates in the soil in the absence of fire and great numbers of seedlings can germinate following fire. Itis also possible that the fleshly capusles of A. ambigua would protect at least some of the seeds from a fire of moderate intensity (Judd 1990). It is the dependence of L. /aeviga- fumand A. ambigua on regeneration from seed that might be exploited for controlling their presence in the heath community, Research and management of heathlands It is only in recent times that fire has been used as a management tool for man- ipulating species composition of heath- lands to fulfill conservation objectives. A collaborative research project between the Botany Department of the University of Melbourne and the Department of Con- servation and Environment is currently investigating the use of fire to eradicate 122 Kunzea ambigua and Leptospermum laevigatum trom the coastal heathlands of Wilson’s Promontory. The objectives of the research project are Lo study the effect of repeated burning and season of burn on K, ambigua and L. laevigatum presence in the heathlands. An area of severely invaded heathland between Picnic Bay and Squeaky Beach has been divided up into five sections for the study. The flora of each section has been thoroughly surveyed by the 2nd year Ecology students prior to any burning taking place. The Fauna Survey Group of the Field Naturalists Club of Victoria will survey the fauna of each section prior to burning and for many years after to de- termine the effect of the fires on the fauna. The first fire is planned for spring 1990 when two sections will be burnt, The second will be in autumn when two more will be burnt, One section is being left unburnt as a control. It is expected that there will be massive regeneration of Victorian Nat. Commentary K. ambigua and L. laevigatum following the fires. In 3-5 years time one spring and one autumn burnt section will be burnt a second time. The timing of these second burns is very important since they must occur before K. ambigua and L. laevig- atum have reached reproductive maturity and carry viable seed. It may take years before the results of this research can be incorporated into management strategies for the coastal heaths. There are many questions to be answered. Will there be enough fuel for a burn within the required 3-5 years? Will two fires be sufficient to eradicate K. ambigua from the heath or will its soil seed store produce another crop of seedlings after the second fire? What other seed dependent species will be lost as a result of the double burning? Can the existing K. ambigua and L. laevigatum scrubs be returned to heathland? One thing, how- ever, is for certain. If nothing is done to arrest the invasion, the heaths of Wilson’s Promontory will continue to disappear beneath dense scrubs. A sad fate for a fascinating part of our natural landscape. References Burrel, J. P. (1969). The invasion of coastal heathlands of Victoria by Lepfospermum laevigatum. Ph.D Thesis. University of Melbourne. Judd, T. S. (1990). The ecology and water relations of the invasive shrubs, Kunzea ambigua (sm.) Druce, Kunzea ericoides (A. Rich) J. Thompson and Leptospermum laevigatum (J. Gaertn) F. Muell. Ph.D Thesis. University of Melbourne. Posamentier, H. G., Clark, S.S., Hain, D. L. and Recher, H. F, (1981). Succession following wildfire in coastal heathland (Nadgee Nature Reserve N.SMW.). Aust. J. Ecol. 6: 165-175. Recher, H. F. and Christensen, P. E. (1981). Fire and the evolution of the Australian biota. Jn Eco- logical Biogeography of Australia. Ed. A. Keast. (Junk: The Hague). Specht, R. L. (1979). The sclerophyllous (heath) vege- tation of Australia: The Eastern and Central States. Jn Ecosystems of the World 9A. Heathlands and related shrublands. Ed. R. L. Specht. (Elsevier: New York). Specht, R. L., Rayson, P. and Jackman, M. E. (1957). Dark Island Heath (Ninety-mile Plain, South Vol. 107 No. 4 (1990) Australia). Vl. Pyric succession: Changes in composition, coverage, dry weight, and mineral nutrient status. Aust. J. Bot. 6: 59-88. 123 Contributions First record of an Australian Sea Lion on the eastern Australian coast W. N, Fulton* The Australian Sea Lion The Australian Sea Lion (Neophoca cin- erea) is one of the world’s rarest sea lions, with a population estimated at 3,000 to §,000 (King 1983). Neophoca cinerea is presently found only in Australian waters, from Houtman Abrolhos in Western Australia to Robe in the south east of South Australia, as shown in Fig. | (Walker and Ling 1981; Ling, personal communication 1990), Addition- ally, it should be noted, there are reports of old males being seen as far east as Portland in Victoria, The species breeds on offshore islands, in a slightly more restricted range. A skull was collected from Cape Barren Island in the Furneaux Group in Bass Strait in 1973, however it was quite old and may have lain on the beach for many years. In 1798 Matthew Flinders not- ed sea lions on several small islands of this group (Marlow and King 1974). Birdie Beach Sighting At about 10 a.m. on 22nd December, 1989 a seal, 2.24m in length, hauled out on the northern end of Birdie Beach (33°13'S, 151°35’E) in the Munmorah State Recreation Area, between Sydney and Newcastle, New South Wales, It was later identified from photographs as a male Neophoca cinerea. Subsequent enquiries to a number of museums, and to the National Parks and Wildlife Service and other recognised authorities, reveal no known prior sighting of N. cinerea on the eastern coast of Australia. The National Parks and Wildlife Ser- vice, with the assistance of volunteers from ORRCA (Organisation for the Rescue and * W.N, Fulton, ORRCA Ine., 4 Coree Road, Artarmon 2064. 124 Research of Cetaceans in Australia), cor- doned off the area to minimise disturbance to the animal. The seal had three fresh-looking (but somewhat infected) oval-shaped wounds on its left ventral surface, consistent with bites inflicted by the Cookie-cutter Shark (Isistius brasiliensis), and gave every appearance of exhaustion. For several days its only movements were progressively up the beach to avoid being lapped by waves, and down again with the tide to cooler sand. There was little reaction when we ap- proached, or even when we once touched its tail. The teeth were yellowed, chipped and worn, suggestive of an old animal. Not- withstanding its exhausted state, the seal appeared to have excellent condition, as can be seen from the photograph (Fig. 2). We sprayed its wounds several times a day with an aerosol of Chloromide anti- septic, and observed an apparent lessen- ing in the infection. Apart from that, we disturbed it as little as possible. Fig. 1. Present-day range of Neophoca cinerea (after Walker and Ling 1981), Victorian Nat. Contributions Fig. 2. The Australian Sea Lion at Birdie Beach. On Christmas Day we saw some signs of improvement. The seal wriggled on its back and then moved towards the sea, entering the water momentarily to let a wave wash over it. That evening at 9.30 p.m. it left the beach. As locals had reported the animal was heading north before it came ashore, we searched to the north the next day, and found it in a sheltered cove with a pebble beach, about 1 km away. It was resting on the beach, swimming, and diving in turn, giving every appearance of recovery. Two days later, an unconfirmed report had it another 5 km north, at Catherine Hill Bay, and we have not heard of it since. The animal was not tagged or marked. It may be an aid to subsequent identifica- _ tion that the fifth digit of the left hind- flipper is truncated, flush with the webb- ing. _ On 11th March, 1990 a second, and diff- _ erent, male Neophoca cinerea, 2.30m in _ length, was photographed by the author Vol. 107 No. 4 (1990) while hauled out for three days on a jetty in Wollongong Harbour, just south of Syd- ney, following heavy seas. Fishermen reported having seen two seals in the harbour just previously. Acknowledgements The assistance of Ed Lonnon (Taronga Zoo) and Linda Gibson (Australian Museum) in identifying the animal is gratefully acknowledged. Dr. J. K. Ling (South Australian Museum), Professor J. D, Ovington (ANPWS), and Judith E. King kindly examined the photographs and commented on the known range of the species. References King, J. E. (1983). Seals of the World. (British Museum and Oxford University Press: Oxford). Marlow, B. J. and King, J. E. (1974). Sea Lions and Fur Seals of Australia and New Zealand —- the growth of knowledge Aust. Mammal. 1: 117-136. Walker, G. E. and Ling, J. K. (1981). Australian Sea Lion Neophoca cinerea. In Handbook of Marine Mammals, Eds S. H. Ridgway and R. J. Harrison. Academic Press: London and New York). 125 Contributions Examination of a gastropod radula Jan D. Endersby* Introduction Differentiation between the aquatic snails Glyptophysa gibbosa (Gould) and Physa acuta Drapanaud in Victoria re- quires an examination of the radula (Smith and Kershaw 1979) for certainty. Smith and Kershaw (1979) recommend that speci- mens be drowned with menthol as a relax- ant and that the buccal mass be macerated in sodium hydroxide to extract the radula for microscopic viewing. Neither of these chemicals is readily available in most households and so an alternative method of preparation would be useful. Small snails introduced into a garden pond with some samples of an aquatic liverwort were found difficult to identify from the twisted columella character of Smith and Kershaw’s (1979) key. Based on former success on extracting a chiton radula the following method was used to identify the species. It may also prove to be useful on those occasions when the standard methods cannot be used. Method 1. The snail was killed with boiling water and the animal extracted from its shell with jeweller’s forceps. 2. Again using the jeweller’s forceps, the “foot” was separated from the body and placed in a watchglass. 3. Household bleach containing sodium hypochlorite (White King in this in- stance) was used to dissolve the soft parts. For this small specimen (2 x 1 mm of foot) half an hour was suffi- cient for compete dissolution. 4. With the watchglass placed on a black background under a 20x binocular dis- secting microscope, the transparent * 56 Looker Road, Montmorency, Victoria 3094, 126 radula could be located and transferred to a drop of water on a glass slide. 5. A glass coverslip was placed on the water drop and this temporary mount examined at 40x and 100x under a com- pound microscope with diaphragm almost closed. Discussion The radula was strongly contorted but sufficient detail of its bifurcated posterior end was visible to confirm the species as Glyptophysa gibbosa. It seemed possible that the killing of the animal in boiling water, rather than the conventional relaxation methods, lead to the distortion of the radula. While this is unacceptable for taxonomic or curatorial purposes, in the absence of the correct chemicals it might suit the needs of a naturalist wanting a quick species con- firmation, Repeating the experiment, how- ever, produces an undistorted radula,. On the first occasion it is likely that the distortion occurred when the radula was flattened during the preparation of the water mount. To demonstrate that this method could have a wider application than the separa- tion of the two species mentioned pre- viously, it was used to extract radulae from: Bembicium nanum (Lamarck) Littorina (Austrolittorina) unifasciata Gray Helix (Cryptomphalus) aspersa (Muller) Deroceras caruanae (Pollonera) Nomenclature for marine species fol- lows Ludbrook and Gowlett-Holmes (1989) and for the terrestrial species, Smith and Kershaw (1979). In each case a readily discernible radula was revealed which appeared under the dis- secting microscope to be almost free from adhering undissolved soft parts. Victorian Nat. Contributions Conclusions The prime purpose of this investigation was to examine the radula of a particular aquatic snail to determine its species using a method that required only household materials. When this proved to be ade- quate further taxa were tested to see if it had more general application. This also proved to be the case. No comparisons have been made with the standard techniques of relaxation and sodium hydroxide maceration to see if a quicker or better result is obtained. Nor has the method been tested to see if the radulae are sufficiently clean for staining and the making of permanent mounts, or if other factors have made them unsuitable for that purpose. The non-specialist should find this method of radula examination to be ade- quate when simple features are used in keys for determining species. It has the advan- tage that rarely used chemicasls need not be bought and stored. An interesting ex- tension of the project would be for some- one practised in the standard techniques to compare the methods for the prepara- tion of permanent, stained mounts. Acknowledgements Thanks are due to the referee of this paper for advice on revised nomenclature for Glyptophasa and a recommendation to extend the scope of the initial draft. References Ludbrook, N. H. and Gowlett-Holmes K. L. (1989). Chitons, Gastropods, and Bivalves. Jn Marine Invertebrates of Southern Australia Part II. Eds S. A. Shepherd and I. M. Thomas (Series: Handbook of the Flora and Fauna of South Australia, Adelaide.) Smith, B. J. and Kershaw R. C. (1979), Field Guide to the Non-marine Molluscs of South Eastern Australia. (ANU Press: Canberra). Walker, J. C. (1988). Classification of Australian Bul- iniform Planorbids (Mollusca: Pulmonata) Rec. Aust. Mus. 40: 61-89. Vol. 107 No. 4 (1990) 127 Naturalist Notes The ascent of Mt William J. A. D. Blackburn On 11 July 1836 Major Mitchell ob- tained his first glimpse of the Grampians and on the 13th they were in full view. The following is an abbreviated account taken from his published journal, using his words, with a minimum of editing to make it more fluent. “The lofty mountain range was distant between thirty and forty miles so I deter- mined on an excursion to its lofty eastern summit. I perceived that the land immedi- ately to the eastward was very low, and |] might conduct a party in that direction to the coast. I was however more desirous to level my theodolite on that summit first, and thus obtain valuable materials for the construction of an accurate map. I left the party encamped, and pro- ceeded towards the mountain, accom- panied by six men on horseback, We crossed, at three miles from the camp, a deep creek. The horse of one of the party plunged in and they parted company in the water, the horse reaching one bank, the rider the other; the latter, who was my botanical collector, Richardson, partly swimming, partly floating on two huge portfolios. I gave his name to the creek. The next day we came to a river with broad deep reaches of very clear water, and flowing towards the north-west. We found a ford, and a tract of white sand where Banksia and Casuarinae were the chief trees, Here we left our horses. The first part of our ascent, on foot, was extremely steep and labourious. Above it were two high and perpendicular cliffs, the upper about 140 feet in height. The summit of the cliffs consisted of large blocks of sandstone, separated by wide fissures, full of dwarf bushes of banksia and casuarinae, wet and curiously encrus- ted with heavy icicles. We had not come prepared to pass the night. We had neither clothing nor food; nor was there any shel- ter. One man, Richardson, had brought his day’s provisions in his havresack (sic) and 128 these I divided equally among five. The thermometer stood at 29(°F), the water, as it boiled, rose to 95 of the centigrade scale. In keeping the fire alive, twigs were blown into red heat at one end, icicles remained at the other, even within a few inches of the flame. The wind blew keenly, and in the morn- ing the thermometer stood as low as 27(°F). The rocks were more thickly encrusted with ice. The sun rose amid red and stormy clouds and a few isolated hills were dimly visible. I hastily levelled my theodolite and during a short interval I took what angles I could obtain. The work completed we reached the river where the horses awaited us in three hours, the distance being eight miles from the summit of Mount William. We reached the little river at eight in the evening, and lay down on its bank for the night. As soon as morning dawned I succeeded in finding a ford and reached the camp at an early hour’ Mitchell wrote: “In adding this noble range of mountains to my map, | felt some difficulty in deciding onaname... Ihave always gladly adopted aboriginal names, and in the absence of these, I have endeavoured to find some good reason for the application of others, considering descriptive names the best, such being in general the character of those used by the natives of this and other countries. Names of individuals seem eligible enough, when at all connected with the history of the discovery, or that of the nation by whom it was made. . . I venture to connect this summit with the name of the sovereign in whose reign the. . . region below was first explored; and, it was not without some pride, as a Briton, that I gave the name of the Grampians to these summits?’ In keeping with these ideals, three days later he wrote: “Some natives being heard on the opposite bank . . . we ascertained Victorian Nat. Naturalist Notes that the name of the river was the “Wim- mera”. On September 14 he records that: “A considerable source of the Glenelg, named by the natives the ‘Wannon’ has its source in the eastern and southern rivulets In reading his journal, it is clear that every reasonable effort was made to de- termine the aboriginal names of topo- graphical features, but this was frequently frustrated by the unapproachability or absence of local inhabitants. Mitchell lists fourteen new species found on Mt William. These were subsequently described by Dr Lindley and published, in Latin, as footnotes in “Three Expeditions into the Interior of Eastern Australia” by Thomas Mitchell (1839), although five of these names are no longer valid. Species found by Major Mitchell on Mt William in 1836 and described by Dr Lindley. Leucopogon glacialis “At the very summit I found a small heath- like bushy Leucopogon, from six inches to a foot high. It was in flower, although covered with ice’. p. 175, July 14th. Leucopogon villosus “Also a variety of Leucopogon villosus, with rather less hair than usual, and another species of the same genus, pro- bably new:’ p. 175, July 14th. Eucalyptus alpina “Near the highest parts of the plateau, | found a new species of Eucalyptus with short broad viscid leaves, and rough- warted branches?’ p. 175, July 14th. Epacris tomentosa (now E. impressa) “, . a most beautiful downy-leaved Epacris, with large, curved, purple flowers, allied to E. grandiflora but much hand- somer.’ p. 177, July 15th. Phebalium bilobum “A most remarkable species of Phebalium, with holly-like leaves and bright red flowers resembling those of a Boronia.” p. 178, July 15th. Vol. 107 No. 4 (1990) Cryptandra tomentosa “A new Cryptandra remarkable for its downy leaves?’ p. 178, July 15th. Baeckea alpina (now B, ramosissima ssp. ramosissima) “A beautiful species of Baeckea, with downy leaves and rose-coloured flowers resembling those of the dwarf almond”’ p. 178, July 15th. Pultenaea montana (now P. scabra) “A new Pultenaea allied to P biloba, but more hairy, and with the flowers half concealed among the leaves?’ p. 178, July 15th. Bossiaea rosmarinifolia “A new species of Bossiaea which had the appearance of a Rosemary bush, and differed from all published kinds in having linear pungent leaves” p. 178, July 15th. Genetyllis alpestris (now Calytrix alpestris) “A beautiful, new, and very distinct species of Genetyllis, possessing altogether the habit of a Cape Diosma, the heath-like branches being terminated by clusters of bright pink and white flowers?’ p. 178, July 15th. Grevillea aquifolium “...aremarkable kind, with leaves like those of an European holly, but downy .. 2 p. 178, July 15th, Grevillea variabilis (now G. aquifolium) “.. . another fine new species, with leaves like those of an European oak . . ” p. 178, July 15th. Grevillea alpina “. . a third with brownish red flowers and hoary leaves, varying from an erect straight-branched bush, to a defuse en- tangled shrub. . ? p. 178, July 15th. Leucopogon rufus “. . lastly anew Leucopogon, besides that found on the summit as already men- tioned?’ p. 178, July 15th. Acknowledgements Thank you to Karen Wilson, curator of the Melbourne University Herbarium, for tracing the nomenclatural changes. 129 Naturalist Notes The search for Helicarion niger Karen van Kuyk The new VCE brings practicality into students’ work, This is what Glenn Elliott and | (Year 11, Mary MacKillop College, Leongatha) were looking for when we went searching for a useful Biology project. Mr. Peter Noonan, Maths/Computer teacher at school, sparked with an idea after receiving a letter from Mr. Ron C. Kershaw from Tasmania and author of “Field Guide to the Non-Marine Molluscs of South Eastern Australia”. Mr. Kershaw is studying a particular Gastropod, Heli- carion niger, found in the South Gippsland area. There was a limit to how many he could dissect from the Launceston Museum so he is now looking for fresh Helicarion material. Unfortunately, due to ill health, he cannot make the trip him- self. Several locations where this land snail had been found previously were quite accessible from our homes so Glenn and 1 decided to take up the challenge. We knew next to nothing about Molluscs but the project appealed to both of us. We left Leongatha on Wednesday, 7th March for Sandy Point and the dry sclerophyll forests — we later found out that means ‘Gum Trees’ - after our background reading had shown that the most recent findings of H. niger in 1970 were just north of Sandy Point. We determined that the nearby Shallow Inlet would be just the spot. Aware of our own ignorance we ques- tioned Mr, Noonan closely as to what we were really looking for. He handed us Mr. Kershaw’s book, saying: “I’m not quite sure myself!’ For us this was a great inspiration! ! In fact, H. nigerisa medium sized snail with a thin, flat, fragile shell of 3 whorls which are glossy and coloured orange-yellow. The animal is black-grey to pinkish buff in colour, 130 Arriving at the search area we worked vigorously for two hours. We pulled apart dead trees; looked under the foliage; dug in the dirt and tried a wide range of terrain ~ dense and sparse, high and low. We did find two different species that day. They were in a low-lying place, under reeds and foliage, in fairly dense bush. They were very tiny and later we identified them as Pernagera tamarensis and Hydro- coccus tasmanicus using Mr. Kershaw’s book as our reference. Although the main object of our trip was not achieved we had learnt something from examining what we had found and, from observing the abun- dant and tiny animals moving about wher- ever we searched. We decided to give it another go. Next time we would try some- where not so dry, like the Tarra Valley or the Grand Ridge Road, also suggested by Mr. Kershaw. Our next trip was on 21st March, two weeks later. We agreed on Toora North which would be wetter than Sandy Point. We crossed a bridge near the Wonga turn- off and stopped. There were many gum trees on steep banks on either side of the river, coming down almost to the water and we could see leaf mould everywhere. We lifted dead logs; we dug in the ground and raked away at the leaf and bark litter. We found our first live gastropods. Once again we had two different species but Helicarion had eluded us. They were our only finds for the day in spite of several other stops. We later classified them as Tusmaphera lamproides, a 10 mm giant and a smaller Oxychilus alliarius, a glass shell. At Wonga we found far more animal life than we had found previously, The project seemed a failure. We didn’t find H. niger. However, when we looked at it again we really had learnt. We knew how to classify gastropods, using Mr. Ker- Victorian Nat. Naturalist Notes shaw’s book. We knew a lot more than Perhaps we will have better fortune if most about a special little land snail. We we try again after the rains come. had found some snails that we’d never Note: Our identifications of the species thought would live where they do. Wehad _ found are tentative only and are subject to tried our best to help someone with an change quite quickly — especially if we meet important investigation. someone who knows more than we do. But the mail did get through This letter was sent to the Secretary, Field Naturalists Club, Royal Society’s Hall, Melbourne. Post and Telegraph Department Brisbane 12th December 1882 Sir, I am to acknowledge the receipt of your communication of the 29th ultimo, relative to the postage charged in Queensland upon specimens of Natural History, and complaining that the two small tin boxes of same addressed by you to Mr Geo. Barnard, Duaringa, although bearing the amount of postage indicated as correct by the Melbourne office, were refused delivery until a sum of 5/ deficient postage and fine should be paid. In reply, I have to inform you that our Regulations do not admit of specimens of Natural History passing through the Post Office at packet rates. The area of Victoria is but small compared with that of Queensland and the distances traversed therein by horse mails not very great, whereas in this extensive territory the services by horse are lengthy and numerous. It is therefore not considered desirable to extend the Regulations in the direction indicated. In the case of Mr Barnard’s parcels, referred to, the Postmaster at Duaringa has, under the circumstances, been instructed to give delivery without charge, and the Melbourne Office has been advised of the Regulations of this Department with regard to the specimens mentioned. I have the honor to be, Sir, Your obedient servant FE. Salisbury for Under Secretary From F.N.C.\V. archives Vol. 107 No. 4 (1990) 131 Reports The new museum on the South Bank (Report of a talk by Dr J. M. Bowler at the June meeting of the F.N.C.\V. on Monday, 16th June, 1990) Background The deputy director of the National Museum of Victoria, Dr Jim Bowler, spoke enthusiastically about the imminent, future plans for the new museum to be located opposite the World Trade Centre on the south bank of the Yarra River, adjacent to, and just west of Spencer Street. Dr Bowler reported of the neglect the National Museum had suffered over the last few decades when other academic institutions were upgrading and amalga- mating. Bob Edwards, the former director, had received a commitment from the State Government to go ahead with the con- struction of a new technology museum at Spotswood. This section of the Museum will open in June 1991, A new building is to be built on the south bank of the Yarra River to house the other sections of the Museum, especially the Natural Science and Ethnological sections. The size of the new building will equate in area to that presently occupied by that of the existing Museum and Na- tional Library together. The cost in 1987 was estimated to be $170 million, (At present this cost has escalated with infla- tion to over $200 million). The commitment is a firm one and it will be difficult for the Government to back out for the following reasons - (i) The State Library is to occupy the premises vacated by the Museum. The Library has a strongly organized pressure group, and their management urgently needs space to expand. (ii) The architect now has final plans for the south bank site to submit to Cabinet for approval. The museum and the community The Museum is keen to revitalize the natural sciences and those groups pro- 132 moting the natural sciences in the com- munity. National terrestial parks have already been established through the work of Sir Baldwin Spencer and the field nat- uralists’ clubs. At present marine parks are being established in Victoria, and their development is similar to the stage that establishment of terrestial national parks were at 40 years ago. Just to determine what life is in these parks requires the research efforts of a large number of people, apart from the specialised work of Museum staff. Thus the work of FNCV and related groups would be valued and encouraged by the museum to complete such census tasks. The Museum is keen to promote envir- onmental education. Recently 60 inter- ested people were conducted by Museum staff and members of the Marine Research Group over sites at Corner Inlet and Wilson’s Promontory, in the study of food chains. Similar conservation strategies would be initiated by the Museum with field naturalists. It is important therefore, that the Museum should provide facilities for such groups to meet and conduct joint programs. Housing specimens Fifteen million objects have to be stored in the natural history section of the museum, Most of these are invertebrate specimens. Eight hundred square metres of space costing $1.6 million is needed just to house palaeontology alone. In the light of the universities deleting palaeontology from courses in geology it is essential that the Museum staff carry the responsibility of teaching the whole story of life, past and present. This has to be done in an exciting and interesting way, to teach and stimulate the community. To do this will demand imaginitive ideas from staff and interested groups. Victorian Nat. Reports Exhibitions Money is required to develop worth- while exhibitions as has been seen recently with the dinosaur and Egyptian exhibi- tions. At present, the existing natural science exhibits could be greatly improved. Creativity and imagination are required to present the essential concepts, which need to be communicated to the visiting public. The new building The site opposite the World Trade Centre and east of the Polly Woodside site is interrupted on the south east corner by the old refurbished, privately owned Tea House. Ideally the site needs to be accessed to complete the unit, but would cost $6 million. It is planned to scallop out the south bank in a concave fashion to match a similar feature on the Trade Centre front- age. Clearing of the site has already begun. If one arrives at the Museum site, either by boat or by bus from Spencer Street, the approach from the north east side would be through a long concourse introducing visitors to exhibition structures leading off on either side of the concourse to cura- torial areas. The Omnimax Theatre The Onimax Theatre is a domal projec- tion area, where the observer sees the picture completely surrounding on the inner surface of a hemispherical wall. It is a Japanese and American innovation, being ideal for space and astronomy films, and is anticipated for Antarctic and Barrier Reef vistas. The Omnimax Theatre will be the first structure built on the site. It will be built on time, as substantial penalties are to be built into the contract to ensure its con- struction is punctual. It will be a revenue raiser for the Museum, Aboriginal arte- facts, art and exhibitions should also serve in this respect as well. Vol. 107 No. 4 (1990) Points made at question time 1. The plan allows for additions and ex- tensions possible towards the south west. (Maybe the Tea House could be purchased in the future.) 2. 40 new staff have been added since last spring. However the institution is expand- ing from a very depressed base. Ten per- sonnel have joined the Natural Science section. 3. Meeting rooms will be available for ancillary groups, e.g. FNCV, Friends of the Museum, MRG, Malacological Society, ete. 4. The concept in the design is to keep all sections together. 5. The general structure at this stage is fixed and agreed upon. 6. Shared laboratory facilities would be available for specialist groups together with coffee lounges. 7. If the Olympic Games come to Mel- bourne in 1996, the Museum program will be given the impetus to be completed by 1995, or before the Games visitors arrive. At present, there is a 5-year time scale to complete the resiting of the Museum. Members appreciated the clear presen- tation, sincerity and frankness shown by Dr. Bowler in his talk. Noel Schleiger, (Program Secretary). Book Reviews Tasmanian sea shells common to other Australian States by Margaret H. Richmond Publishers: Richmond Printers, Devonport, Tasmania. rrp. $30.00 (softcover), $45.00 (hard cover). (Special discounts if purchased through clubs). This, the first book on Tasmanian shells illustrated in full colour, is a thin A4 sized volume dealing with 170 gastropod and bi- valve species. Published in case bound and soft bound format it clearly does not replace W. L. May’s “Illustrated index of Tasmanian shells” which figured 1,052 species on 47 plates. It does concentrate on those shells most likely to be seen by the average enthusiast, adult or child. Furthermore the figures are readily iden- tifiable. The short introduction provides basic molluscan data, a useful glossary, figures illustrating shell descriptive features and eleven useful Australian literature ref- erences, The book is a valuable tool for the collector and naturalist seeking the identity of common shells of southern Australian shores. Most figures are clear and the species of natural size. Small species usually have an adjacent enlarge- ment but Nassarius nigellus (p.32) and Dentimitrella pulla (p.31) would also have gained in this way. The care taken selecting photographs is reflected in the high quality results. The plates are not cluttered so that each species is easy to find. The facing page in each case provides species and common names with a small map showing Tasman- ian distribution with a list of mainland states also included in the pattern. Ordinal and family names lead quickly to the 134 subject matter supported by brief des- criptions and useful comments. The Tas- manian coastline is divided into segments each of which has a detailed map showing beach localities at which the author obtained her material. Beaches are clearly named, numbered and listed on pages 63-64 together with the number of times each was searched for shells. Each shell is tabled by number and locality providing valuable distribution data. Visitors should easily find beaches and know what to expect. Obvious errors include the miss-spelling of Phallium (p.79) and the omission of “Pot” from “Strange’s Watering Pot” (p.80). On page 49 the name of E. A. Smith has reversed initials while Tenison Woods may have a hyphen inserted occasionally. The title page to the Gastropods section has two somewhat disconcerting faded and reversed figures. The author, who is a perfectionist, says there are a number of small faults which she tried hard to elim- inate but these clearly do not detract from the result. The work was checked by Aus- tralian Museum experts for taxonomic accuracy so that it can be recommended without hesitation to students and any lover of shells, large or small. R. C, Kershaw, Honorary Research Associate, Queen Victoria Museum and Art Gallery, Launceston. Victorian Nat. Book Reviews The Mornington Peninsula - A field guide to the flora, fauna and walking tracks. by Ilma Dunn, Stephanie Rennick and Caroline Grayley Publishers: The Southern Peninsula Tree Preservation Society (1990). 64 pp, 148 colour plates, rrp. $14.95 (soft cover). Launched at the Shire of Flinders Offices, Rosebud, on 18th July, a small book under the above title adds a new di- mension to the sparse literature currently available on the natural history of the Mornington Peninsula. Here is a most alluring collection of 148 beautifully clear colour pictures, chiefly the work of talent- ed photographer, Mrs Ilma Dunn; they embrace herbs, climbers, small shrubs, a few trees, ferns, fungi, lichens, birds, mammals and insects, as well as repre- sentative scenery — from coastal cliffs to fern gullies in the wetter interior of the Peninsula. On pages 34 and 35 a set of seven colour photographs depicts the life history of the Imperial White Butterfly. All pictures are appropriately annotated and the whole grouped according to broad habitats: foreshore, open forest, sheltered gullies, etc. A centrefold sheet gives in- formation on 47 access points to interest- ing walks, on one side, and a ten-coloured map showing geological formations on the other. Full indices to flora and fauna occupy pages 58-62, and references for further reading appear inside the back cover. Not a scrap of space is wasted, even on the inside covers. If there are any mistakes in this excellent field guide, the reviewer is unaware of them; meticulous care has been taken to ensure that the text is accurate and up-to-date. As the three authors aver (p. 3), “Know- ledge of the flora and fauna should assist in their protection, as well as adding pleasure and a sense of discovery to the experience of the sharp-eyed walker”. While congratulating all concerned in the production of such an attractive, useful book, one can confidently recommend it as a model source of local information. May it serve to extend concern for conser- vation of the long embattled native plants and animals of the Mornington Peninsula. J. H. Willis, Brighton, Vic. 21 years of the Montmorency Field Naturalists Club The Montmorency Field Naturalists Club has its origins in a junior club which began in March 1969. Mrs Lorna Cookson, having a young son with pockets always full of beetles, etc., decided a naturalist club would be a good thing. Together with her neighbours and friends and guidance from the Field Naturalists Club of Victoria, she started a very successful organisation, 142 Juniors signed on at the first meeting! Membership numbers are considerably reduced today, due to the competition from TY, etc., but a dedicated group keeps the M.F.N.C. alive and well. On March 9 this year over 40 people attended the 21st Birthday Meeting. Distinguished guests included Lorna Cookson, Ray Wilton (the first President), Dan McInnes (the first Guest Speaker) and many past members. It was interestng to learn of the achievements of many of those early Juniors, whose talents were fostered by M.F.N.C. To mention a few, Dr. Laurie Cookson is working on marine borers at C.S.I.R.O., Michael Braby is studying for a Ph.D. in Entomology, Margaret Howard has an M.Sc. in Genetics and Nancy Endersby, B.Sc, Hons, works for the Department of Agriculture. Notable achievements of the Club have been a Reptile Survey of Kinglake National Park and the discovery and preservation of the Eltham Copper Butterfly. We hope to continue for at least another 21 years. New members of all ages and visitors are always welcome. Enquiries: Elaine Braby 439 9015. Vol. 107 No. 4 (1990) 135 authors. ERRATUM There were a large number of errors in the appendix of Lindenmayer ef al (1989). A survey of the distribution of Leadbeater’s Possum, Gymnobelideus leadbeateri, McCoy in the Central Highlands of Victoria, Victorian Nat. 106 (5); pp 177-8. The corrected appendix is reproduced here in full. All errors were the responsibility of the Appendix The latitude and longitude to the nearest degrees and minutes for all records has been determined from 1: 100 000 NATMAP topographic maps. Elevation of survey sites has been estimated from 1: 25 000 Fire Control maps supplied by the Board of Works. Lat. Long. 37 41 145 44 37 22 145 47 3745 146 I 37 42 146 10 37 45 146 10 37 40 146 07 37 41 146 07 37 43 146 08 37 39 145 45 37 45 146 08 37 49 146 10 37 45 146 09 37 23 145 48 37 39 145 42 37 48 145 48 37 49 145 49 37 48 145 52 Alt. Location Lat. Long. Alt. Location (m) _ (m) 800 — Acheron Gap. 1000 ~—- Blue Range Rd, 37 50 145 51 760 Cnr Big Tree 900 km E bridge, Walking Tk. and Upper Thomson Federal Rd. River. 3735 14538 440 “The Hermitage”, 960 Upper Thomson Maroondah Hwy. River, 375414542 680 1.7 km. SE T/o 1060 Upper Thomson Bunyip Rd. and Rd. A.P.M. Tk. 1040 2kmN 37 54 14547. 780 Cnr. Woodalls Tk. Mt. Gregory. and Pioneer Ck, Rd. 1100 3kmS Triangle, on 374814549 820 Cnr. Big Ck. Rd. Noojee-Matlock Rd. and Mississippi 1020 4kmSW Mt. Fireline. Gregory, Rd. 11, 37 42 14539 1000 1 km. E Ben Cairn, Upper Yarra Catch. Mt. Donna Buang Rd. 800 3kmN Acheron 37 35 14538 520 2km.SW Dom Gap. Dom on 1040 5 km NE Toorongo. Maroondah Hwy. 600 1kmE Tanjil Bren, 374914546 800 Cnr, Fitzpatrick Tk. 1020. Cnr. Thomson and Blacksands Rd. Valley, Noojee/ 375414545 800 Burgess Fire Trail Matlock Rd. I km. Nth 1040, = 4 km W Rubicon Kobiolkes Tk. Dam. 37 32 14530 =560 ~— Cnr. Sylvia Ck. and 800 Cnr MMBW Tks. Coles Ck. Rds. No. 8 and 27, 37 41 14607 +1000 )=—-:17 km Rd. 9, Upper Yarra Catch. Upper Yarra Catch. 800 0.5 km. NE 37 46 146.04 «1040 13 km Rd. 20, Starlings Gap on Upper Yarra Catch. Big Ck. Rd. 37 43 14608 1020 | 10 km Rd Il, 800 Gap Tk., Starlings Upper Yarra Catch. Gap. 37 40 14606 1060 1.5 km Rd. 10 T/o 760 Cnr. Federal Short with Rd. 9, Upper Cut and Federal Rd. Yarra Catch. Victorian Nat. Lat. Long. Alt. —_ Location Lat. Long. Alt. —_ Location (m) (m) 37 38 14556 700 2kmon Rd. 27, 37 21 14553 1000 ~—-'1.3 km on Tk. 6, Upper Yarra Catch. T/o Snobs Ck. Rd. 37 39 14607 1060 3.2 km W Triangle, 37 41 145 39 =—-:1020 17.2 km on Rd. 3, Woods Point Rd. Maroondah Catch. 37 31 14555 960 Koala Falls, 37 37 145 48 1180 ~—s Cnr Rds. 5 and 1, Cambarville Rd. O’Shannassy Catch. 37 43 14537 = 800 36s 1 km W BenCairn, 375014548 800 Mackley Ck., Mt. Donna Buang Crossing with Big Rd. Ck Rd, 37 34 145 37 = 720 ~—Ss Cnr Rd. 9 and 37 33 14553 +=800 __— Big Tree Tk., Monda Tk., Cambarville. Maroondah Catch, 37 33 14553 = 840 ~— Snowy Hill Rd., 37 34 145 32 =©880 ~—s Cnr. Hardies Ck. Cambarville. Rd. and Monda Tk. 37 30 145 49 = 900 -~—s Cnr. Tommy’s Bend 37 36 14539 §=©600 )3=—s 3 km. Ra. 8, Rd. and Maroondah Catch. Yellow Dog Rd. 37 35 145 36 = 800~Ss Cnr. Rds, 13 and 35, 37 26 14548 1100 Blue Range Rd., Maroondah Catch, 1.5 kms S T/o 37 35 14537 =580 =. 2.5 km on Rad. 9, Tweeds Spur Rd. Maroondah Catch. 37 23 145 48 1100 Little River bridge, 37 38 14539 740 1.1 km from Blue Range Rd. Viewpoint. 1, Rd. 3 37 25 14548 1000 Storm Ck., | km W Maroondah Catch. Blue Range Rd. 3739 14541 780 8 km Rd. 27., 37 33 145 31 960 Northern slopes Mt. Maroondah Catch. St. Leonard. 37 39 14550 520 12km. Rd. 1, 37 34 145 33, 860 ~—- Hardy’s Ck. Rd., O’Shannassy Catch. 1.5 km NE T/o 37 37 145 45 1140 0.7 km, Rd. 8, Monda Tk. O’Shannassy Catch. 37 30 145 31 920 4.2 km N Mt. 37 37 145 44 1080 3.9 km Rd. 8, St. Leonard. O’Shannassy Catch. 374614603 1130 0.7 km W summit 37 38 14549 1140 0.8 km. Rd. 5, Mt. Horsfall. O’Shannassy Catch. 3745 14612 1120 Thomson Valley Rd. 37 37 14549 840 2.9km. Rd. 5, O’Shannassy Catch. 37 36 14549 700 7.5 km. on Rd. 12, O’Shannassy Catch. 37 41 14544 900 0.2 km. Rd, 14, O’Shannassy Catch. 37 34 14534 820 Cnr Rd. 9 and Block 6 Rd., Toolangi. 37 36 145 36 =65580—Ss«d1 km. Rad. 39, Maroondah Catch. 37 22 14555 1000 Conns Gap Rd., 0.5 km. T/o Snobs Ck. Rd, Vol. 107 No. 4 (1990) M7 EDITORIAL POLICY Title The Victorian Naturalist is the bi- monthly publication of the Field Nat- uralists Club of Victoria. Scope The Victorian Naturalist publishes articles on all facets of natural history. Its primary aims are to stimulate interest in natural history and to en- courage the publication of articles in both formal and informal styles ona wide range of natural history topics. Research Report A succinct and original scientific communication. Preference is given to reports on topics of general interest. Contributions Contributions may consist of reports, comments, observations, sur- vey results, bibliographies or other material relating to natural history. The scope is broad and little defined to encourage material on a wide range of topics and in a range of styles. This allows inclusion of material that makes a contribution to our know- ledge of natural history but for which the traditional format of scientific papers is not appropriate. Naturalist Notes Short and informal natural history communications. These may include reports on excursions and talks. Commentary Informative articles that provide an up-to-date overview of contemporary issues relating to natural history. Whilst commentary articles are invited, the editors welcome discus- sion of topics to be considered for future issues. Book Reviews Priority is given to major Australian publications on all facets of natural history. Whilst reviews are commis- sioned, the editors welcome sugges- tions of books to be considered for review. News Any items of news concerning the FNCV. Diary Notice of coming events including activities of FNCV groups and any other activities of interest to Vic. Nat. readers. Review Procedures Research reports and Contributions are submitted to the editors and are forwarded to the appropriate member of the editorial board for comment. All research reports are assessed by two independent qualified referees prior to publication. Contributions are assessed by the appropriate member of the editorial board and may be refereed at the editors dis- cretion. All other articles are subject to editorial review. Pineal! Victorian Nat. FNCV Diary (cont.) Fauna Survey Group Contact the group secretary, Alex Kutt, 347 0012 A.H., for information on meetings and excursions. Excursions Saturday, 6th October Night. Leadbeater Possum Watch. Sat-Sun, 20th-21st October Water Rat Survey. Werribee Farm. Sat to Tues. 3rd-6th November Nooramunga Marine Coastal Park. Saturday, 10th November Night. Leadbeater Possum Watch. Saturday, 24th November Night. Leadbeater Possum Watch. Sat-Sun, 8th-9th December Water Rat Survey. Werribee Farm. Saturday, 15th December Night. Leadbeater Possum Watch. Wednesday, 26th December to 2nd January (or longer) Xmas Camp. Nooramumga Marine Coastal Park. Sunday Island. Geology Group Group Meetings (Third Wednesday) Wednesday, 3rd October “Metamorphism” Roger Powell (Melb. Uni.). Wednesday, 7th November “Ashton Mining” (Diamonds). Wednesday, 5th December Members Social Night. Field Naturalists Club of Victoria In which is incorporated the Microscopical Society of Victoria Established 1880 Repistered Office: FNCYV, c/ National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, South Yarra, 3141. OBJECTS: To stimulate interest in natural history and to preserve and protect Australian fauna and flora, Members include beginners as well as experienced naturalists. Patron His Excellency, The Rev Dr John Davis McCaughey, The Governor of Victoria. Key Office-Bearers 1989-1990 President: Mr. ARTHUR FARNWORTH, ENCY, c/ National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, South Yarra, 3141, Hon. Secretary: Mr, JULIAN GRUSOVIN, | Warriner Court, Bast Oakleigh, 3166. (543 8627 A.H.) Hon. Treasurer: Mt. BRUCE ABBOTT, 4/597 Orrong Road, Armadale, 3143. (529 4301 A.H.) Subscription-Secretary: Ms DIANNE CHAMBERS, PNCY, c/ National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, South Yarra, 3141, Editors: ROBY N WATSON and TIM OFFOR, ENCY, P.O, Box 4306, The University of Melbourne, Parkville, 3052, (419 3532), Librarian: Mts, SUELLA HOUGHTON, F'NCY, c/ National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, South Yarra, 3141 Excursion Secretary: DOROTHY MAHLER (850 9379 A.FL.). Conservation Co-ordinator; Mr, WIL ASHBURNER, c/ National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, South Yarra, 3141. Sales Officer (Victorian Naturalist only): Mt. D. EB. MeINNES, 129 Waverley Road, East Malvern, 3145 (541 2427) Publicity Officer: Miss MARGARET POTTER, 1/249 Highfield Road, Burwood, 3125, (889 2779). Group Secretaries Botany: Miss MARGARET POTTER, 1/249 Highfield Road, Burwood, 3125 (889 2779). Geology, Miss HELEN BARTOSZEWICZ, 16 Euroa Avenue, Nth, Sunshine, 3020 (311 5106 A.H.) Fauna Survey: Mr. JULIAN GRUSOVIN, | Warriner Court, East Oakleigh, 3166, (543 8627 A.H.) Microscopical: Mrs. ELSIE GRAHAM, 147 Broadway, Reservoir, 3073 (469 2509) MEMBERSHIP Membership of the F.N.CY, is open to any person interested in natural history, The Victorian Naturalist is distributed tree to all members, the club's reference and lending library is available and other activities are indicated in reports set out in the several preceding pages of this magazine. Subscription rates for 1990 Metropolitan Members (03 area code) ‘ . $27 Joint Metropolitan ‘ $30 Gountry/Interstate members $24 Joint Country/Interstate members ‘4 $27 Concessional rate (Students/pensioners) (proof of entitlement required) : $20 Joint Goncessional $23 Junior (under 18; No Victorian Naturalist) $5 Clubs $25 Subscription to Victorian Naturalist $30 Overseas Subscription to Victorian Naturalist . $35 AN Vf Individual Journals ’ $4 /) JENKIN BUXTON PRINTERS PTY, LTD. 113 Aaworsrord st West MELBOURNE 428-47 ra The (., *% 4 is rove &. 3 VictorNm~ Naturalist Vol. 107 (5/6) October/December 1990 Published by The Field Naturalists Club of Victoria since 1884 FNCV DIARY General Meetings Held on the second Monday of the month (except for public holidays), 8.00 p.m. at the National Herbarium Hall, corner of Birdwood Avenue and Dallas Brooks Drive, South Yarra. Meetings include a talk by a guest speaker. All members of the public are welcome. Monday, 11th February Sunday, 17th March Spiders. Hosted by the Fauna Survey group. Wendy Clarke. FNCV Excursions For further information on excursions contact Dorothy Mahler (850 9379 A.H.). 6th-12th January Sunday, 3rd February Excursion to Gypsy Point. Lancefield Marsupial Megafauna Fossils. Sanya van Huet. Sunday, 3rd March Spiders and general natural history. Gerard Marantelli. Group Activities Botany Group Group Meetings (second Thursday) Thursday, 14th February Thursday, 14th March To be announced. Biology of seaweeds. Mrs, Iona Christiansen and panel. Excursions Saturday, 23rd February Saturday, 23rd March Rainforest at Toolangi. Seaweeds at Mornington. David Cameron. Mrs. Iona Christiansen. Microscopial Group Group Meetings (Thitd Wednesday) Wednesday, 16th January Wednesday, 20th February Members night. Chemistry of stains. Wednesday, 20th March Phase contrast and modulation contrast in microscopes. Geology Group Group Meetings (First Wednesday) Wednesday, 6th February Wednesday, 6th March Members night. Weather and climate on other planets. Wednesday, 3rd April Dr. Tim Gibson. Geomorphology. Mrs Gabi Love. From the Editors Owing to the re-location of the printers of The Victorian Naturalist, the last two issues for 1990 have been combined into one large edition to bring the journal to readers before the christmas period. Registered by Australia Post, Publication No. V.B.P. 1268 The Victorian Naturalist Volume 107 (5/6) October/December, 1990 Editors: Tim Offor and Robyn Watson. Editorial committee: Steve Read and Karen Wilson Research Reports Contributions Naturalist Notes Reports Book Review IISSN 0042-5184 Distribution, habitat and conservation status of the Giant Burrowing Frog, Heleioporus australiacus (Myobatrachidae) in WAGLORI AsV (Qie Gs ICSE. coer eet enere Ren Tonioc uct oes dis coals ep Poo tu' 144 Germination in eight native species of herbaceous dicot and implications for their use in revegetation, by S. McIntyre ............. 154 Record of a Southern Right Whale Eubalaena australis skeleton from Altona Bay, Victoria, ‘Australia, by J. M. Dixon........2..0.....- 159 Plant drought messenger proves elusive, by T. J. Entwisle ............ 163 Field naturalists in Victorian alps, by L. Gillbank ......1..c0..c00cc000s 165 WHT Dv a Ar DIS DIGCKOUTT she, e heme e pees ok eaateten stiybheice 173 Intertidal Echidna activity, by H. PHillipps .....00...c00ccccccceceeveeeees 174 Mount Buffalo excursion, 4th-9th January 1990, by R. Parkin..... 175 “The marine life of Heron Reef’. Speaker: Julie Marshall, LIVEN SSSCHICIOR Ea te Maueeree re Pan. Le ye aiey tee en to adi sce tite «e Weve dia ees 177 Annual report of the Botany Group, F.N.CV., by W. Bennet......... 181 Australian Natural History Medallion .................ccceceececceceseecees 182 Wily violets and underground orchids, by P. Bernhardt. INGVICW COND ve mnie lean en. car mmeaneors ts Gets ee sf ieteul eae ie. 179 Cover photo: Blue Whale skeleton collected at Jan Juc Victoria in 1867 by Prof. McCoy. Displayed outside the old Union Building, University of Melbourne. Photo courtesy of the Museum of Victoria. Research Reports Distribution, habitat and conservation status of the Giant Burrowing Frog, Heleioporus australiacus (Myobatrachidae), in Victoria Graeme R. Gillespie* Introduction The genus Heleioporus contains six species, all of which are endemic to Aus- tralia. The Giant Burrowing Prog, Heleio- porus australiacus (Shaw and Nodder 1795) , is the largest of these moderate to large, globular burrowing frogs (Pig, 1), and it is the only member of this genus found in eastern Australia, The disjunet distribution between the western and eastern species in this genus is discussed by Lee (1967), The known distribution of WH. aust- raliacus extends from the central coast of New South Wales to eastern Victoria (Fig. 2). Within New South Wales the status of this species is uncertain, An extensive survey of the herpetofauna in the Bega district on the New South Wales coast (Lunney and Barker 1986) indicated that the species is rare, However, it appears to be common throughout the Hawkes- bury Sandstone in the Sydney area (Bar- ker and Grigg 1977; Dr. A. Lee = Assoc. Dept, Zoology, Monash University, pers. comm, ). In Victoria, little was known about the distribution of #7. australiacus prior to 1983, as only five specimens had been recorded, The first specimen, from Tongio West near Omeo, was recorded in January 1903 (Anon 1903). Not until 1965 were two more specimens collected, adjacent to the Cann Valley Highway, in Wet Sclerophyll Forest, 200 and 300 metres south of the state border respectively (Littlejohn and Martin 1967). In February 1967, two more specimens, as well as epg masses, were collected five kilometres north of Boola Camp near Erica (Littlejohn and Martin 1967), As a result of intensive fauna * Departinent of Genetics and Developmental Bio- logy, Monash University, 144 surveys in eastern Victoria by the Depart- ment of Conservation and Environment in the past eight years, many more speci- mens have been found. In this paper, these additional records are presented, and the current Knowledge and status of this species in Victoria is reviewed, Species Description Lee (1967) and Cogger (1986) have dese- ribed HH. australiacus as follows: A large, robust species, with maximum body length (snout-vent) of 100mm (Fig, 1), Body colouration is a uniform chocolate brown above, white below, with the throat frequently washed with brown, There are scattered white or yellow spots, 1-3 mm in diameter, usually capping warts on the sides and around the cloaca, and occasional spots on the proximal segment of forelimbs and hindlimbs, The back and sides are covered with warts, each capped by a small spine. Black spines may also occur on the throat, the ventral surface is otherwise smooth, A small divided flap is present in the anterior corner of the eye. The tympanum is prominent, The girth of the forelimbs usually exceeds the girth of the hindlimbs in males, but never in females. The fingers and toes are without webbing, The compressed inner metatarsal tubercle is slightly less than one half the length of the fourth toe. A series of conical black spines is prominent on the first, and usually second and third fingers of males, the largest up to 5 mm in length on the metacarpophalangeal knuckle of the first finger, The call is a low-pitched, owl-like, “ou-ou-ou’’*, with a repetition rate of 18-24 calls per minute (Littlejohn and Martin 1967). Victorian Nat. Research Reports Distribution and Habitat The presently Known distribution of AY. australiacus in south-eastern Australia is illustrated in Pig. 2. Records of this species from Victoria, since 1982, are summarized below:- I, Waratah Access Track, approxi male (photographed, released) recorded calling from a burrow adjacent (oa fire dam in Damp Sclerophyll Borest domin ated by Aucalyprus obligna (Messmate Stringybark), &. cypellocarpa (Moun fain Grey Gum) and 2. sieberd (Silvertop Ash), with an open understorey (Ches mately 500 m east of Waratah Flat, Bast Gippsland, Victoria: January, 1983. (Australian Map Grid Reference 8623 390720), One gravid female (released) was Observed crossing a track at night, after a heavy thunderstorm, This site is on the boundary between Lepfosper- mum glabrescens thickets and Low Montane Riparian Forest, dominated by Eucalyptus viminalis (Manna Gum) and £, radiata (Narrow-leaved Peppermint), with an open understorey (Chesterfield et al, 1983), 2. Yalmy Road, East Gippsland; Feb- ruary, 1983, (AMG 8623 415717). One terfield ef al, 1983; Opie ef al, 1984) 3, 300 m south of the New South Wales’ Victorian border, 800 m north West Of Coast Range Road, Past Gipp sland: Pebruary, 1984. (AMG) 87233 SS56850), One individual crossing a track at night following heavy rain, The vege tation at this site is Dry Sclerophyll borest, dominated by Auca/yprus radi ata and &. dives (Broad-leaved Peppermint) (Carr ef a, 1884) +. Scorpion Creek, Central Gippsland: February, 1984, (AMG 8523 947612), One male was recorded calling trom under a log jam in the creek, Riparian Fig. 1. Giant Burrowing Frog (Heleioporus australiacus), Coast Range, Bast Gippsland, Victoria, (Photo: Graeme R. Gillespie), Vol. 107 No, 5/6 (1990) 145 Research Reports SYDNEY @ CANBERRA Fig. 2. Five minute grids in which Heleioporus australiacus has been recorded. Open grids represent records in Victoria prior to 1982 and all records from New South Wales (Australian Museum Records; Littlejohn and Martin 1967; Lunney and Barker 1986; Webb 1987). Solid grids represent post-1982 records from Victoria and numbers correspond with those in text. Hatched grids represent breeding records in Victoria (Littlejohn and Martin 1967). 146 Victorian Nat. Research Reports vegetation was present along the creek, with forest dominated by Eucalyptus cypellocarpa and E. radiata along the adjacent slopes (Macfarlane ef a/. 1984). 5. Buldah Gap Road, 1.8 km south of the Bonang Highway, East Gippsland: January, 1986. (AMG 8623 936702). One juvenille (photographed, released) was collected from a pitfall trap in Dry Sclerophyll Forest dominated by Euca- lyptus globoidea (White Stringybark) and £. sieberi, with a sparse gound cover (Cherry et al. 1986). 6. Sardine Creek Road, 1.8 km south of the Bonang Highway, East Gippsland: January, 1986. (AMG 8623 489613). Individual frogs were recorded crossing the road on two consecutive nights, following a period of prolonged rainfall (released). Vegetation at this site com- prised Dry Sclerophyll Forest dominated by Eucalyptus globoidea with some E. bridgesiana (Applebox) and E. poly- anthemos (Red Stringybark) (Chester- field et al. 1988). A sample of the sur- face soil at this locality was identified as a fertile sedimentary soil, with a loamy sediment and fairly high organic content (Graeme Love - Geological Adviser, Department of Defence, Glex Field Unit, St. Kilda West, Victoria pers. comm.). 7. Near the junction of Far Creek Track and Hepburn Road, Coast Range, East Gippsland: December, 1986. (AMG 8723 801819). Two males [95 mm and 70 mm (snout-vent), photographed, released] were collected from a pitfall trapline along a slope, adjacent to Swede Creek, after a heavy rain storm. The Montane Sclerophyll Woodland at this site is dominated by Eucalyptus dal- rympleana (Mountain Gum) and E. radiata, with a sparse middle stratum of Acacia dealbata (Silver Wattle) and A. melanoxylon (Blackwood) (Opie ef al. Vol. 107 No. 5/6 (1990) 1990), A sample of the surface soil collected at this locality was identified as being a highly fertile volcanic soil, with a high organic content (Love pers. comm). 8. Central Gippsland, 1 km south of Mount Budgee Budgee: April, 1987, and March, 1988. (AMG 8322 150382). On each of two occasions, one indi- vidual was observed on a track (fate unknown). The site was at mid-slope, with Damp Sclerophyll Forest domin- ated by Eucalyptus obliqua, E. cypel- locarpa, E. muellerana (Yellow Stringy- bark) and Acacia obliquinerva (Moun- tain Hickory Wattle), with a scant ground cover (V. Hurley — Forester, Heyfield Work Centre, Department of Conservation and Environment pers. comm.). 9. East Gippsland, 5 km south of Mount Puggaree: May, 1988. (AMG 8622 650385). One individual (released) was observed crossing an old logging track along aridge at night. Vegetation at this site was approximately 20 year- old regrowth Dry Sclerophyll Forest, dominated by Eucalyptus sieberi and E. baxteri (Brown Stringybark), with a middle storey of £. baxteri saplings, Persoonia con/fertiflora (Clusterflower Geebung) and Acacia mucronata (Vari- able Sallow Wattle) (M. Collins - Zoolo- gist, Department of Zoology, La trobe University, Victoria pers. comm.). 10. Mount Alfred, East Gippsland: May 1989. (AMG 8322 392360). One male [100 mm (SV), photographed, released] unearthed as a result of the uprooting of a tree stump. This site was on a ridge in Dry Sclerophyll Forest dominated by Eucalyptus cypellocarpa, E. bosistoana (Coastal Grey Box) and E. globoidea, with a sparse understorey (J. Reside - Department of Conserya- tion and Environment Office, Bairns- dale pers. obs.), 147 Research Reports Il. Black Forest Creek, East Gippsland: March, 1990. (AMG &723 845857- 846859). (Gerard O'Neil pers. comm, Department of Conservation and Environment, Orbost). Tadpoles were located at six sites along a 300 m stretch of the stream by the author, Black Forest Creck is a predominantly narrow (less than | m width), swift-flowing stream, however the tadpoles were located in relatively calm, deep sections. The earthen banks of the stream support a dense growth of Blechnum nudum (Fish-bone Water Fern), Carex appressa (Tall Sedge) and Gahnia sieberiana (Red-Fruit Saw Sedge), and the adjacent slopes are characterised by Montane Sclerophyll Woodland. Several indi- viduals were collected and reared for positive identification. These records of AH. australiacus and also those from New South Wales (Little- john and Martin 1967; Moore 1961; Lunney and Barker 1986; Webb 1987; Australian Museum Records) are all con- fined to the south-eastern slopes of the Great Dividing Range, at elevations below 1000 m, The distribution of this species is within the Eastern Bassian Subregion of Australia, as described by Littlejohn (1967). This subregion is characterised by a non-seasonal rainfall, with either a uniform distribution, or a slight summer maximum. All of the known records of H. australiacus in Victoria have been from eucalypt forests. The absence of records from cleared land suggests a dependence upon forest habitats. Chesterfield e7 al, (1983) recorded one individual in a Lep- tospermum thicket but noted that it was close to adjacent Montane Riparian Forest. The vegetation at sites where H. australiacus has been recorded encom- passes a wide range of forest communities (Montane Sclerophyll Woodland, Mon- tane Riparian Forest, Wet Sclerophyll Forest, Damp Sclerophyll Forest, Dry Sclerophyll Forest) that together occupy a large area of eastern Victoria, The plant community definitions used here are based on those of Forbes ef a/. (1981), 148 Montane Sclerophyll Woodland in- cludes low forest or woodlands of rocky mountain soils, generally of northern aspects with low effective rainfall. The major occurrence is on the west and east flanks of the Cobberas-Nunniong region, with isolated occurrences at Mount Tin- garingy and Bendoe (800-1100 m), Mon- tane Riparian Forest is restricted to gullies and stream margins of sub-alpine and montane valleys, being most common on the Nunniong Plateau and near Mount Misery and the Cobberas (900-1500 m). Wet Sclerophyll Forest includes tall, open forests of well watered slopes throughout the eastern ranges (200-1200 m). Damp Sclerophyll Forest has affinities with Lowland Sclerophyll Forest, which is the most abundant community in East Gipps- land; characteristically open forest of the lowlands, occurring from near the coast to the foothills in a broad band from east to west (80-400 m). This community is dominated by Eucalyptus sieberi and E. globoidea, with many variants depending upon aspect, draining, soil type and alti- tude. Dry Sclerophyll Forest comprises a diverse and widespread range of foothill forests (200-900 m), usually with a sparse shrub layer dominated by opportunistic species, whilst the ground consists of semi- shrubs and herbs (Parkes ef a/. 1985). The vegetation on the Hawkesbury Sandstone, where many individuals have been recorded, consists of “xeromorphic woodlands and shrubs” (Beadle 1962) of high rainfall but low soil moisture re- tention, The small number of records of H. australiacus, and the wide range of forest types from which it has been recorded, make it difficult to identify habitat prefer- ences of this species. However, no indi- viduals of 1. atstraliacus have, as yet, been recorded in rainforest or in tall open forests dominated by Eucalyptus regnans (Mountain Ash) or £. delegatensis (Alpine Ash). Heleioporus australiacus may be ex- cluded from farmland if the larvae are Victorian Nat, Research Reports dependent upon small flowing streams (Harrison 1922). Such streams tend to be degraded by land clearing due to increased silt loading from erosion and changes in the water chemistry (Langford and O’Shaughnessy 1980). These changes may inhibit larval development and thereby eliminate the species from the area. This species has been recorded from a dam on one occasion, however, this was within a forested area. Life History Lee (1967) described aspects of the life history of Heleioporus spp. in Western Australia. He observed that the breeding activity of these species is confined to a period of approximately six weeks — from the onset of winter rains until ephemeral pond sites fill. These species construct burrows in, or adjacent to ephemeral ponds from which males will call, and in which mating and oviposition occurs. Sufficient rainfall is required, on com- pletion of embryonic development, to flood the burrows and release the larvae into the ponds. Three to five months are required for completion of larval develop- ment. As yet, little is known of the life history of H. australiacus. Moore (1961) heard males calling from burrows in sandstone cliffs near Sydney in August, September and March. Littlejohn and Martin (1967) have recorded this species calling in eastern Victoria during December and January; two individuals were calling from burrows in banks of shallow creeks, and one amongst debris in the middle of a small pool. Chesterfield et a/. (1983) recorded one individual calling in February from a burrow adjacent to a fire dam, and Mac- farlane et al. (1984) also recorded one calling in February from under a log jam in a creek. The eggs are unpigmented and encap- sulated by a foamy mass (Watson and Martin 1973). In four egg masses examined by Watson and Martin (1973), the egg count ranged from 775 to 1239. Watson Vol. 107 No. 5/6 (1990) and Martin (1973) have described the larvae of A. australiacus as unspecialised, with a median anus, the mouth disc con- taining six upper and three lower labial teeth rows, and an anterior gap in the papillary border. The tadpoles are large, reaching a total length of 75 mm (G. R. Gillespie pers. obs.). Spawn believed to belong to H. aus- traliacus was found in a burrow near Sydney in April, by Fletcher (1984). Har- rison (1922) found larvae in small flowing streams and observed metamorphosis during October and November. From records in the Sydney region he concluded that there was a limited spawning season in autumn, during which he had also heard the species calling. However, Littlejohn and Martin (1967) collected spawn near Walhalla, in Victoria, in February. Lee (1967) collected a spent female in January, and Chesterfield ef a/. (1983) believed that the female they collected in January, was gravid. Two of the tadpoles collected by the author in March had completed meta- morphosis by early May, while others ceased to develop past growing hind limbs. This may be indicative of over-wintering, whereby late-developing tadpoles delay completion of their development until more favourable conditions return in spring. This strategy has been reported in other species of amphibians (Duellman and Trueb 1986). These records suggest that the breeding season may begin in summer and continue through to autumn, with larval life occu- pying up to six months, through to Oc- tober and November. The timing of breeding of H. aust- raliacus is not limited by seasonal water availability as are its congeners in the west. Consequently, a longer breeding season is not unexpected. With only two exceptions, all vocal records of H. australiacus have been from individuals in burrows, usually adja- cent to water. Watson and Martin (1973) noted that egg masses were deposited in standing or flowing water, concealed in 149 Research Reports vegetation or in burrows. Heleioporus australiacus appears to primarily utilize small flowing streams as breeding sites. The record of a male calling from a dam indicates that these may also be used as breeding sites. However, subsequent visits to this site in the months of October, November, February and March have failed to detect this species (G. R. Gillespie pers. obs.; Opie ef al. 1984). Diet Examinations of the stomach contents and a faecal pellet of H. australiacus have revealed that a broad range of arthropod groups are included in the diet. Webb (1983, 1987) found ants, followed by beetles, to be most numerous in the stomachs. The other groups recorded include woodlice, cockroaches, collem- bolans, grasshoppers, moths, and a sig- nificant proportion of noxious or poten- tially venemous prey in the way of scor- pions, spiders, centipedes and millipedes (Littlejohn and Martin 1967; Rose 1974; Webb 1983, 1987). Prey size ranges greatly, from 5 mm to 65 mm in length. However, most prey items are about 10 mm long (Webb 1983, 1987). These results suggest — that, like most Australian anurans, H. australiacus is probably a generalist predator, the primary stimulus for feeding being movement (Tyler 1989). Conservation Status The limited number of records of H. australiacus from eastern Victoria and southern New South Wales indicates that the species is rare in this area. Except for one record near Jervis Bay, there are no known records of this species between the Sydney and Bombala - Eden regions, indicating two potentially disjunct popul- ations. Ahern (1982) classified the status of H. australiacus within Victoria as indeterminate, possibly threatened. Rob- ertson (1987) described the abundance and distribution of this species as being rare in habitat of limited extent, and also assigned it indeterminate status. However, 150 the broad range of forest types from which it has been recorded suggests that this species may have a wider geographic distribution, and be more abundant, than the present records suggest. Webb (1987) noted that H. australiacus is extremely cryptic and that most records of this species in New South Wales resulted from detection of calling males after heavy rain. All of the Victorian sightings of active individuals have been at night, and most were made immediately after heavy and prolonged rainstorms, In Western Aust- ralia species of Heleioporus are also nocturnal, emerging from their burrows every 2-4 nights to feed, and burrowing underground before sunrise (Lee 1967). If H. australiacus occupies a burrow by day and emerges only at night after rain, the chances of detecting it are small. This difficulty in detection is compounded by limitations of surveys on amphibians in eastern Victoria, and the low level of human presence in these forest areas. It is notable, however, that during the past three spring-summer-autumn seasons, intensive flora and fauna surveys have been conducted on and adjacent to the Errinundra Plateau, and in other areas of East Gippsland (Duncan and Peel in prep.; Humphries ef a/. in prep.; Lobert e/ al. in prep.; Westaway et al. 1990; Westaway etal. inprep.; G. R. Gillespie unpublished data), Extensive pitfall trapping was car- ried out during these surveys totalling 5400 pitfall nights, with attention being given to potential habitat for Heleioporus. Small streams and other waterbodies were inves- tigated, and tracks were scanned for indi- viduals in transit on nights after heavy rainstorms typical of the region, Although conditions appeared to be favourable, on no occasion was this species detected during any of these surveys. The impact of silvicultural practices on this forest-dependent species is not known. Timber harvesting by clearfelling may cause disturbance to habitats in several ways (A.B.R.G. 1985). The invertebrate litter fauna, a potential food source, is Victorian Nat. The Field Naturalists Club of Victoria Subscription renewals 1991 Subscriptions are due on January Ist If you do not intend to pay in person at a FNCV meeting in January, please post your subscription now to: FNCV Subscription Secretary, National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, South Yarra, Vic. 3141, together with this form. All subscriptions except for junior include the Victorian Naturalist. Membership subscription Metropolitan member (03 area code) $30 Joint Metropolitan members $35 Country/Interstate members $27 Joint Country/Interstate members $32 Concessional rate (Students/Pensioners*) $22 Joint Concessional rate $27 Junior(under18, no Victorian Naturalist) $5 Subscriptions to The Victorian Naturalist only Within Australia $40 Overseas $50 AUD Clubs $30 (*proof of entitlement is required for student and pensioner subs.) Please save us the expense of reminder notices by sending your subscription now. Receipts will not be sent unless requested. Please circle one: New subscription / Renewal ea U Ses AV TA ssts fat Tene Pee IE eth tee tne acct gov vnnlgwasnvagubed andes Peete RMETI@ PINE AAT EATON tI, MSc coer orcas ooisn act wetvnrsiesaceVovetenteerevesend ee ee ree rere rere rere rere rere errr errr err rererere rere rere reer OUP TRS OCE OCCU eee Pee e ree Teer reece rere rere revere rere rere rece rer ir erer ec erer errr errr rere rere. EERO TR HERE R ERE ESE REESE EERE EERE EE EE EEE SESE EEE EEEE HE ETS SEES ESTE EEEO ESSE ESSERE EH HEHE HOSE SS EE ES ESSE EEE DEED SLC DE MAT OISIMMETADOVE USED Ss ssres ces scectsscvivencasvsreescasscrseesevvavetersseceees Suscription We Rloki doses Donation Sa epee otal enclosed Ca Supplement to The Victorian Naturalist Oct/Dec 1990 ‘eigjas sriojnudine Ye ; soot Bh ern rt “SOOT sagen send sip ye tenn ons ee A ~ RTequiogy: pul Aaa fiend afar FO Spo) ORY ‘ ; seg wast iad pao AHO PaGK 2 AB Aspens ee eet eter abies H J La\inie@\ DE mone : uiddtess ren pies terey | a “a TyyeecenpeeLibrjou \ iscinwasep it) if Vi, 66 pern2 Kens angele ” SIERO] poy Sy ary Acerca aut nee Aa aren P. Arawuced fi 4 ping ras ie ‘Eeaneepety" ct af pA, senate” ? OAL tt onthe ‘ 9 i | srg ganen 1k, sateen oa Resionrbaeet j rf map yoRt ‘same a ae | ee a te q eae gy Pur BUM oI'T) DEC epe asi mm ossce al aol OH dine poe + ERO tT 1? a NeLaeras UCM A Gai sooy to Suet, 07/4. 20ND | EWE suerQyarpry: pivey nays’ inn eI Suoad Hy whe gQe fue rej mM papunodgyy Pas na Arcrbegee pnALaNEe ca pe 7 Eur OAH bee eee, . ae Chouactiy Varin He, . “eo hi = a pul her og B55 ey 1 RDS Wy ACOATRIAAY TSENG SDGRIDELE cae #7 0 Ba) “ ses) pare pyemumhoyysip uewpGimese Oe (jae m3 por seh act eens {OG I1.67 Coge} a0 ene Dek pow “sohar we 199 | wesmypeneyy® © enpec bron ® oF rie ed ue aS OTA I uy ai Cue! \Agiriy ane samy ip 7? youd Wil ars cbt pons wey Beier; tar’ BiLaAGoy Waki ayer q aie PCLUMION TIM. £0-.. I, he A be: L200. Sb. % LUCA ELGELI aye qe oer: soph owe Ker werods: «Sones egy eg) baw ‘peqe onpecutr ue SLE ae ouyerend eRe: y Ae witiy wad TASS ¥ pSttim pram ayy ie gupacxbeyou reneasye Type Kye wseaiayese CUP ot Aycyorye” Research Reports likely to be adversely affected by burning the litter layer (Campbell et al. 1984), which is a common practice to promote regeneration after timber harvesting. Amphibian larvae of different species have varying ranges of tolerances to en- vironmental variables such as temperature, salinity and nutrient levels (Duellman and Trueb 1986). In contrast to amphibian species which are able to opportunistically utilise standing bodies of water, in which fluctuations in temperature, nutrient and oxygen levels may be extreme, the larvae of species which rely on permanent streams for their reproduction are likely to be less tolerant of such changes because the normal stream environment is more stable. Stream-adapted larvae may also be dependent on particular flow rates. Exces- sive flow rates may flush larvae out of favourable habitat and diminished flow may affect movement, food availability, temperature and predator levels (Petranka 1984). Within timber-harvesting areas, har- vesting prescriptions require that linear streamside reserves of at least 20 m width are prescribed along either side of permanent streams, swampy ground and bodies of standing water, and 5 m along intermittent streams and gullies, to protect water quality (Conservation, Forests and Lands 1988). However, investigations by Pittock (1989) indicate that these prescriptions frequently are not met. Several studies indicate that timber har- vesting and road construction activities may affect temperature, nutrient levels and water yields (Boughton 1970; Brown 1972; Clinnick 1985; Cornish and Binns 1987; Flinn ef a/. 1983; Langford and O’Shaugh- nessy 1980; Mackay and Cornish 1982; Metzeling 1977; MMBW 1980). While these studies do not apply directly to the range of soil types and vegetation within the known distribution of H. australiacus, it is apparent that streams are affected by timber harvesting to varying degrees, Such disturbances may potentially affect the viability of populations of amphibians Vol. 107 No. 5/6 (1990). such as H. australiacus. The Department of Conservation, Forests and Lands (1988) also prescribes linear reserves of at least 40 m width to link areas excluded from harvesting and reserves at various seral stages along mid-slopes and/or ridge-tops, in addition to any streamside reserves. However, it is not known whether amphi- bians are able to utilize these reserves as corridors. Heleioporus australiacus is poorly represented within the Victorian National Parks system. There have recently been significant extensions to the National Parks system within the geographic dis- tribution of H. australiacus, with the formation of the Roger River extension of the Snowy River National Park and the new Errinundra and Coopracambra National Parks (National Parks Amend- ment Act May 1988). However, only the record from Waratah Access Track is incorporated in the Roger River extension. All other records are within timber har- vesting areas, Five of the more recent records of this species have resulted from intensive flora and fauna surveys by the Flora and Fauna Survey and Management Group, Department of Conservation and Environment, in eastern Victoria, and have consequently been included in areas re- served from timber harvesting. In general, the boundaries of these reserves are de- fined by ridge-lines, gullies, roads and other visible topographic features and vary between approximately 150 and 600 ha (Carr et al. 1984; Chesterfield ef a/, 1983, 1988; Macfarlane et al. 1984; Cherry ef al. 1986; Opie ef a/. 1990). Reserves of this size are unlikely to maintain viable populations because the potentially small and gene- tically-isolated populations supported by them will be vulnerable to stochastic catastrophies such as fire, and the detri- mental effects of inbreeding depression. Some of these areas are adjacent to National Parks or connected to them by other linear reserves. However, until more information on the distribution, popu- lation size, breeding biology and dispersal 151 Research Reports of this species comes to light, the effec- tiveness of these reserves will remain indeterminate. Heleioporus australiacus is one of several amphibian species occurring in eastern Victoria, whose ecology and status are poorly understood, Little information is available on their basic biology, or their vulnerability to existing land management practices. We cannot be confident that management prescriptions are adequate until the ecological requirements of these species are clarified. Acknowledgements I wish to gratefully acknowledge the following people: Jean Mare Hero, Murray Littlejohn and Peter Robertson for their comments on the text and fruitfull dis- cussion about frogs. Stephan Henry, Andrew Bennett, Greg Horrocks and lan Lunt for reading the text and constructive comment. References A.B.R.G. (1985), The impacts of timber production and harvesting on native flora and fauna, In ‘Report of the Board of Inquiry into the Timber Industry. Volume Il. Chm L 8S. Ferguson, Victorian Government Printing Office, Melbourne. Ahern, L. D. (1982). Threatened Wildlife in Victoria and Issues Related to its Conservation. Min. Conserv. Vic., Fish & Wildl. Serv., Fish & Wildl. Pap. No. 27 Anon,, (1903). Natural history notes, exhibits, Viet. Nat. 19; 122-124. Barker, J. and Grigg, G. (1977). A Field Guide to Australian Frogs. (Rigby: Adelaide, Australia). Beadle, N. C. W. (1962). Soil Phosphate and the delimitation of plant communities in eastern Australia. Il. Ecology, 43: 281-288. Boughton, W, C, (1970). Effects of Land Management on Quantity and Quality of Available Water. A Review. Water Res. Lab. Report No. 120, University of New South Wales, Sydney. Brown, J. A. H. (1972). Hydrologic effects of bushfire in acatchment in south-eastern N.SW, J. Alydrol. 15: 77-96. Campbell, R. G., Chesterfield, E. A., Craig, F. G., Fagg, P. C., Farrel, P. W., Featherston, G. R., Flinn, D. W., Hopmans, P., Kellas, J. D., Leitch, C. J., Loyn, R. H., Macfarlane, M. A., Pedrick, L. A., Squire, R. O., Stewart, M. T. L. and Suckling, G. C. (1984). Silvercultural and environmental aspects of harvesting some major commercial eucalypt forests in Victoria: A review. Division of Education and Research, Forests Commission, Victoria. (unpubl. report). 152 Carr, G. W., Horrocks, G. F, B., Cherry, K. A., Opie, A. M., Schulz, M. and Triggs, B. E. (1984). Flora and Fauna of the Coast Range Forest Block, East Gippsland, Victoria, Dep. Conserv., For. & Lands, State For. & Lands Serv., Ecol., Survey Report No. 4. Cherry, K. A., Brown, G. W., Carr, G. W., Horrocks, G.E.B,, Opie, A. M. and Triggs, B. E. (1986). Flora and Fauna of the Buldah Forest Block, East Gippsland, Victoria. Dep. Conserv., For, & Lands, State For. & Lands Serv., Ecol, Survey Report No, 7. Chesterfield, E. A., Macfarlane, M. A., Allen, D., Hutchinson, M. N., Triggs, B. and Barley, R. (1983), Flora and Fauna of the Roger Forest Block, East Gippsland, Victoria. For. Comm, Vic, Ecol. Survey Report No. 1, Chesterfield, E. A., Henry, S. R., Hurley, V. A. and Schulz, M. (1988). Flora and Fauna of the Brodribb Forest Block, East Gippsland, Victoria, Dep. Conserv., For, & Lands, Ecol. Survey Report No, 19. Clinnick, P. F. (1985), Buffer strip management in forested areas; A review: Aust. For., 48: 34-45, Cogger, H. G, (1986). ‘Reptiles and Amphibians of Australia’. (Rev. Ed.) (Reed: Sydney, Australia). Cornish, P. M. and Binns D, (1987). Streamwater quality following logging and wildfire in a dry sclerophyll forest in southeastern Australia. For Ecol. Man., 22; 1-28. Department of Conservation, Forest and Lands (1988). Code of Forest Practices for Timber Production. Dep. Conserv., For. & Lands, Victoria, Duellman, W. E. and Trueb, L. (1986). Biology of Amphibians, (McGraw-Hill: New York). Duncan, P. E. and Peel, W. (in Prep.). Flora and Fauna Survey of the Misery and West Errinundra Forest Blocks, East Gippsland, Victoria. Ecol. Survey Report, Orbost Region, Dep. Consery. and Environment, Fletcher, J. J. (1894). Description of a new cystignathoid frog from New South Wales. Proce. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 8: 524-33. Flinn, D, W., Farrell, P. W. Stuart, H. T. L., Leitch, C. J. and Hopmans, P. (1983). The effects of fire in eucalypt forests on soils, nutrient cycling, tree growth and catchment hydrology: A review with particular reference to fuel reduction burning. /n ‘Proc, Symp. Fighting Fire with Fire’. (Grad. School of Environ. Studies, Monash Univ.: Melbourne). pp. 146-85, Forbes, S. J., Gullan, P. K. and Walsh, N. G. (1981). Sites of Botanical Significance in East Gippsland. Ministry for Conservation, Victoria. Environ- mental Studies Division. Harrison, L. (1922). On the breeding habits of some Australian frogs. Aust, Zool. 3: 17-34. Humphries, R. K., Earl, G, E., Gillespie, G. R., Horrocks, G. F. B, and Lobert, B. O. (in prep.). Flora and Fauna of the Genoa and Stony Peak Forest Blocks, East Gippsland, Victoria. Dep. Conserv, and Env., Ecol. Survey Report No. 33. Victorian Nat. Research Reports Langford, K. J. and O’Shaughnessy, P. J. (eds.) (1980). Water Supply Catchment Hydrological Research. Second Progress Report, Coranderrk. M.M.BMW, Report W-0010. Melbourne and Metropolitan Board of Works. Lee, A. K. (1967). Taxonomy, ecology and evolution of the genus Heleioporus. (Gray) (Anura: Leptodactylidae). Aust. J. Zool, 15: 367-439. Littlejohn, M. J. (1967). Patterns of zoogeography and speciation in south-eastern Australian Amphibia. Jn ‘Australian Inland Waters and Their Fauna’. Ed A. H. Weatherly, pp. 150-74. (Australian National University Press: Canberra, Australia). Littlejohn, M. J. and Martin, A. A. (1967), The rediscovery of Heleioporus australiacus (Shaw) (Anura: Leptodactylidae) in eastern Victoria. Proc. Roy. Soc. Vic. 80: 31-36. Lobert, B. O,, Gillespie, G. R., Lunt, I. D., Peacock, R. J. and Robinson, P, D. (in prep.). Flora and Fauna of the Goolengook Forest Block, East Gippsland, Victoria. Dep. Conserv. and Env., Ecol Survey Report No, 35. Lunney, D. and Barker, J. (1986). Survey of reptiles and amphibians of the coastal forests near Bega, N.SMW. Aust. Zool, 22: 1-7. Macfarlane, M. A., Loyn, R. H., Chesterfield, E. A., Traill, B. J. and Triggs, B. E. (1984). Flora and Fauna of the Scorpion and Dawson Forest Blocks, East Gippsland, Victoria. Dep. Consery., For, & Lands, State For, & Lands Sery., Ecol. Survey Report No. 5. Mackay, S. M. and Cornish, P. M. (1982). Effects of wildfire and logging on the hydrology of small catchments near Eden, N.SW. Jn ‘Proceedings of the First National Symposium on Forest Hydrology’. Melbourne Institute of Engineers. Publication 82/6, pp. 111-17. Metzeling, L. H. (1977). An investigation of the distribution of aquatic macro-invertebrates found in streams flowing through areas with differing amounts of vegetation cover. B.Sc.(Hons.) Thesis, Monash University, Melbourne. M.M.BW. (1980). Water Supply Catchment Hydrology Research: Summary of Technical conclusions to 1979. Report No. W-0012, Melbourne and Metropolitan Board of Works. Moore, J. A. (1961). The frogs of eastern New South Wales. Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., 121; 149-386. Opie, A. M., Cherry, K. A., Horrocks, G. F. B., Carr, G. W., Schulz, M. and Triggs, B. E. (1984). Flora and Fauna of the Yalmy Forest Block, East Gippsland, Victoria. Dep. Conserv., For, & Lands, Ecol. Survey Report No. 2. Opie, A. M., Gillespie, G. R., Henry, S. R., Hurley, V. A., Lobert, B. O. and Westaway, J. (1990). Flora and Fauna Survey of the Coast Range Forest Block, Part II, East Gippsland, Victoria, Dep. Conserv. and Env., Ecol, Survey Report No, 24. Parkes, D., Morres, A, and Williams, J. (1985), East Gippsland: Floristic Vegetation Map (1:250,000) and Guide to Plant Communities. (Nat. Herb., Dep. Conserv., For. & Lands: Victoria). Vol. 107 No. 5/6 (1990) Petranka, J. W. (1984). Incubation, larval growth, and embryonic and larval survivalship of smallmouth salamanders (Ambystoma texanum) in streams. Copeia, 1984; 862-868. Pittock, J. (1989), Timber Harvesting in National Estate Forests in East Gippsland. Vol. 1. East Gippsland Coalition, Melbourne. Robertson, P. (1987). Amphibians and reptiles in Victoria. Jn ‘Nature Conservation in Victoria Study Report, Vol. I’. Eds D. Frood and M. Calder, (School of Botany, University of Melbourne), pp. 160-74. Rose, A. B. (1974). Gut contents of some Australian amphibians and reptiles. Herpetofauna, 7: 4-8. Tyler, M. J. (1989), Australian Frogs. (Penguin: Australia). Watson, G. F. and Martin, A. A. (1973). Life history, larval morphology and relationships of Australian Leptodactylid frogs. Trans. Roy. Sec. Vic., 97: 33-45. Webb, G. A. (1983). Diet in a herpetofauna community on the Hawkesbury Sandstone Formation in the Sydney area, Herpetofauna, 14: 87-91. Webb, G. A. (1987). A note on the distribution and diet of the Giant Burrowing Frog, Heleioporus australiacus (Shaw and Nodder (1795) Anura: Myobatrachidae). Herpetofauna, 17: 20-2. Westaway, J., Cherry, K. A., Gillespie, G. R., Henry, 5. R. and Mueck, S, G. (in press). Flora and Fauna of the Fainting Range and Lower Wilkinson Forest Blocks, East Gippsland, Victoria. Dep. Conserv. and Env., Ecol. Survey Report No. 27. Westaway, J., Henry, S. R., Gillespie, G. R., Scotts, D. J. and Mueck, S. G., (1990). Flora and Fauna of the West Errinundra and Delegate Forest Blocks, East Gippsland, Victoria, Dep. Conserv. and Env., Ecol. Survey Report No. 31. 153 Research Reports Germination in eight native species of herbaceous dicot and implications for their use in revegetation S. McIntyre* Abstract Seeds collected from ten populations and eight species of annual and perennial dicot were examined for germinability after two storage periods (3-9 weeks and 18-24 weeks). Poranthera microphylla, Wahlenbergia communis, W._ stricta, Urtica incisa, Crassula sieberana, Senecio sp. E (aff. apargiifolius), Acaena ovina and Plantago debilis were tested in constant and fluctuating temperatures and in dark and light conditions. All species had a germination rate of 40% or more in at least one of the treatments after 18-24 weeks storage. A wide range of germina- tion responses was recorded and no single set of conditions resulted in optimal ger- mination for all species. The ecological implications of the differing responses are discussed. Basic ecological profiles of a range of plants, together with existing general ecological principles, will provide the most useful information base from which to develop skills in revegetation with native herbaceous plants. Introduction Ecological studies of native, herbaceous dicots in Australia have lagged behind research concerned with trees, shrubs and grasses, despite the importance of herba- ceous plants in most vegetation types. Herbaceous natives have also been neglec- ted in revegetation exercises in Australia which, until recently, have concentrated almost entirely on the establishment of woody vegetation (eg. Venning 1985). With increasing pressure on remaining areas of natural vegetation, there is a grow- ing demand for knowledge and informa- tion that will enable disturbed areas to be * Department of Ecosystem Management, University of New England, Armidale, New South Wales 2351. 154 restored to some semblance of their ori- ginally vegetated condition, including the understorey herbaceous component. Herbaceous species can play a major role both as components of the restored vegetation and as agents in the estab- lishment process. Annual and short-lived perennial plants are frequently colonizers of disturbed areas in natural vegetation, a feature that could be exploited in the restoration process. Seedling establishment is a critical phase in revegetation and a knowledge of germination characteristics will provide clues to successful manage- ment at this stage. Response to light and fluctuating temperatures indicate the im- portance of bare ground or canopy gaps in seedling emergence (Thompson and Grime 1983; McIntyre et al. 1989). Tem- perature response may suggest suitable planting seasons while the presence of seed dormancy may indicate the potential to develop seed reserves in the soil. This study provides some initial germin- ation of data for eight species of annual and perennial herb that have a widespread distribution in eastern Australia. Seed from ten populations was collected on the Northern Tablelands, New South Wales, and tested for dormancy and germinability under three germination conditions and after two different storage periods. Methods Seed collections were made between October and December 1988. Seed was collected either from remnant bushland on the University of New England campus, Armidale, New South Wales (grid refer- ence Guyra 9237-695266) or from the Newholme Field Laboratory, 8 km north of Armidale. In order to obtain sufficient mature seed, collections from each popu- lation were made over a period of several Victorian Nat. Research Reports Table 1. Details of seed collections made in spring-summer 1988. U.N.E, = University of New England campus, Armidale; Newholme = Newholme Field Laboratory, 8 km north of Armidale, Nomenclature follows Jacobs and Pickard (1981), Time of seed Parent Species Locality collection Habitat material Poranthera microphylla Brongn. Newholme Nov. open forest granite Wahlenbergia communis Carolin U.N.E. Oct-Nov. open forest basalt Wahlenbergia stricta Sweet Newholme Oct-Nov. pasture granite Wahlenbergia stricta Sweet Newholme Nov. open forest granite Urtica incisa Poitr. Newholme Nov. open forest granite Crassula sieberana (Schult.) Druce Newholme Oct-Nov. open forest granite Senecio sp. E (aff. apargiifolius) Newholme Nov. open forest granite Acaena oving A. Cunn, U.N.E. Nov, open forest _ basalt Plantago debilis R.Br, Newholme Nov. open forest granite Plantago debilis R.Br. U.N.E. Dec. open forest basalt weeks. Collection details are presented in Table 1. Two of the species collected Por- anthera microphylla and Crassula sieber- ana are monocarpic and the remaining plants are herbaceous perennials. Germination experiments were conduc- ted in December 1988 and April 1989. Because of inter- and intra-population variation in the timing of reproductive maturity, seed age varied from 3-9 weeks in the first trial and 18-24 weeks in the second. Freshly collected seed was dried and stored in an unheated laboratory (temperature range 15-25 °C) up until the first trial. Between the first and second trial, seeds were stored dry at 14°C. All seeds were tested for germination in the following treatments: 1) Constant temperature, 23°C in light 2) Alternating temperatures (8 hours at 23°C, 16 hours at 10°C), in light 3) Alternating temperatures (8 hours at 23°C, 16 hours at 10°C), in darkness. The temperatures represent the average weekly maximum (23°C) and minimum (10°C) in Armidale during spring, summer and autumn. The storage temperature (14°C) represents the mean temperature in Armidale. Germination trials were con- ducted in temperature-controlled cabinets illuminated with fluorescent tubes. Petri Vol, 107 No. 5/6 (1990) dishes were lined with filter paper. Four replicate dishes were used, each containing 50 seeds. Dishes were sealed after the addition of 3 ml of distilled water. Dark treatments were wrapped in aluminium foil. Germination was checked at weekly intervals in the light treatments. The dark treatments were checked at the end of the experiment, on day 21. Seeds were not tested for viability, but only healthy well- developed seeds were used in the trials. Percentage germination data were arcsin transformed. Confidence intervals (95%) were calculated for the transformed data which were then back-transformed for data presentation. Results and discussion Seed from all populations showed in- creased germination after storage with the exception of Plantago debilis (granite) and Senecio sp. which had very high germina- tion in both fresh seed and stored seed (Table 2). All species had germination percentages of 40% or more in at least one of the treatments after 18-24 weeks storage. A wide range of germination responses was recorded and no single set of con- ditions resulted in optimal germination for all species. 155 Research Reports Table 2, Percentage germination of eight herbaceous plants after 21 days, Seed was stored at 14°C and germinated in (1) light at constant temperature 23 °C (= constant); (2) fluctuating temperatures (8 hrs 23°C, l6 hrs 10°C) in light (luctuating) or (3) dark conditions (dark), Bold numbers are means, with 95% confidence limits indicated by the smaller numbers. 3-9 weeks Seed age 18-24 weeks Dark Constant Fluctuating Species Constant Mluctuating, Dark PB. microphylla 20.35.52 17.34.51 7. 24-45 59. 73-86 32. 64.92 3. 8-14 WE communis 0 18-39-02 16- 30 47 28-55-81 32-57-81 61-77-90 Wi stricta (pasture) 15-21-28 12.16 21 5-05 2 39. 48-57 13-29-49 0 We stricta (forest) 7-13 1 15 36 0 5 -l4 22. 40-60 29. 40-52 0-15-40 Urtica incisa 4-13 14-23-35 50.5.2 1 6-16 45-53-61 2-6 -13 Crassula sieberana 16 5063 0 0 58-77-93 14-38-66 0. 2 -5 Senecio sp. 5K. 72.84 65-70-75 53-67 -80 68-81-93 68-79-88 64-71-79 Alcaena ovina 6 10-15 20-36-55 2- 12 -24 0-22-61 30-53-76 17-31-46 P. debilis (granite) 85.95.100 91. 95.98 4 6 10 92.97.100 92.98.99 3-27-61 P. debilis (basalt) fo Qe 8 78. 84.89 91.94.97 12-21-30 5. 34-70 7- 13°21 The most common response was for germination to be inhibited by darkness. This was apparent in stored seed of Por- anthera microphylla, Wahlenbergia stricta, Urtica incisor, Crassula sieberana and Plantago debilis, Fluctuating temperatures appeared to be associated with increased germination in fresh seed of HW. communis and Acaena ovina while fresh and stored seed of U. incisor germinated best in the presence of both light and fluctuating temperatures. These results provide only a brief over- view of germination responses and do not unravel the complex of behaviour that is associated with germination in most plant species. In addition, care must be taken when extrapolating responses of labora- tory-stored seed to behavior in the field, as there may be important differences e.g. seed stored dry in the laboratory may be less dormant than seed exposed to wet- ting/drying conditions outside (MeIntyre ef al, 1989). Despite these difficulties it is possible to place some tentative ecological interpretations on the results. Stored seed of two species (Senecio sp. and Wahlenbergia communis) had over 156 50% germination in all three treatments provided; all the other populations pro- duced seed that remained dormant under at least one of the germination conditions provided. For the latter group, the devel- opment of reserves of dormant seed in the soil seems a greater possibility, as the results indicate that burial or other mech- anisms could prevent germination in the field. The lack of dormancy in relatively fresh seed of Senecio sp. suggests that this species may not accumulate reserves of seed in the soil and if populations of Senecio were to be destroyed, recoloni- zation would largely depend on dispersal of seed from seeding populations else- where. The presence of a pappus on the seeds of Senecio provides a mechanism whereby wind dispersal would be possible. None of the other species possessed mech- anisms for wind dispersal. A second popu- lation (Plantago debilis - granite population) also exhibited full germina- tion after only a few weeks storage, but germination of these seeds was inhibited by darkness. If freshly fallen seed of these plants were to be buried it is conceivable that a seed bank would develop. Victorian Nat. Research Reports Seeds produced in spring-summer could potentially be used for sowing in the following late summer-autumn period. This may also be the pattern of natural regeneration although it is not known whether field conditions impose dormancy on seeds, delaying their germination until later seasons. Regional climatic conditions and temperature tolerances of individual species would determine appropriate planting seasons. In southern Victoria, Hitchmough ef al, (1989) achieved success- ful establishment in eight species of native dicot sown in mid-winter. The cold tem- peratures and frequent frosts of the Northern Tablelands may make winter sowing less suitable for some species in this region. In situations where germination is in- hibited by darkness, seeds sown on or near the soil surface may have better rates of seedling emergence. This conclusion is tentatively supported by the work of Hitchmough et ai. (1989) who found emergence of the two light-responsive species (Stylidium graminifolium and Wahlenbergia stricta) to be restricted to the top few millimetres of soil. Seed size is also a factor in seedling emergence. Small- seeded plants (e.g. Wahlenbergia spp., Poranthera microphylla and Crassula sieberana), and seedlings arising from them, are likely to be adversely affected by seed burial. Interestingly, germination in these three species was inhibited by darkness, whilst that in the largest-seeded species (Acaena ovina) was not. Seedlings derived from larger seeds are less likely to be disadvantaged by burial as their larger size and greater food reserves assist pene- tration to the soil surface where photo- synthesis can commence (Harper ef al. 1970; Schimpf 1977). The principles that apply to seed burial and emergence are also relevant to the \question of soil coverings. Seedlings that jare unable to establish from buried seed ‘ol. 107 No. 5/6 (1990) are unlikely to readily establish in existing plant swards or through dense plant litter (e.g. the native grass Diplachne fusca, McIntyre et al. 1989). Plants have a varying dependency on open space, and gaps in the canopy cover, to establish. Species that are particularly dependent on gaps for regeneration may be associated with a suite of inter-related ecological characteristics e.g. a light requirement for germination, stimulation of germination in response to temperature fluctuations, small-seeded- ness, early reproduction and rapid growth rates (Grime 1979), Reproduction of such plants are disturbance-dependent and the term weediness is often applied to them, although the term weed is used for a much wider and more ecologically varied group of plants. Generalizations such as these help us to make sense of a bewildering array of taxonomic and ecological diversity. They assist us in making informed guesses as to how unfamiliar plants may behave and in allowing revegetation projects to be planned in a more directed way (e.g. see Grime 1980). Obviously any attempts at generalization can result in a loss of information that may be important, For example, the concept of variation within a species may have important conservation and practical implications. This was evi- dent in the species from which seed from two populations was collected (Wahlen- bergia stricta and Plantago debilis). Both showed variations in dormancy of fresh seed. This type of ecological variation may have relevance in revegetation, while mor- phological variation can reflect genetic diversity of conservation significance. Because our knowledge of Australian her- baceous species is so limited, successful re- yegetation in the future will require the flexible application of general principles, combined with attention to detail and good experimentation. 157 Research Reports Acknowledgements This work was supported by a Uni- versity of New England Internal Research Grant and the Newholme Funds Alloca- tion Scheme, University of New England. Thanks to R.D.B. Whalley for useful dis- cussion and comments. References Grime, J. P. (1979), ‘Plant Strategies and Vegetation Processes’. (Wiley: Chichester). Grime, J. P. (1980). An ecological approach to man- agement. /n ‘Amenity Grassland: An Ecological Perspective’. Eds I. H. Rorison and R. Hunt, pp. 13-55. (Wiley: Chichester). Harper, J. L., Lovell, P. H. and Moore, K. G. (1970). The shapes and sizes of seeds. Annual Review of Ecology and Systematics 1: 327-56. Hitchmough, J., Berkeley, S. and Cross, R. (1989). Flowering grasslands in the Australian landscape. Landscape Australia 11: 394-403. Jacobs, S. W. L. and Pickard J. (1981). ‘Plants of New South Wales’. (Government Printer: Sydney). McIntyre, S., Mitchell, D. S. and Ladiges, P. Y. (1989). Germination and seedling emergence in Diplachne fusca: a semi-aquatic weed of rice. Journal of Applied Ecology 26: 551-62. Schimpf, D. J. (1977). Seed weight of Amaranthus retroflexus in relation to moisture and length of growing season. Ecology 58: 450-53. Thompson, K. and Grime, J. P. (1983). A comparative study of germination responses to diurnally fluc- tuating temperatures. Journal of Applied Ecology * 20: 141-56. Venning J. (1985) (ed.) ‘Revegetation Workshop’. (De- partment of Planning and Environment: Adelaide). 158 Victorian Nat. | Research Reports Record of a Southern Right Whale (Eubalaena australis) skeleton from Altona Bay, Victoria, Australia Joan M. Dixon* Introduction In November 1989, following a call from the discoverer Mrs. D. Graham, the author examined parts of a skeleton which had been salvaged from Altona Bay approxi- mately 3 kilometres from Point Cook, Victoria (37°52'S 144°52'E) (Fig. 1). The material had been subjected to water action over a long period, the length of which could not be determined. It consisted of right and left auditory bullae, scapulae, part of the nasal septum, chev- ron bones and epiphysis of a vertebral body. It was in relatively good condition, apart from the right scapula, which was not saved. The material was taken to the Museum of Victoria for examination and identification, and an accession number of C27879 allocated. Examination of the scapula (Fig. 2) and bullae (Fig. 3) indi- cated that the specimen is a Southern Right Whale, Eubalaena australis. The only other material of this species in the Museum of Victoria is a piece of baleen from Portland, (38 °21'S, 141°36’E), (C23598), collected about 1861, and cer- vical vertebrae of a specimen lacking data (C23570). Portland Bay, south-western Victoria, was a centre of ‘bay whaling’ from about 1828 onward. The Right Whale was one of two species commonly frequenting the Bay, but its numbers declined markedly, to the verge of extinction. In recent years Right Whales have been sighted near Warrnambool and this has become a popular feature of the area. The most recent sighting in western Victoria was in Apollo Bay in June 1990 (pers. comm. C. Murdoch). Lumsden and Schultz (1983) reported a sighting in eastern Victoria at Venus Bay (38°40'S, 145 °46'E). _ * Curator of Mammals, Museum of Victoria, 328 Swanston Street, Melbourne, Vic., 3000 Vol. 107 No. 5/6 (1990) Material in Australian and New Zealand museums Few examples of the species are located in other Australian museums, despite intensive hunting of Southern Right Whales in the early to mid 19th century. Aitken (1971) commented on the abs- ence of any representative material of this species in the South Australian Museum during the period of over-exploitation which resulted in the subsequent rarity of the species. There was no authenticated sighting of E. australis there during the first half of the 20th century, but they were observed in South Australia from 1968, and in 1981, Aitken salvaged the bulla of a specimen 11.5 m long from Orwell Rocks (38°03 '00"S, 140°44'00"E (pers. comm. Kemper, 1989). The only other osteological material of this species in an Australian museum is held in the Western Australian Museum, an auditory bulla, M11374, collected from the Rocky Coast off Warton Street Reserve (32°00'25"S, 115°44'55"E) in 1974 by N. Green. This specimen is thought to have originated from “The Elizabeth” housing John Gilbert’s collection in 1838. In New Zealand, there is one skeleton in the Otago Museum, and a second in the Dominion Museum, Wellington (Gaskin, 1968). A skeleton with baleen from Akaroa Harbour is held in the Paris Museum. Taxonomy and Morphology The northern and southern hemisphere Right Whales have received considerable taxonomic attention. Available literature on Balaena from the northern hemisphere indicates that there is considerable vari- ation in the form. Several species have been erected, but Corbet and Hill (1988) include only two species, B. glacialis (australis) from all temperate and subantarctic seas, and B. mysticetus from the Arctic Ocean. 159 Research Reports ge Same 5 ‘ a: Fig. 1. Location of Eubalaena glacialis C27879 at Altona Bay, Victoria. Photo: J, Dixon. Oliver (1922) comments that the degree of distinction between B. glacialis and B. australis is arguable. He had insufficient specimens available to him to make further comments. Schevill (1976) uses the name Bubalaena australis, which | have also used here. Studies on the morphology of Right Whales have been undertaken by Allen (1908), Andrews (1908), True (1904), Turner (1912) and Omura et a/. (1969), They have been involved with northern hemisphere animals, and little attention has been given to the osteology and general biology of southern hemisphere specimens. The Altona Bay specimen The effect of continued exposure or immersion of the Altona specimen un- doubtedly weathered it considerably. The loss of ephiphyses from the vertebrae may reflect this, or it may indicate that the animal was immature. The scapula is the only well preserved and identifiable bone of the appendicular skeleton. Its glenoid or caudal border is 160 reasonably evenly concave from the glen- oid fossa half-way to the vertebral border, but distally it is fairly straight. The two . parts of the border are separated by several projecting tubercles. The vertebral border is evenly convex. The coracoid or cranial border is short, and distally projects beyond the border in a marked tuberosity. Bony tubercles are found below it, and on the slightly concave border running proximally towards the acromion. This is a bulbous area which is directed downward and outward. Its free border is worn and convex. The outer surface is concave in the centre, convex towards caudal and cranial borders and towards the glenoid fossa, The body of the inner surface is rounded, the sides almost flat, and the surface above the glenoid fossa convex. The acromion is almost square, its distal edge slightly rounded, mainly due to wear. The lateral extremities are irregular, due to the presence of downwardly pointing tubercles. Victorian Nat. Research Reports Fig. 2. Left scapula of E. glacialis from the outer aspect (Scale 30cm ruler). Photo: J. Dixon. Measurements of the scapula are pre- sented in Table 1. It has not been possible to estimate the length of the specimen using the scapula measurements of other workers, although the Amangasett whale (Andrews 1908), with a slightly larger scapula than the present specimen, has a total length of 16.4 m. Baker (1983) indicates that the maximum length of the southern species is 18 m. Bullae The bullae of the specimen were com- pared with those in the literature, with an Table 1. Measurements of left scapula C27879 (in mm) Maximum breadth of scapula 1100 Maximum height of scapula 860 Length of suprascapula curve 1350 Length of caudal border 650 Length of cranial border 810 Width of glenoid fossa 345 Length of acromion process (from glenoid fossa extremity) 350 Greatest breadth of same (at base) 375 | Vol. 107 No. 5/6 (1990) identified example from the South Aust- ralian Museum, M14135, and with the sketch of the Western Australian Museum example, M11374. The left bulla is shown in Fig. 2. Some measurements of the available Australian material are given in Table 2. Whaling activities in the Altona Bay region In the early days of settlement, whaling activities were not uncommon in Port Phillip Bay. There is a record of a specimen (species not known) harpooned off Wil- liamstown in 1839, which was sold for £80.00, and numerous records of whale chases in the area (Evans 1969). The Williamstown whaling company was pro- posed in 1866 to hunt in Bass Strait, but this was not successful. Table 2. Measurements of bullae (in mm) Museum No. Height Width C27879 (left) 126 169 C27879 (right) 128 161 M14135 (left) 136 151 M11374 (left) 130 141 Fig. 3, Left scapula of E. glacialis C27879 from the inner aspect. (Scale 30cm ruler). Photo: J, Dixon. 161 Research Reports Fig. 4. Left tympanic bulla of EF. glacialis C27879. Inner surface. Photo: J. Augier. Undoubtedly there are skeletons of flensed whales buried in the sands of the Port Phillip shoreline. The Altona Bay record is possibly one of these, but there is NO positive evidence. The specimen was obviously large as indicated by the sizes of scapula and bullae. After a water-logged past its present condition is not good, but there is no obvious indication of sub-fossil origin. Acknowledgements Thanks are extended to Mrs. D. Graham, who alerted me to the specimen, and to Graeme Challis and Kate Breuer, Museum of Victoria, for assistance in the produc- tion of the publication. Loan of material from Dr. Cath Kemper, S.A.M. and infor- mation from Noraah Cooper, W.A.M. is appreciated. Lisa Giuliani typed the manuscript, and Jon Augier assisted with photography. References Aitken, P. F. (1971). Whales from the coast of South Australia. Trans. R. Soc. §. Aust. 95: 95-103. Allen, J. A. (1908). The North Atlantic Right Whale and its near allies. Bull. Am. Mus, Nat. Hist. 24: 171-82. 162 Andrews, P. C. (1908), Notes upon the external and internal anatomy of Balaena glacialis Bonn. Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist, 24: 277-329, Baker, A. N. (1983). ‘Whales and dolphins of New Zealand and Australia. An Identification Guide’. (Victoria University Press: Wellington). Corbet, G. and Hill, J. E. (1988). ‘A World List of Mammalian Species. 2nd Ed? (British Museum; London), Evans, W. P. (1969). ‘Port of Many Prows’. (Hawthorn Press: Melbourne). Gaskin, D. E. (1968). The New Zealand Cetacea Fisheries Research Bulletin No. 1 (New Series). (New Zealand Marine Department: Wellington). Lumsden, L. F. and Schulz, M, (1983). A sighting of Southern Right Whales (Ba/aena apicalis australis) at Venus Bay, Victoria. Victorian Nat. 100; 211-12. Oliver, W. R. B. (1922). A review of the Cetacea of the New Zealand Seas. Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond. 1922: 533-85. Omura, H. (1958), North Pacific Right Whale. Sci, Rep. Whales. Res. Inst. 13: 1-32. Omura, H., Ohsumi, S., Nemoto, T., Nasu, K. and Kasuya, T. (1969). Black Right Whales in the North Pacific. Sci, Rep. Whales Res. Inst. 21: 1-78. Schevill, W. F. (1986). Appendix 5. Right Whale nomenclature. Jn Special Reports of the International Whaling Commission No. 10. True, F. W. (1904). The Whalebone Whales of the Western North Atlantic. Smiths. Contrib. 33: 244-268, Turner, W. (1912). The Right Whale of the North Atlantic, Balaena biscayensis: its skeleton described and compared with that of the Greenland Right Whale Balaena mysticetus. Trans. Roy. Soc. Edin. 48: 889-922. Fig. 5. Left tympanic bulla of E. glacialis C27879. Outer surface. Photo: J, Augier. Victorian Nat. Contributions Plant drought messenger proves elusive Timothy J. Entwisle Plant physiology is often perceived by naturalists to be a difficult and dull branch of botany. To better comprehend and ap- preciate the world around us, however, we need to understand how and why plants behave as they do. The response of plants to drought stress has long fascinated plant physiologists, and their struggle to unravel the conflicting evidence exemplifies the triumphs and tribulations of research in the natural sciences. Local scientists Dr Tom Neales and Ms Annette McLeod are part of a world-wide research effort de- voted to finding the ‘drought messenger’ in plants, Experimental science can be viewed as a succession of relatively stable dogmas, each separated by a flurry of hypothesis generation and testing. Plant physiologists working on drought stress have just lost a dogma: a theory based on simple hyd- raulic principles has been toppled by evidence of a chemical messenger giving advance warning of water stress. Conse- quently, research teams in Australia and overseas are now struggling to build a new theory to explain the way plants perceive drought. Tom Neales and his post-graduate stu- dent Annette McLeod, of Melbourne University’s botany school, are trying to identify the trigger for the so-called ‘drought response’ in plants. How and when do the leaves received the signal to ‘batten down the hatches’? Tom Neales compares leaves to wet washing hanging ona line. To slow the inevitable drying-out process, all leaves are wrapped in a waxy layer (cuticle) punctured with small apertures (stomata). Stomata open and close in response to the plant’s conflicting requirements for carbon dioxide and water retention. During drought, a plant can conserve valuable water resources by early Vol. 107 No. 5/6 (1990) closing of its stomata, and Neales and McLeod are interested in how and when the stomata receive the message to close. The now defunct dogma stated that sto- mata closed due to the direct effects of water stress in the surrounding leaf tissue. A water-balanced leaf is like a kitchen sink with the tap left running and the plug- hole open. The inlet and outlet can be adjusted so that the water stays at a con- stant level. If you turn the tap off, all the water is soon lost from the system. If, however, a signal could be sent to the plug- hole warning that the water level in the sink was dropping, the outlet could be plugged in time to save some of the water. Ana- logously, a signal sent to the stomata from the root warning of an imminent drought would give the plant a head start in con- serving water. Until recently, it had been assumed that the stomata were acting, as it were, when the water level had already reached the plug-hole. In 1987, Neales worked with Bill Davies in Lancaster, who devised an ingenious method to test this hypothesis. They placed half the roots of a sunflower into a well watered pot, and the other half into a gradually droughted pot. Since there was no shortage of water into the leaf tissue, the stomata would only shut if a chemical drought signal was sent by the ‘droughted’ roots. The stomata did shut, and a whole new hypothesis began to form. At the same time, John Passioura and Rana Munns, of the CSIRO Division of Plant Industry in Canberra, effectively ‘pumped up’ leaf tissue to emulate full water pressure in a droughted plant. Once again, they concluded that a drought signal was overriding the water status of the leaves. It was as though the plug-hole knew the tap had been turned off well before the sink was empty. 163 Contributions A typical drought scenario might in- volve the surface roots first registering water stress and producing a messenger compound which travels through the con- ductive tissue of the plant. This messenger, or hormone, could accumulate in the leaf, triggering the stomata to shut. By the time the deeper soil had dried out, the plant would have already begun to conserve water. From the work carried out at Mel- bourne University by Neales and McLeod, and at other research institutes around the world, the plant hormone Abscisic Acid (ABA) has been implicated as the drought messenger. It has been known for many years that ABA causes stomata to close, and more recently, that in droughted plants stomatal closure was correlated with an increase in ABA in the leaf. Yet, although the circumstantial evi- dence for ABA is strong, not all resear- chers are convinced. It is acknowledged that ABA accumulates in the leaf when plants are droughted, but there is some disturbing evidence to suggest that ABA is not needed for stomatal closure in drought stressed plants. The Canberra group, including Pas- sioura and Munns, have measured the amount of ABA in the leaves of a drought stressed plant and found it to be well below the level known to close stomata. Even more damning, they found that when plant sap taken from a droughted plant, but with all the ABA removed, was fed to a well watered plant, the stomata still closed. They concluded that a messenger exists, but that it is not ABA. Neales and McLeod set out to identify the drought signal in sunflower. As with their counterparts throughout the world, they are intrigued by the idea of a chemi- cally based, early warning system to drought. To trace the messenger, Neales and McLeod added a ‘controlled amount of drought’ using a chemical osmoticum. Instead of waiting 5 days for the pot-plants 164 to dry out naturally, the time scale could be reduced to around 30 minutes, allowing the chemical response to be closely analy- sed. They also used feeding experiments, with the sunflowers placed on a drip of ABA. If ABA was the primary messenger for stomatal closure, a constant supply of ABA should lead to the closed stomata, even in well watered plants. Leaf ABA levels were measured using antibody labelling. The results were, as often happens in science, ambiguous. The stomatal response to the osmoticum treatments was too fast to be directly attributable to ABA building up in the leaves. The initial response to the ABA feeding experiments, however, was as expected: the ABA concentrations went up, and the stomata closed. But after a day, the ABA levels in the tested leaf dropped and the stomata opened again, in spite of the constant supply of ABA to the plant. So, the experiment created more problems than it solved (as is also common in science!), For instance, where was the lost ABA going? Presumably it was being broken down somewhere in the plant. The facts as they now stand are: 1) a drought signal is produced by the root; 2) in all plants tested, the roots produce ABA when droughted; 3) the ABA concentra- tions in sap rise in droughted plants; and 4) stomata close before the leaves loose their turgor. The question still remaining is whether there is enough ABA to account for the closure of stomata. The next step is to measure precisely the amount of ABA in the cells controlling stomatal aperture. Until then, scientists are caught in an unstable but exciting transition period between dogmas. The classical view of stomata shutting down only when ‘the sink is empty’ is at best an oversimplification, and plant physiologists are intrigued by the prospect of a chemical response to early drought stress. They eagerly await verification of their new dogma. Victorian Nat. Contributions Field Naturalists in Victoria’s Alps *Linden Gillbank Hikers and skiers, botanists and his- torians will all readily recognize the names of several FNCV members who have ex- plored Victoria’s alps. Three well-known early members, Mueller, Howitt and Stir- ling, carried out most of their alpine investigations before the birth of the FNCYV. In the 1850s and 1860s Victoria’s first Government Botanist, Ferdinand Mueller, included the alps in most of his Victorian botanical expeditions. In the 1860s and 1870s Alfred Howitt, a police magistrate in Omeo and later Bairnsdale, explored the local landscape, especially its botany and geology. Howitt later became Victoria’s Secretary for Mines and Water Supply. In the 1880s, while District Sur- veyor at Omeo, James Stirling further studied the flora and geology of Victoria’s alps. Stirling subsequently became Vic- toria’s Government Geologist. The names of all three eminent public servants endure in the flora and physiography of the region. Other members of the FNCV have also been instrumental in shaping our under- standing of the flora of Victoria’s alps - members such as Henry Tisdall, Charles Walter, Gustav Weindorfer, Francis Bar- nard, Charles Sutton, Alfred Ewart, James Audas, Herbert Williamson, Percival St John, and James Willis. The Historic Places Section of Victoria’s Department of Conservation and Environ- ment has orchestrated a project on the heritage of Victoria’s alps. As the author of the biological part of that project I have been investigating the history of botanical exploration of the region. After following the botanical footsteps of Mueller, Howitt and Stirling, I turned to articles in The Victorian Naturalist to follow other members of the FNCV as they further elaborated our knowledge of the region’s *Department of Economie History, University of Melbourne, Parkville 3052. Vol. 107 No. 5/6 (1990) flora. For readers interested in the botani- cal history of Victoria’s alps, this paper includes some glimpses of the mountain excursions of the above FNCV members. A modified version of this paper will accompany a description of the contribu- tions of Mueller, Howitt and Stirling in the first part of the biological section of the project’s forthcoming book on the heritage of Victoria’s alps. From its establishment in 1880 until well into the 20th century, the Field Naturalists Club of Victoria (FNCV) nurtured the cognoscenti of Victoria’s indigenous flora. Via the FNCV’s meetings and journal, descriptions of the flora were recorded and corrected. The flora of Victoria’s high country attracted much interest. Members arranged private trips to various parts of Victoria’s alps and reported back to the Club on their inevitably enjoyable and sometimes exciting adventures and experi- ences. These reports inspired further expeditions and prompted the FNCV to arrange Club excursions in the region - but not until long after James Stirling (1887) had expressed surprise that the rich floral treasures of Mt Hotham had not by 1887 attracted a Club excursion. Myth as well as fact added to the FNCY’s interest in the region. In Decem- ber 1854 Mueller climbed and named two peaks which he considered to be the highest in Victoria - Mt Hotham and Mt Latrobe. However, much to his chagrin, his names were not used. Various people have attempted to determine which two peaks he did ascend in 1854 and why his compass bearings taken from those peaks do not tally with those of other alpine visitors (Barnard 1904; Wakefield 1950). However, the myth of Mueller’s 1854 ascent of Mt Hotham persisted well into the twentieth century, and was often mentioned in reports of FNCY alpine excursions. 165 Contributions Henry Tisdall One very early member of the FNCV was Henry Thomas Tisdall. He was a scientifically untrained, but observant, sub-alpine resident who was intensely interested in the organisms inhabiting his local environment, For eighteen years from 1868 Henry Tisdall was head teacher of Walhalla’s first school, Stringer’s Creek State School No. 957, near the Long Tun- nell battery. At the third FNCV conver- sazione in April 1883, Tisdall exhibited a series of water-colour drawings of the wild flowers of his district, the result of several years’ work, and the following September contributed his first paper entitled “A Botanical Excursion in North Gippsland”. In Herman’s Report on the Walhalla Gold- Field, Tisdall also contributed an appendix listing the plants in the vicinity. (Paull 1963; Tisdall 1961). On Mueller’s suggestion, Tisdall turned his botanical attention to the little-studied fungi. He collected, illustrated, and dis- cussed the local fungi, including “Native Bread” which was then called Mylitta australis. In the absence of a closer authority some fungi were sent to Dr M. C. Cooke of London. He also sent local mosses, lichens and fungi to Mueller. Even after his transfer from Walhalla in 1886, Tisdall continued to report to the FNCV on the natural history of the district around Walhalla. (Anon 1905; Tisdall 1884-1904), Charles Walter Carl (Charles) Walter was another early member of the FNCV. He had arrived from Germany in the 1850s. One of many amateur botanists encouraged by Mueller to collect plants for Melbourne’s Her- barium, Walter added many new species to Victorian records (Anon 1907). After his collecting trip to the Victorian alps in January 1899, Charles Walter was asked by the FNCV Committee to exhibit the findings of his trip. At the FNCV conversazione in May, Walter exhibited 166 about 100 herbarium specimens. So inter- ested were Club members in these plants, that Walter was asked to prepare some notes on his excursion “for the benefit of members who may desire to visit the district and see the great beauty and profusion of our Alpine flora’. In response he prepared a paper which was presented to the Club by his friend and collecting companion Charles French junior, the Assistant Government Entomologist (Walter 1899). With the widespread publicity to attract tourists to the region in the 1880s and 1890s, it is not surprising that by 1899 Walter had already visited Victoria’s alps twice. Taking advantage of the cheap excursion fares to Myrtleford, then the end of the railway line, Walter celebrated the cenienary of Australia with his first trip to Victoria’s alps on Australia Day 1887. He was rewarded with his first and immen- sely impressive view of grevillea victoriae in full flower, and the subsequent purchase of his numerous botanical specimens by Baron von Mueller, who had long ago discovered and named that majestic gre- villea. Walter included specimens of a tall, conspicuous but un-named shrub from beside the track up from Harrietville. Three years later, accompanied by James Stirling, the Baron saw those shrubs and named them Helichrysum stirlingii (Mueller 1890). In November 1891, while in charge of the Economic Botanical Section of Mel- bourne’s Industrial and Technological Museum, Walter again visited the area to collect for the museum. Walter’s 1899 week-long trip to Mts Hotham and Buffalo was provoked by his desire to rectify the dearth of alpine plants in his own herbarium. He spent three nights at the St Bernard Hospice, from whence he collected extensively along the track between Mt St Bernard and Mt Hotham. One morning he walked to the Twins Mountains, then down to the Woods Point Track. In the afternoon he visited Mt Smythe, then followed the Dargo River Victorian Nat. Contributions down from its source, returning to the hospice via the Grant and Crooked River road. On his return to the Ovens Valley, Walter spent a night at Manfield’s Buffalo Falls Temperance Hotel, four miles from Porepunkah along the road to the Eurobin Falls. The next day he was accompanied by one of the Manfield sons on a day’s collecting on the Buffalo Mountains. Included among the numerous plants he noted were the species of Kunzea and Ranunculus which Bentham had named after Mueller. Walter had already donated a collection of his Hotham plants to the St Bernard Hospice, and so, before catch- ing the train back to Melbourne, he left aset of pressed plants collected on Buffalo with the Manfields for the information of future visitors (Walter 1899). As Walter’s trip had shown, by the turn of the century parts of Victoria’s alps could be reached reasonably conveniently. Where Mueller and Howitt had plotted and slashed their own routes, there were sometimes tracks or even roads. A railway reached the foot of the alps — Myrtleford, by the 1880s, Bright by the 1890s. In summer horse-drawn coaches conveyed tourists from Bright across the mountains through Omeo to Bairnsdale. The 1910 opening of the narrow-guage railway line from Moe to Walhalla dramatically in- creased the accessibility of the Baw Baw plateau to visitors. Thus in the early twentieth century Mt Buffalo, Mt Hotham and environs, and the Baw Baw plateau were the main foci for FNCV excursions. A four-day collecting trip from Bright, which included Mt Hotham and Mt Buf- falo, was then possible. Gustay Weindorfer With a particular interest in alpine plants, Gustav Weindorfer joined the FNCYV within a year of his arrival in 1900 from Austria. While working at the Aus- tro-Hungarian Consulate in Melbourne he was an enthusiastic Club member (Sutton 1932; Bergman 1959). Vol. 107 No. 5/6 (1990) Weindorfer had visited Mt Buffalo in the winter of 1902 and was keen to see more of Victoria’s high country. Inspired by Charles Walter’s trip, two other Club members, Francis Barnard and Dr Charles Sutton, were delighted to join Gustav Weindorfer on an alpine holiday over Christmas 1902. Their trip was a slightly streamlined version of Walter’s 1899 trip. After a sixteen mile drive from Bright railway terminus to Harrietville and a twelve mile walk they reached the St Bernard Hospice. The last mile of the road was both steep and rough, but we thoroughly enjoyed our walk, which had taken us just six hours, the invigorating nature of the mountain air making the task an easy one. After tea, arranging the specimens in blotting paper and tracing out the unfamiliar ones by the aid of the “Key” (Muel- ler’s Key to the System of Victorian Plants) occupied the greater part of the evening, . . . (Barnard and Sut- ton 1903). In the belief that Mueller had been ‘the first white man to tread its (Mt Hotham’s) grassy top and gather specimens of its singular alpine flora’ they spent the day gathering specimens along the five mile track along the main ridge across Mt Blowhard to Mt Hotham, locally known as ‘Baldy’, the name given it by the Cobungra stockman James Brown. There they were confronted by a large flock of sheep feeding on its grassy slopes. As a corollary to Mueller’s claim that Victoria’s alpine flora was in part an extension of the lowland flora, they noted that the ‘different forms some plants assume in these high regions are very confusing to the collector on his first visit’? (Barnard and Sutton 1903). Of the plants recorded that day, over half had been named by Mueller. After a night at Manfield’s Temperence Hotel near Porepunkah they set off up 167 Contributions ‘Staker’s Track’ to lunch by the gorge, In the afternoon they botanized on the Buf- falo plateau. They were delighted to record for only the second time in Victoria the remarkable Prostanthera walteri. Mueller had named it after Charles Walter who had discovered it decades earlier on Mt Ellery, East Gippsland. That evening Weindorfer, Barnard and Sutton were back in Pore- punkah in order to catch the 5 a.m. train. Back in Melbourne, they were pleased to find that part of the Buffalo plateau had recently been reserved as a National Park. Barnard and Sutton (1903) ended their Victorian Naturalist report with the recommendation that an extended FNCV excursion should be arranged for the region. A year later the FNCV’ s first official excursion to Mt Buffalo was arranged. Gustav Weindorfer and George Coghill organized a Christmas Camp-out from Thursday 24 December 1903 to Monday 4 January 1904. Two dozen members participated. To the surprise of the railway staff checking the compartment reserved for field naturalists, half of the party were found to be women. In the days when women were excluded from Melbourne walking clubs they were apparently not expected to be field naturalists. The party was met at the Porepunkah railway station by their guide, Mr James Manfield junior, and conveyed by an imposing array of traps to Mr Manfield’s home ‘Ernai’ at the foot of the mountain, On the Buffalo plateau the next day: The camp was within fifty feet of the edge of the Gorge, and consisted of a slab hut, in which seven ladies slept, a canvas tent-house for eight men, a dining tent, two of Mr. Mattingley’s bell tents, and two small tents - a really imposing settlement, excellent in fine weather, but somewhat leaky, excepting the bell tents, in wet weather. The beds were of wire netting and logs (Coghill et a/. 1904), 168 The party included people with suf- ficiently diverse interests to allow the recording of various aspects of the natural history of the plateau, from beetles to birds. The flora was described by Gustav Weindorfer, with Miss Kate Cowle (the future Mrs Weindorfer) helping with the mosses, liverworts and lichens. Beetles were collected and described by George Coghill and James Kershaw from Mel- bourne’s National Museum, Over 20 of the 91 species of beetles collected were new to the Museum collection. Concluded Weindorfer in his contribution to the Victorian Naturalist report: May this excursion serve as an inducement for others of our mem- bers to collect and study our highly interesting alpine flora, of which each visitor to the Alps cannot fail to say that here richness of colour and beauty of form exist such as only Nature herself has the power to think out and create. During the camp-out, Weindorfer and Sutton made a flying visit via the Kiewa Valley to Mt Bogong. The weather was not welcoming. Only a day was spent reaching the foggy summit, botanizing and re- turning to Duane’s cattle station in the Kiewa Valley, then the nearest dwelling to Mt Bogong. They left with few specimens and no views. In 1904, accompanied by Dr Charles Sutton and Herbert Williamson, Weindorfer visited another part of Victoria’s alps — the Baw Baw Ranges (Sutton 1905). As well as providing convivial means to botanically explore Victoria’s alps, the FNCY also provided a forum to discuss and develop ideas provoked by those excursions. As Mueller had done, Wein- dorfer (1903a) considered the relationships and origins of the flora. In so doing he was asking evolutionary and ecological ques- tions. With his knowledge of the flora of the eastern alps of Europe, Weindorfer asked whether adaptations of that flora were also present in Australia’s alpine Victorian Nat. Contributions flora. He tried to explain the presence of characteristics such as thick or hairy leaves and low compact habit, and the absence of perfumed or red or violet flowers in terms of the conditions prevailing in the Australian alps — the length of growing season, the dearth of alpine insects, and the absence of large herbivores. Wein- dorfer (1904a) also attempted to explain the occurrence of Australian species or their close relatives in the alps of South America and New Zealand. Weindorfer’s enthusiasm for Victoria's alpine flora reached the wider public via articles on his trips in two Melbourne Weeklies, The Leader and The Australasian. During his few years’ residence in Melbourne before leaving for Tasmania in Noyember 1905, Weindorfer had botanically explored all the reasonably accessible parts of Victoria’s alps - Mt Hotham, the Buffalo and Baw Baw plateaux, and even Mt Bogong - and had discussed, asked questions about, and widely publicized the flora of Victoria’s alps. Alfred Ewart and James Audas In 1906 Dr Alfred James Ewart FLS became Victoria’s third Government Bot- anist, the University of Melbourne’s first Professor of botany and a member of the FNCV. That year his assistant, James Wales Audas, also joined the FNCV. Despite the collections and observations of Mueller and subsequent collectors, Ewart soon recognised the need to elabor- ate the botanical records of the alps. Accompanied by Audas, Ewart set off in the winter of 1910 from the Ovens valley to follow in the footsteps of a succession of FNCV members to Mt Hotham and environs. Winter seems a strange time to survey the high mountain flora. Mobilized by a bicycle, Audas collected plant speci- mens over a wide area, Over 200 species of plants, both indigenous and introduced, were recorded during the trip. Over 20 had not previously been recorded for the region. As previous botanists had noted, Vol. 107 No. 5/6 (1990) of particular interest were alpine plants of restricted range and the dwarf or prostrate forms of lowland plants (Ewart and Audas 1910). Following his alpine visit, Ewart con- solidated the species list prepared by Audas and previous visitors — Stirling, Walter, Maiden, Barnard, Sutton and Weindorfer — as well as the records of Mueller in Bentham’s Flora Australiensis, into a single species list for Victoria’s alps. This 1910 National Herbarium list included 325 indigenous species, or nearly one-sixth of the then-known Victorian flora. Ewart (1910) considered that ‘it is hardly likely that the district contains any species new to science — at least as regards flowering plants — but close investigation may show the existence of alpine varieties of lowland species not previously noted’. Mueller’s imprint on the flora was still clear. Nearly 20% had been collected from the region by him, while almost as many had been named by him, not necessarily from the region. However, there were still parts of the alps that had either never been explored botanically, or had not been so explored since Mueller’s visits in the mid-1850s. Alfred Tadgell Alfred James Tadgell worked as accoun- tant to the Estate of the Clarke family, which included various pastoral proper- ties. Not surprisingly Tadgell’s initial botanical interest was in pastures (Morris 1949). In the 1920s he was an enthusiastic FNCV member and an ardent botanical observer of vast areas of Victoria’s alps. Tadgell followed Ewart’s advice and compared his own records with the 1910 National Herbarium list. In the early 1920s Tadgell, often accompanied by the Club's treasurer, Mr Hooke, made half a dozen collecting trips along the 40 mile horseshoe from Harrietville to Mts St Bernard, Hotham, Feathertop, and back to Harrietville, and presented his findings to the Club. Two species of Prasophyllum 169 Contributions were mentioned. Dr Rogers had named P suttonii following Dr Sutton’s discovery of it on Mt Buffalo, Tadgell (1922) noted a reddish flowered form of P suttonii and an apparently new form of P. frenchii which Rogers named P frenchii, var. tadgellianum. Tadgell’s visits yielded nearly 100 native and 17 alien species that had not been included in the 1910 list. Thus, in only a few years, Tadgell surprised Ewart with a 30% extension of his species list for Victoria’s alps. The grand total was now 418 indigenous species and 28 aliens, Tadgell also explored around Mt Bo- gong. After two trips there in the early 1920s, he compared his botanical findings with those of earlier collectors — Stirling, Sutton and Weindorfer. This highlighted the serendipitous nature of plant collecting from the same area even at the same time of year. Of the 221 native species recorded by Tadgell (1924) for Mt Bogong, about two thirds had remained unrecorded by his botanical predecessors. Between 1920 and 1930, Tadgell made about a dozen botan- ical forays right across the mountains between Mt St Bernard and Mt Bogong, and added substantially to the knowledge of Victoria’s alpine flora and to the Census of Victorian Plants. Tadgell Point near Mt Bogong commemorates his interest in the area, Herbert Williamson The school teacher Herbert Bennett Williamson had joined the FNCV in 1900. By the 1920s he had acquired an FLS (Fellow of the Linnean Society) and an enormous and expanding herbarium (Daley 1931). Barly in 1922, with Chas. Daley, Wil- liamson explored the high country round Omeo and Benambra, including ‘The Brothers’ and the Cobberas. By Spring Creek, Cobungra, he sought and found the aptly named Eucalputus neglecta - evidently the first specimens brought to Melbourne since Howitt sent some in 1882 (Daley and Williamson 1922). 170 On New Year’s day 1923 Williamson, accompanied by another teacher, Mr S. F. Clinton, rode from Glen Willis up onto the Bogong High Plains to share a botanical holiday. One of many plants Williamson (1923) noted was: The luxuriant form of Celmisia longifolia, var. latifolia, with large, daisy-like flowers and broad silky- woolly leaves. In December 1928, following one of Senator R. D. Elliot’s philanthropic grants to the FNCV, Williamson was in the Cobunera district in the company of two locals, the brothers Tom and Henry Mor- gan, in search of fresh specimens of an orchid which Henry had discovered a year before. Following their success Pescott and Nicholls named the Golden Caladenia Caladenia hildae after the senator’s wife. Williamson (1929) revealed several sur- prises including a new species of the anchor plant, Discaria, and a daisy, Brachycome alpina, previously recorded only from Pretty Valley on the Bogong High Plains, where Williamson had dis- covered it in January 1923. Discaria nitida was not formally named until 1977. Percival St John Another philanthropist, Russell Grim- wade, was a long-standing member of the FNCV. In the 1930s he commissioned a FNCV member to work on the flora of Mt Buffalo. Percival Reginald Harry St John, a plant taxonomist at Melbourne's Botanic Gardens, was to collect, identify, mount and label specimens of the flora of the Mt Buffalo National Park. Grimwade then donated the collection of 125 specimens to the Victorian Railways Commissioners for their Chalet. That herbarium is still available for perusal by guests at the Mt Buffalo Chalet. FNCV Excursions The momentum of botanical interest in Victoria’s high country continued through Victorian Nat. Contributions the twentieth century. Thanks partly to the railways, by 1919 the FNCV had held two excursions in the Baw Baws, and by 1940 four on the Buffalo plateau. By the 1950s, Lake Mountain and Mts Buller and Bo- gong had also been officially visited by the Club. Thanks to the FNCV and its journal The Victorian Naturalist, information about the flora and fauna of Victoria’s high country was progressively updated. As Willis (1949) wrote long ago about the FNCV: This body of amateurs has always been a champion of systematic botany, and it is hard to imagine what would have become of the science in Victoria had the FNCV journal, The Victorian Naturalist, not been available as a medium of expression and interchange of information. James Willis One very active FNCV member and pro- fessional botanist who has botanized throughout Victoria’s alps is the now retired Assistant Government Botanist, Dr James Hamlyn Willis. Jim Willis con- tinued the plant exploration of Victoria’s alps, begun almost a century earlier by his famous predecessor, Ferdinand Mueller. For 34 years, from 1937 to 1972, Jim Willis worked from Melbourne’s Botanic Gardens and National Herbarium. For most of his first decade as an assistant at the Herbarium there was no official field work. However, his vacations could pro- vide field botany mixed with pleasure. During a fortnight’s holiday in 1938 with his friend, Raleigh Black, Willis was introduced to the vegetation of Mts Buf- falo and Hotham and the Cobungra dis- trict. This whetted his botanical appetite for the region. In 1943 he visited Lake Mountain, Mt Federation, and Mt Tor- breck, and doubled P. F. Morris’ (1929) Lake Mountain species tally (Willis 1948). Inspired by an earlier trip across the little-known Barry Mountains by W. H. Vol. 107 No. 5/6 (1990) Nicholls, Jim Willis (1945a) was pleased to join Professor T. M. Cherry and a group of Rover Scouts on another botanical vacation - a 1944 Christmas trip across the botanically unexplored rugged terrain of the Divide between Mts St Bernard and Speculation, and then on to Mts Bernard and Speculation, and then on to Mts Cobbler, Stirling, and Buller, Evidence of cattle abounded, from the well defined cattle pads and the associated weeds to dreary burnt-out hills where gaunt stands of dead trees bore mute testimony to their sacrifice to the cattlemen’s goddess of new grass growth, An undescribed variety of daisy was collected and named Helichry- sum adenophorum, var, waddellae. Willis (1945b) had: pleasure in naming it after Miss Winifred Waddell — a keen advocate for the conservation and cultivation of our native flora, and a lover of the high mountain plants in par- ticular. Miss Waddell was first to observe the slender, pearly-pink everlastings on Mt Speculation. The Baw-Baw Berry, Wittsteinia vac- ciniacea, which, since Mueller’s discovery of it a century earlier, was known only from the Lake Mountain-Baw Baw area, and more excitingly a tiny green lily, Chlorophytum alpinum, previously known only from Tasmanian mountains, were important discoveries on the Cobbler plateau (Willis 1945c). Willis’ check-list of 265 native plants and 58 aliens was made available for consultation in the National Herbarium. A year later, Jim Willis’ first official field trip was to Victoria’s alps. At the request of Professor John Turner, in January 1946 he joined the University of Melbourne’s first summer botanical excur- sion to the Bogong High Plains where ecological investigations on the effects of cattle were being initiated. This led to several further summer excursions with the 171 Contributions University group and a continued taxo- nomic association with the project. The importance of field work for Herbarium taxonomists could no longer escape recognition, Jim Willis travelled widely over Vic- toria’s alps, collecting and naming plants, and compiling regional species lists. Fol- lowing his botanical survey of the Buffalo Plateau in 1963, his check-list included 300 indigenous species and 46 introduced species in the National Park (Rowe 1970), Perhaps Willis’ most important alpine botanical offspring is the magnificent Silky Daisy, whose natural home is ap- parently limited to parts of the Bogong High Plains. With soft silvery-grey foliage and marguerite-like heads, it is one of the most attractive botanical features of the area where, cattle permitting, it flowers abundantly during summer along rocky stream banks. Three decades after it had been noted by Williamson (1923) as a variety of Celmisia longifolia, Willis (1954) officially named it Ce/misia sericophylla. Mueller’s never reaching the area, the plant's palatability to cattle, and its resemblance to sister species, allowed Celmisia sericophylla to escape scientific recognition for a whole century. Collections The biological heritage of Victoria’s alps is represented not only by the species surviving in the wild, but also by their records which exist in the form of collec- tions and publications. A substantial collection of plant specimens from Vic- toria’s alps is housed in Melbourne's National Herbarium. It currently contains specimens collected by many FNCV mem- bers — Mueller, Stirling, Howitt (mainly eucalypts), Tisdall (mainly fungi and algae), Walter, Tadgell, Williamson, St John and Willis, with a few by Barnard, Sutton and Weindorfer. More recent con- tributors include Cliff Beauglehole, Neville Walsh and David Albrecht. As is obvious from this article The Victorian Naturalist is a rich repository 172 for papers on the flora of Victoria’s alps, Thanks to the numerous reports of FNCV members, their articles in The Victorian Naturalist constitute an important part of” the biological heritage of the region. References and Further reading Anon (1905), The Late Mr. H. T. Tisdall. Victorian Naturalist, 22: 56-58. Anon (1907). The late Mr. Chas. Walter. Victorian Naturalist, 24: 110. Audas, J. W. (1912). Botanical Gleanings on a Trip to the Omeo District. 172-181]. Barnard, F. G. A, (1904), Some Early Botanical Explorations in Victoria. Victorian Naturalist, 21: 17-28. Barnard [. G, A, (1914). Excursion to Baw Baw. Victorian Naturalist, 30; 198-210, 220-221. Barnard, F, G. A, and Sutton, C. 8. (1903). Among the Alpine Flowers. Victorian Naturalist, 20: 4-12. Bergman, G. F, J, (1959). Gustav Weindorter of Cradle Mountain. (Mercury Press: Hobart). Coghill, G, ef a/(1904), The Buffalo Mountains Camp- out. Victorian Naturalist, 20; 144-159. Daley, C. (1931). H. B. Williamson - An appreciation, Victorian Naturalist, 47: 172-175, Daley, C. and Williamson, H. B. (1922). Where the Murray Rises. Victorian Naturalist, 39: 4-12, 17-24. Ewart, A, J. and Audas, J. W. (1910), The Flora of the Victorian Alps. Vietorian Naturalist, 27: 104-120, Garnet, J. R. (1949a). Lake Mountain Revisited. Victorian Naturalist, 66: 152-159. Morris, P. F. (1929), Ecology of Marysville and Lake Mountain, Victorian Naturalist, 46: 34-42. Morris, P. F, (1949), The Late Alfred James Tadgell. Victorian Naturalist, 66: 135. Mueller, F. von, (1890), Record of Two New Victorian Highland Composites. Victorian Naturalist, 6: 166-168. Paull, R. (1963), ‘Old Walhalla, Portrait of a Gold Town’, (MUP: Melbourne). Rowe, R. K. (1970). ‘A Study of the Land in the Mount Buffalo National Park’. (Soil Conservation Authority: Melbourne). Stewart, H. C, BE, (1940). Plants of Mt. Buffalo. Victorian Naturalist, 56: 179-183. Stirling, J. (1887). Notes on the Flora of Mount Hotham, Victorian Naturalist, 4: 72-78. Sutton, C. S. (1905), A Botanical Trip to Mount Erica, Baw Baw. Victorian Naturalist, 22: 58-61. Sutton, C. S. (1907). A Botanist at Mount Buller. Victorian Naturalist, 23: 175-180. Sutton, C. S. (1932). Gustav Weindorfer, Victorian Naturalist, 59: 34-38. Sutton, C. S. (1953), Mount Buller’s Botanical Century, Victorian Naturalist, 69: 156-158. Victorian Nat. Victorian Naturalist, 28: ° Contributions Tadgell, A, J. (1922). A Contribution to “The Flora of the Victorian Alps”. Victorian Naturalist, 38: 105-118. Tadgell, A. J. (1924). Mount Bogong and its Flora. Victorian Naturalist, 41: 56-80, 96, 99. Tadgell, A. J. (1926). Mount Fainter and Beyond. Victorian Naturalist, 43: 32-47. Tadgell, A. J. (1930). Mount Nelson and its Surroundings. Victorian Naturalist, 46: 227-235. Tadgell, A. J. (1936). A Rare Puffball Fungus from the Alps. Victorian Naturalist, 52: 178. Tadgell A. J. (1939). St Bernard Hospice. Victorian Naturalist, 55: 183-185. Tisdall, C, (1961). ‘Forerunners, The Saga of a Family of Teachers’, (Cheshire: Melbourne). Tisdall, H. T. (1884). Fungi of the Country East of Mount Baw Baw. Victorian Naturalist, 1: 169-172, Tisdall, H. T. (1886). Fungi of North Gippsland. Victorian Naturalist, 2: 106, Tisdall, H. T. (1889). A Winter Journey in the Mountains, Victorian Naturalist, 6: 139-145, Tisdall, H. T. (1895). Walhalla as a Collecting Ground. Victorian Naturalist, 11: 147-151. Tisdall, H. T. (1896). Under Eastern Baw Baw: A Botanical Trip in the Gippsland Mountains. Victorian Naturalist, 13: 93-97, Tisdall, H. T. (1904). Notes on the “Native Bread”, Polyporus mylittae. Victorian Naturalist, 21: 56, Wakefield, N. A. (1950), Baron Von Mueller’s Victorian Alps, Victorian Naturalist, 66: 169-176. Walter, C. A. (1899). Trip to the Victorian Alps. Victorian Naturalist, 16: 81-87. Weindorfer, G. (1903a). Some Comparison of the Alpine Flora of Australia and Europe. Victorian Naturalist, 20: 64-70. Weindorfer, G. (1903b). Australian Alpine Flora, The Leader no 2489, 19 September. Weindorfer, G. (1904a). Some Consideration of the Origin of our Alpine Flora. Victorian Naturalist, 21: 6-9. Weindorfer, G. (1904b). A Botanical Trip. Members of the Field Naturalists’ Club in the Buffalo Mts. The Australasian, no 1978, 27 February. Weindorfer, G. (1904¢). Australian Plants, a Botanical ‘Tour. The Leader, no 2512, 27 February & no 2513, 5 March. Weindorfer, G, (1904d). Alpine Plants. A Rich Field for Australian Botanists. The Leader, no 2519, 16 April. Williamson, H. B. (1923). A Trip to the Bogong High Plains. Victorian Naturalist, 40: 88-93. Williamson, H. B. (1929), Plant Hunting in the Cobungra District. Victorian Naturalist, 45: 271-276. Willis, J. H. (1945a). Among Alpine Flowers of the Barry Mountains. Victorian Naturalist, 62: 111-118, 132-140, Willis J. H. (1945b). A New Alpine Variety of the “Mallee Everlasting” (Helichrysum adenophorum), Victorian Naturalist, 61: 217. Willis, J. H. (1945c). Chlorophytum — A Genus of Lilies New to Victoria (and New South Wales). Victorian Naturalist, 61: 187. Willis, J. H. (1948). Vascular Flora of the Lake Mountain Alps. Victorian Naturalist, 64: 14-17. Willis, J. H. (1949). Botanical Pioneers in Victoria II. Victorian Naturalist, 66: 123-127. Willis, J. H. (1954). Two New Victorian Species of Alpine Compositae, Victorian Naturalist, 70: 223-226, Where? J. A. D. Blackburn* The collector, describing in fine detail _ some new specimen, may not give the same | attention to the description of the place from which it was obtained. In isolation | aspecimen is of limited value. Immediately | the question arises as to what are its | associations. Essential to this is a precise | locality description. The basic requirement is that it should | be adequate to enable the area to be | revisited and further investigation carried | out if necessary. In many cases inform- | ation from another discipline should be } consulted and correlated and this will be '* 4 McHale Court, Essendon, 3040 ‘Vol. 107 No. 5/6 (1990) difficult unless the localities in both reports are adequately described. Place names that are meaningful to the author of the work may be a source of difficulty for the user, particularly if he is interstate or overseas. Names are fre- quently changed and, in mining areas particularly, can go out of use and are left off the maps. Others are local and unof- ficial and have never been included. An example of the problem is Charlotte Waters in Central Australia which held equal status with Alice Springs as the most important place in that area and figures prominently in scientific and other reports. The original Alice Springs was the old 173 Naturalist Notes telegraph station and is some distance away from the present town bearing the same name, On a 1968 map Charlotte Waters at 25,5545, 134,568, is marked as abandoned and it does not appear at all on the 1977 edition, However, on page 266 of “Flora of Australia” Vol, 4. “Charlotte Jaters” is piven as the type locality for Seerolaena longicuspis, In all scientific publications, but per haps only in the index, every place name should be identified by the latitude and longitude in the same way that the post- code is an essential part of a mailing address. The geographical coordinates are often the only common reference points innmaps of different origins. These, quoted to the nearest minute of arc, (eg. Ayers Rock, 25.21'S. 131.02’E.) will place you within one kilometre of the location any- where in the world, It then can be plotted in its correct position on whatever map is at hand. The name itself loses much of its meaning unless it can be found on a map which is readily available. More often than not with scientific locations this would not be so. For closer work the method to be used will depend on circumstances but will probably involve a dimensioned sketch with measurements from property corners or other permanent features. If the dimensions can be plotted on a plan they should enable the place to be found, Intertidal Echidna activity Hugh Phillipps* On Monday IH June 1990 1 was with other members of the Victorian Wader Study Group at Barry Beach on Corner Inlet in South Gippsland, A Short-beaked Echidna, Zéchyelossus aculeatus, was seen on the beach below, and several metres away from, high tide level, The time was about 1300, a couple of hours before high tide, The Echidna, whose tracks could been seen meandering over the beach, appeared to be foraging. The only organic matter visible in the immediate area was in the tide-wrack, mainly decomposing sea 2rass, Some, possibly misplaced, concern was felt that the rising tide might endanger the Echidna, as the nearest high ground was a narrow and exposed strip of shingle that would be almost entirely surrounded by water, The animal was therefore taken, With some difficulty, a hundred metres or so back to the low dune vegetation behind the beach, There was no indication that it Was sick or injured in any way; indeed, iL appeared to be fighting fit, “Hl Marlton Crescent, St Kilda 4182 174 It seemed unusual to see an Echidna in such a place, although tracks seen at different times and other areas of the beach indicate that it might be part of its regular foraging range. A brief search of the main reference material on Echidnas found no mention of the intertidal zone as Echidna habitat, although there is an intriguing description (Newman 1990) of an animal walking through a group of oystercatchers on an intertidal mudflat to the cdge of the water. Echidnas are believed to feed almost entirely on ants and termites, although other food items such as beetle larvae have occasionally been reported. The only plausible food on the beach would have been small anthropods in the decomposing tide-wrack, Echidnas are known, however, to utilise a wide range of habitats, and the intertidal part of a beach may only be another addition to the long list of places this versatile creature may be found, References Newman, O.M.G, (1990), Unusual Behaviour of Pied Oystereatchers in South-east Tasmania, 7as, Bird Report 19: 25.28, Victorian Nat. Reports Mount Buffalo excursion, 4-9th January 1990 Ruth Parkin After a train trip from Melbourne and lunch under a large Red Gum (Eucalyptus camaldulensis) in Merriwa Park in Wan- garatta, we took a bus up to Mount Buffalo via Beechworth and Bright, watch- ing the landscape change from plains to foothills to mountains. The Buffalo Range was first seen by Hume and Hovell in 1824, and then by Major Mitchell in 1835. Mount Buffalo became a National Park in 1898, and the road to the plateau was opened 10 years later. We stayed at the 80-year old Chalet (elevation 1337 m), which is surrounded by large Rhododen- dron bushes, with other garden plants edging the croquet lawns, and has at its entrance a beautiful, gnarled yet stately Mountain Gum (£. dalrympleana). The next morning our group walked from the Tatra Inn area across the snow plain to Dickson’s Falls, named after W. Dickson, Secretary for Mines in the early 1900’s. The track wandered through a pretty alpine meadow dotted with Snow Gums (£. pauciflora, once called E. niphophila, snow-lover), and we watched a Scarlet Robin (Petroica multicolor) flitting from branch to branch. In between rain-showers we saw many alpine plants: Alpine Podolepis (Podolepis robusta), Mauve Brachycombe Daisy, Scapigera aculata), Yam Daisy (Microseris scapigera), Common Billy Buttons (Cras- pedia glauca), Hoary Sunray (Helipterum albicane var. buffaloensis), Clustered Everlastings (Helichrysum semi-pap- posum), and Candle Heath (Richea con- tinentis) with its cream flowerheads and spiky leaves in the sphagnum bog. We could hear the mournful cry of currawongs across the plain. Nearby were Purple Eyebright (Euphrasia collina), Guinea Flower (Hibbertia serpyllifolia), Alpine Celery (Aciphylla glacialis), Grass Trigger Plant (Stylidium graminifolium), Vol. 107 No. 5/6 (1990) Derwent Speedwell ( Veronica derwentia), Sky Lily (Herpolerion novae-zealandie), and our first sightings of the beautiful, green-flowering Monkey Mintbush (Pros- tanthera walteri), which is restricted to only a few mountain areas, and the tiny blue Creeping Fan Flower (Scaevola hookeri). The track crossed a stream and con- tinued through Rosy Heath-myrtle (Baec- kea ramosissima), Alpine Heath-myrtle (B. gunniana), Tall Rice-flower (Pimelia ligustrina) and Slender Rice-flower (P linifolia) before the descent to Dickson’s falls. We needed to scramble over granite boulders for a view of the falls and the valley below. During the afternoon some members explored the track to Underground River, passing Billson’s Lookout with its splendid view of the Buckland Valley. The path meanders down the hill through a fine stand of Alpine Ash (Woollybutt, Auca- lyptus delagatensis), and we saw an assortment of flowers amongst the trees: the dainty Cinnamon Bells (Gastrodia sesamoides), Fringe Lily (Thysanotus tuberosus), Tree Lomatia (Lomatia fras- eri), Pink Heath Bells ( 7etratheca baueri- folia), Ovens Everlasting (Helichrysum stirlingii), and the minute and difficult-to- see Elbow Orchid Arthrochilus huntianus with its tiny elbow-shape. The track descends steeply through fern gullies down to the Underground River. We returned to the carpark by the lookouts at dusk, and spotted Crimson Rosellas (Platycercus elegans), Pied Cur- rawongs (Strephera graculina), Grey Currawongs (S. versicolor) and Little Ravens (Corvus mellori). Early risers the next day saw and heard the Superb Lyre- bird (Menura superba). Descending the horse-trail to Lake Catani many more wildflowers were obser- 175 Reports ved. One of the most attractive was the Orange Mountain Shaggy Pea (Oxvlobium alpestre), named for its hairy pod. Along the track we saw Orange Everlasting (Helichrysum acuminatum), Scented Sun Orchid (Thelymitra megacalyptra), Neck- lace Fern (Asplenium flabellifolium), Rough Coprosma (Coprosma hirtella), Tasmanian Blue Flax-lily (Dianella tas- manica), and many Pale Vanilla Lilies (Arthropodium milleflorum). Hickory Wattle (Acacia obliquinerva), with its large, curved, bluish-tinted leaves, was growing prolifically, and there were large specimens of Mountain Tea-tree (Lepto- spermum grandifolium). We also saw the purple-flowering Round-leaf Mint-bush (Prostanthera rotundifolia), Purple Kunzea (Kunzea parvifolia), Elderberry Panax (Tieghemopanax sambucifolius), Leafy Bossiaea (Bossiaea foliosa), Ivy Goodenia (Goodenia hederacea var. alpestre), and the Wax-Berry (Gaultheria appressa). At a large concrete bridge we paused to admire the weeping beauty of the Buffalo Sallee (Eucalyptus mitchelliana), also known as Willow Gum, with its spiky fruits and shiny green leaves. This species is endemic to the plateau. The red flowers of Royal Grevillea (Grevillea victoria; named by Baron von Mueller in honour of Queen Victoria) were just emerging nearby, and Catkin Wattle (Acacia dallachiana) and Lemon-scented Bottle- brush (Callistemon pallidus) were also present. High on the hillside above was an attractive group of pink and white Waddell Everlastings (Helichrysum adenophorum var. waddellae, named after Winifred Waddell, founder of the Victorian Native Plants Preservation Society), and we also saw the small white flowers of the Tree Everlasting (H. dendroideum). After lunch by the lake, we returned to the Chalet, noting Silver Snow-daisies (Celmisia astelifolia) before entering more swampy country. We observed Swamp Heath (Epacris paludosa), Yellow Kunzea (Kunzea ericifolia, once named muelleri), 176 Coral Heath (Epacris microphylla), Alpine Baeckia (Baeckia gunniana), Forest Phe- balium (Phebalium squamulosum ssp. alpinium), Bush-Pea (Pultenaea tenella), Golden Moth Orchid (Diuris pedun- culata), the purple Mountain Milkwort (Conosperma retusum), and many Bird Orchids (Chiloglottis gunnii) with their perianth resembling the open mouth of a young bird. The track continued past the site of Grossman Sawmill (1907-1912), and growing along the track were Buttercups (Ranunculus graniticola), a Mountain Gentian (Gentianella demensis), Creamy Stackhousia (Stackhousia monogyna), Alpina Westringia (Westringia senifolia), Mountain Pepper (7usmannica lanceolata) and Purple Violets (Viola betonicifolia). Later we saw Mountain Plum-Pine (Podo- carpus lawrencel) and St. John’s Wort (Hypericum perforatum). The next day we proceeded to the Gap Lookout to view the Buckland Valley below. Around our feet the dainty, pink- flowered Alpine Boronia (Boronia algida) was growing prolifically. Alpine Grevillea (Grevillea australis), with its small cream flower, and a white variety of a trigger plant (S/ylidium sp.) grew beside the Gorge Walk path, which led through Myrtle Tea- tree (Leptospermum myrtifolium) and Shrubby Platysace (Platysace lanceolata, with tiny white blossoms) to Pulpit Rock, facing the precipitous. north wall of the Gorge. At the foot of the rock some bright Golden Everlastings (Helichrysum brac- teatum) were blooming in a small grey crevice. Near Wilkinson’s Lookout were the Cascade Everlasting (1, thyrsoideum), Gorse Bitter-Pea (Daviesia ulicifolia) and the Handsome Flat Pea (Platylobium JSormosum). As we returned to the Chalet we could see the Victorian Christmas Bush (Prostanthera lasianthos) among the tall eucalypts. After lunch we walked the undulating track to the Monolith through much colourful bush, including Orange Shrubby Pea, Alpine Wattle (Acacia alpina), the Hop Bitter-pea (Daviesia interfolia), Victorian Nat. Reports White Alpine Mint-bush (Prostanthera cuneata) and a vast patch of Ivy-leaved Violets (Viola hederacea). There was evidence of the early saw-milling activities in the area. Close to the Monolith was a small patch of Tufted Blue Lily (Stypandra caespitosa) and Alpine Everlasting (Heli- chrysum hookeri). Our last full day was overcast, but some brave souls ventured forth to ascend the Horn, returning after a deluge. Baron von Mueller and J. Dallachy (Superintendent of the Melbourne Botanic Gardens) ascen- ded the Horn in 1853, and Kunzea muelleri and Acacia dallachiana are named after these two eminent botanists, The mist closed in, however, and we retreated to the warmth of the Chalet lounge to peruse the four large volumes of the Flora of Mt. Buffalo, selected by Government Botanist St. John and given to the Chalet by Russell Grimwade in 1938: an informative and fitting conclusion to our stay. Mt. Buffalo was called ‘The Garden of the Gods” by E. J. Dunn, secretary of the Mines Depart- ment who made a geological survey of the area in 1907, and this perhaps best de- scribes the hours of pleasure one can spend botanising there. Botanical names are taken from the Mi. Buffalo Plant List, National Parks Service ( Victoria), 1982. The marine life of Heron Reef (Report of a talk by Julie Marshall at the August general meeting of the FNCV) The Great Barrier Reef stretches for almost 2000 km parallel to the north east Australian coastline. Heron Island is situated in the Capricorn-Bunker Group which is at the southern end of the Great Barrier Reef about 70 km from the Queensland coastal town of Gladstone. Heron Reef is approximately 11 km long and 4-5 km wide. Originally discovered during the surveying trip of the H.MLS. Fly in 1843, the island was first used by turtle canners. Eventually the island was taken over in 1932 by Christian Poulson who established a small resort. In 1973 the P & O Shipping Line took this over and greatly expanded it so that it now caters for over 200 guests. They have also recently dredged out a large harbour to accom- modate a ‘wave piercing catamaran’. Heron Island is a coral cay, and, apart from Green Island, this is the only resort situated on a cay. The University of Queensland also has a research station on the island. The marine life of the reef has been protected since the 1960s. Vol. 107 No. 5/6 (1990) The beach zone Bird life The dominant bird life consists of terns, herons and shearwaters. The White-cap- ped Noddy Tern (Anous minutus) provides guano for the Pisonia trees in which it nests, and also disperses the seeds of the tree which stick to its feathers. The nests are made from the leaves and twigs of the Pisonia trees. Reef Herons are common, They have two colour varieties within the same species, and both white and grey phases are found at Heron Island. The Wedge-tailed Shearwater nests on the island from November to March. From April to May the large fluffy chicks have trial flights. Turtles Green and Logger-Head Turtles come ashore on the rising tide at night during the summer months. They lay their eggs in a chamber (hollow dug in the sand) 177 Reports above the high tide mark. They lay a clutch of 100 to 150 eggs, which are soft and rather like ping pong balls, They hatch in 50 to 80 days, The temperature of the sand controls the sex of the hatchlings. The biggest day time predator of the hatchlings are sea gulls, whilst the ghost crab and the red-eye crab lie in wait on the beach and rocks at night for emerging turtle hatchlings. Marine life in the intertidal zone At low tide a large amount of the reef rim and reef flat is exposed. This area can be divided into a number of zones. There is the beach rock which houses chiton populations which graze on algae at night. Then a shallow gutter off shore which always contains about | m depth of water. Here, underneath dead coral boulders are terebellid worms which live in a tube made of fine sediment and which have long feeding tentacles. The swimming bivalve, Lima fragilis, is also found. It moves by clapping the valves of its shell together and expressing the water - a form of jet propulsion, In the inner or sandy zone are broad expanses of sand with sparse clumps of living coral. The main animals here are holothurians (commonly known as Sea Cucumbers because of their shape). These have mouths ringed by tentacles which sweep the sand into the gut, extract the food, and expel the remains through the anus. Many species when molested throw out part of their internal organs (called Cuverian tubules) through the cloaca. These tubules elongate and become very sticky. They also contain toxic substances which can poison a predator. Minute calcium carbonate spicules are embedded in their skin. Some species are still a popular food for the Chinese. Many species of nudibranchs are found in the shallows including one of the largest —the Spanish Dancer, Hexabranchus san- guineus. Nudibranchs are molluscs al- though they all lack shells as adults, Their name means ‘naked gills’ and many species 178 carry their gills clearly visible on their back (mantle). Most species of nudibranch are brightly coloured and this seems to warn other animals that they are unpalatable and they in fact have few predators. Nudi- branchs are carnivorous feeding on a variety of organisms such as sponges, bryozoans, ascidians and coelenterates, especially hydroids. The Spanish Dancer is one of the few nudibranchs which can swim. It does this by unfurling and un- dulating its mantle. It is about 25 cm in size but most nudibranchs are much smaller, some only being a few mm. Gastropod molluscs can be divided into three main subclasses — the pulmonates (e.g. the Common Land Snail), the opis- thobranchs (which include the nudi- branchs) and the prosobranchs which include most of the other shells which can be found in the reef shallows, such as the baler shell, volutes such as Amoria macu- lata, spider shells (Lambis lambis) and mitre shells. Large numbers of the clam Tridacna maxima are found in the coral clumps. Corals include the massive coral, Gonio- pera, brain corals, soft corals such as Sarcophyton, and the Staghorn Coral (Acropora). The main predator of corals are starfish but some nudibranchs also feed on corals (e.g. Phestilla lugubris on Gonopera). Starfish can regenerate an arm if it is broken off, Many extrude their stomach externally to digest their prey. They use digestive enzymes to dissolve the tissue before ingesting. Heron Reef is largely free of the Crown-of-thorns Starfish which devastate coral reefs further north. Sea urchins are also common e.g. Dia- dema which is light sensitive. Little black fish live symbiotically with it. In the living coral zone, coral is well developed forming an even-topped plat- form encrusted with pink calcareous algae. Cowries are found in this area and also the abalone Haliotis asinina. It has holes in the distal part of its shell through which it expels water after the oxygen has been Victorian Nat. Book Reviews removed by the gills. Hermit Crabs which inhabit dead univalve shells are common. There are many beautiful shrimps. A sacoglossan which resembeles a nudi- branch, Cyerce nigricans lives in this area. It is herbivorous and feeds on the Turtle Grass, Chlorodesmis. It has numerous flattened leaf like cerata on its back. These contain branches of the gut and also glands which secrete noxious substances when the animal is attacked, The reef crest or rim is the highest part of the intertidal zone. It is littered with large coral boulders. The underside of these shelter a large variety of life such as bryozoans, ascidians, sponges, flatworms, cowries and nudibranchs. Some nudi- branchs such as Pectinodoris trilineata are very small and up to 50 can be found in one patch of sponge. ‘Sponge crabs’ carry a protective covering of sponge held in place by two of their legs. Sponges are unpalatable to most marine life and thus form a protection for the crabs. Many Sea Hares (Ap/ysia) are found in this area. They produce a violet-purple ink- like fluid when irritated. Brittle Stars and shrimps are also common. Marine life in the subtidal zone The reef slope falls sharply down to about 20 m. The brilliant yellow Tixbastrea coral can be found in caves and under overhanging ledges. Sometimes the polyps are eaten out by the mollusc, Epitonium, Gorgonian corals are large and branching and portray beautiful colours. Crinoids have numerous long, brightly coloured feather arms which catch plankton in the currents. They use small jointed append- ages known as cirri to cling to the sub- strate. Fish are various including the Blue Angel Fish, the Butterfly Fish and the Trumpet Fish. Moray Eels are large and can be aggressive and bite. It is acommon sight to see larger fish with smaller ‘cleaner fish’ eating parasites in the larger fishes gills and mouth. Manta Rays are some- times seen. There are many beautiful flatworms and colourful nudibranchs, especially Chro- modorids, A feature of all these descriptions was the clear, colourful and typical environ- mental photography, which made the talk a valuable introduction to the life of the Heron Reef. Noel Schleiger Wily Violets and Underground Orchids By Peter Bernhardt Published by Allen and Unwin, R.R.P. $16.95, 272 pages. A recent edition of Orbost’s local news- paper, the ‘Snowy River Mail’ carried a letter from a reader signing herself as ‘Sheila B. Wright’, who posed the question “What possible use is a potoroo, anyway?’ The question was rhetorical; the writer was quite clear that potoroos are useless and that, if they were to become extinct as a result of human activities, then so be it. The final chapter in Peter Bernhardt’s book ‘Wily Violets and Underground Orchids’ is about a plant more ‘useless’ even than a potoroo. The two species of Vol. 107 No. 5/6 (1990) underground orchids - Rhizanthella gard- neri in Western Australia and Cryptan- themis slateriin New South Wales — grow, flower and set seed entirely underground. They are very rarely seen by human eyes, and then only as a result of ploughing a paddock or accidentally kicking over a dead stump. But Bernhardt tells their remarkable story with an enthusiasm for the bizarre and the obscure details of their lives which invoked, in me at least, a sense of wonder. I have no idea what ‘Sheila B. Wright’ would think. 179 Book Reviews Bernhardt is currently employed at the Royal Botanic Gardens in Sydney, and is engaged in writing explanatory signs and notes for the Garden’s collection of plant treasures. He was educated in the United States and in Australia, and has worked extensively in the field of pollination and reproductive biology of plants. He is also, by self-admission, the ‘freak at the orchid show who pulls out a hand lens’. This is his first book. With this background and his skills, Bernhardt is in a good position to bring, to a general audience, stories from that remarkable field, the ways and means by which plants (and animals) reproduce their kind. The field lends itself to story-telling, and any teacher will verify that telling stories is one of the best ways of getting a message across. In this case, the stories are told ina light, entertaining style which enhances their effectiveness still further. ‘Wily Violets and Underground Or- chids’ is a collection of short chapters dealing with whatever has taken Bern- hardt’s fancy. There is no particular order, but the unifying theme of reproduction 1s covered with a variety of examples, from the flowering patterns of rainforest trees to the pollination of prairie herbs, and from bees and birds to bats and rats. Orchids and mistletoes are Bernhardt’s main research interests, so these are covered in detail. In fact, six of the eighteen chapters are devoted to orchids. As well, Bernhardt is clearly interested in literature, and this pops up in frequent literary allusions and in two chapters, One, dealing with May Gibbs’ books on Gum- nut Babies and Big Bad Banksia Men, is 180 particularly entertaining for an Australian reader, as these classics of our literature are explained with a view to a predomin- antly American audience. The other re- views some of the more extravagant science fiction forays into the botany of man- eating (and seducing) orchids. It is in these excursions into the bizarre and the marvellous that Bernhardt is at his strongest. At the more basic levels, covering the principals of floral mor- phology, pollination and adaptation, and explaining the links between these, the book is sometimes flawed by the intro- duction of terms and concepts which are not fully explained. But this is a minor problem, and is certainly a lesser one than an unfortunate publishing flaw, that the currently available edition is missing the colour plates referred to in the text. The black-and-white illustrations and plates are generally excellent, and I’m sure that the colour plates would have been valuable. The importance of books like these is touched upon in the foreword by Peter Raven, Director of the Missouri Botanic Gardens, and again in the last chapter. As Bernhardt remarks in the closing paragraph: “The earth conceals many more tan- talizing stories of botany. Will there be enough time . . . to tell them?” 1 believe that few qualities are more important in our relationship with the natural world than a sense of wonder. This book is about wonderful things. I hope that even ‘Shiela B. Wright’ will one day simply marvel. Kevin Thiele Botany School University of Melbourne Victorian Nat. Reports Annual report of the Botany Group of the FNCV for the year 1989 Those who are interested in the activities of the Botany Group have had another | very interesting year, both at the meetings on the ‘Second Tuesday’ and on the excursions of the ‘Fourth Saturday’. Whenever possible adjacent meetings and excursions were linked together in subject matter. Sometimes meetings have been limited by the limitations of space in the Astronomer’s Residence, and also we have missed the pleasure of being able to use the FNCV library. Eleven meetings were held, and 9 excursions. For the meetings, the average attendance was 22, the higher attendances of the warmer months were matched by lower attendances in the winter months. For the excursions the average attendance was 17, July and August being the least popular months. Meetings February Various speakers Alpine plants and their habitats. March Win Bennet From the Kimberley to the Cooper - a contrast. April David Cheal An overview of the vegetation of the Mallee. May Graeme Stone RCA roadside reserves. June Tom May Trees, toadstools, puffballs and potoroos. July Various speakers Members night. August George Paras Restoration efforts of La Trobe University Wildlife Reserve. September Dr Sophie Ducker Botanical exploration of the Port Phillip Bay area. | October Hilary Weatherhead Plant communities at different altitudes in the Swiss Alps. November Keith McDougal Conservation of the Basalt Plains grasslands areas. December Various speakers Members night and AGM. Excursions February Lake Mountain March — April Tall forest on the Ada River (La Trobe Valley FNCV). May Greens Bush (Tom Sault). June Fungi at Kurth Kiln (Tom May). July Operation Revegetation Nursery (Knoxfield) and Mealy Stringybark woodland (Andrew Paget). | August Gresswell Forest and Plenty River Gorge (George Paras and local ranger). | September Brisbane Ranges (Norman Plover). October Tynong North to Gembrook - A variety of vegetation associations (Hilary Weatherhead). November Basalt Plains flora remnants (Keith McDougal). New faces are always welcome. Thanks go once again to Margaret Potter, our President sand to all who have contributed to the efficient running of the Botany Group. Happily 1990 will find us back in the Herbarium! Win Bennet, Hon. Secretary ‘Vol. 107 No. 5/6 (1990) 181 Reports 50 Years of the Australian Natural History Medallion On 24 March 1939 JK. Moir, president of the Bread and Cheese Club, wrote to the Secretary of the FNCV suggesting the establishment of an award — ‘a variation of the Nobel awards’ - as a recognition of a person’s service towards protecting native flora and fauna. The idea was favourably received by the FNCV and action was promptly taken to notify organisations considered likely to be interested in such an initiative. Seventeen societies were approached, and each provided two representatives to form a committee which drew up the rules which were to govern the award. The first medallion was awarded to Alec H. Chisholm in 1940. In the fifty years since then the range of the award has widened, so that today societies and clubs thoughout Australia are invited to submit nominations for the Medallion. The first interstate award was made in 1944 with the selection of J.M. Black from South Australia. This was followed in 1946 by Queensland (Heber A. Longman), and Western Australia in 1948 (Ludwig Glauert). Reverend H.M.R. Rupp (New South Wales) received the award in 1954, and it first went to Tasmania in 1976, to Winifred M. Curtis. Twenty-seven Victorians have been awarded the Medallion, seven have gone to New South Wales, while South Australia and Western Australia have received six each, and Tasmania and Queensland two each. All aspects of natural history have been recognised in the award, and while some Medallionists have had a broad Tange of interests, many have been specialists, ornithologists and botanists being the most numerous. At the other end of the scale, there has been only one who listed microscopy (together with geology and palaeontology), Frederick Chapman in 1941, and one ichthyologist, Gilbert Bs Whitley, in 1967. There have been three herpetologists (Ludwig Glauert, 1948, 182 Michael Tyler, 1950 and John Dell, 1988), while two awards have been made for conchology, the first to the South Aust- ralian, Bernard C. Cotton, in 1950, and the other to Charles J. Gabriel (1958), who joined the FNCV as a junior member in 1892, at the age of thirteen, and was very active in the Club thoughout his long association with it. As would be expected, the early Medal- lionists were men, the first woman being. Edith Coleman in 1949, followed by two more in the 60s, and to date eight women have now received the award. The rules of the award drawn up by the first committee have remained substan- tially the same. Rule 6 read: Any person is eligible for the Award who it can be shown has increased popular or scientific knowledge of Australian Flora and Fauna, including Man, or has assisted notably in the protection or propagation of Flora and Fauna, or has discovered new species of importance, or has devoted much time to the study of the subject, or has done definite service by the publication of articles or books or by photography or by pictorial art, or by any other means. Later revisions included a time limit of a ten year | period preceding the last nomination, and the currency of a nomination was extended to three years, which the General Com- mittee in 1946 recommended as giving candidates a fairer chance. They also recommended that the Award Committee be appointed on a more permanent basis than annual election by the General Com- mittee from its own members. Today the Award Committee consists of six mem- bers, representing different disciplines, appointed for four years, half of whom retire every two years, and the current President of the Royal Society. The main function of the General Committee, made up of representatives from participating Societies, is to appoint members of the Victorian Nat. Reports Award Committee, and to deal with any procedural matters which arise. The sec- retary of this committee is appointed by the FNCV, who finance and present the award each year. The first medallion, designed by Robin Croll, depicted an aborigine sitting on a cliff gazing out over the land, under the Southern Cross. This design was used until 1980, but after forty years’ use the die was wearing out, and Council was faced with the choice of replacing it, or having a new design. The decision was made in favour of the latter. The search for a new design resulted in Council’s choosing one from Matcham Skipper, in which a number of elements of botany and zoology are in- corporated. The medallion is mounted on a piece of agate, thereby giving variation from year to year. The achievements for which the Medal- lion is awarded have remained similar over the years, but changes of emphasis are discernible, reflecting both the progress of knowledge, and different perceptions of the role of the naturalist. The distinctions are blurred, because new species are still being discovered today, while some of the early Medallionists were more concerned with spreading general knowledge of natural history than with taxonomic de- scription. The need for conservation, underpinned by scientific knowledge, which J.K. Moir recognised from the beginning, has become more relevant with the passing years, and is reflected in the activities and achievements of the Medal- lionists in the last two decades. As the Medallion goes into its second half-cen- tury, the Award Committee continue to look for people who, in their opinion, have done most to fulfill the two requirements of an award for, in the words of the Original inscription on the medallion, ‘special study and increasing knowledge and appreciation of Australian flora and fauna’, Sheila Houghton For anyone interested in more informa- tion on the Medallion a booklet entitled ‘The History of the Australian Natural History Medallion’ by Sheila Houghton is available, gratis. Contact the Secretary, c/- The National Herbarium (see back cover). With Thanks The FNCV wishes to thank the members of the Native Plants Preservation Society for their donation of $2,000 towards the maintenance of the Kinglake and Maryborough sanctuaries. These Sanctuaries are vital to the conservation of flora and fauna and the generous support from the N.P.P.S. is warmly appreciated. — Vol. 107 No. 5/6 (1990) Wildflowers of the Stirling Range by Bruce Fuhrer and Neville Marchant Special offer to members $7.00 plus $1.75 pack./post. Order from: Sheila Houghton, FNCV, C/- National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, South Yarra 3141. 183 Reports Ellen Margery McCulloch Australian Natural History Medallist: 1990 The choice of Ellen M. McCulloch for this award is an acknowledgement of her dedicated and unstinting efforts in the fields of conservation and the environment, relating particularly to birds. io As an enthusiastic and tireless worker over many years in bringing the causes of birds to non-committed people, she has never compromised or deviated from this direction. Ellen’s interest in birds began in childhood as she walked to and from school in Kallista, Victoria. As an adult this interest was re-awakened when she attended Jack Hyett’s general natural history lectures, run by the Council of Adult Education. Since the early 1970’s she herself has been a CAE lecturer and now also leads tours. In addition to countless articles published in ornithological magazines all over Australia she has contributed to a wide variety of journals and newspapers such as Your Garden, The Age (Melbourne), Nunawading Gazette, Photography, Australian Golf, Farm Magazine, Trees and Natural Resources, etc., etc. She is co-author of two books: “Some Garden Birds of South-east Australia?’ (1970) (Collins: Sydney), and “Birds of Australian Gardens?’ (1980) (Rigby: Adelaide), (Reprinted 1986, 1990). Her book, “Your Garden Birds?’ (1987) (Hyland House: Melbourne), brings together thirty of the articles published in Your Garden. Her contribution through leaflets, radio talks, workshops and seminars and as a representative on various professional organisations, has placed birds and their needs before a very wide section of the public. She has lectured to schools, natural history societies, church groups and garden clubs. She has organised various surveys including one on “Birds and Gardens”, an endorsed Bicentennial activity, in which people from all over Australia participated. Most importantly, she always publishes the results. She is a voluntary worker at the Museum of Victoria, and has been involved in the planning and production of videos, notably one on teaching volunteers how to handle oiled birds. As Promotions Officer for the Bird Observers Club of Australia she is instrumental in setting up displays at shopping centres, flower shows, nurseries and libraries. She was awarded a Life Membership in 1985, Her long-standing and ceaseless efforts for the betterment of our environment have certainly merited this recognition. Tess Kloot : . . si Victorian Nat. Reports Ellen McCulloch (Photo: Gael Trusler) Don’t forget to resubscribe. Subscriptions for 1991 are due on January ist. Vol. 107 No. 5/6 (1990) 185 Reports ALPINE ECOLOGY COURSES BOGONG HIGH PLAINS JANUARY 1991 This is an opportunity to learn about the alpine environment and associated conservation issues with people from a range of backgrounds and disciplines. January 2-7: Introductory course for teachers, rangers, conservationists and those interested in the alpine environment. Study alpine flora, fauna, soils and their , interactions in the field. At least one day scheduled for individual projects. Limited to 48 participants. January 8-13: Advanced field studies and projects for botanists, ecologists, soil scientists and photographers - including nature photography with Colin Totterdell. Three days scheduled for specific projects. Limited to 36 participants. The instructors have considerable experience working in the Bogong High Plains and conducting field-based courses. Accommodation is at Howmans Gap Alpine Center. Course Fees: $350 including accommodation, meals, instruction and course notes. A limited number of subsidised places are available for those on low incomes. Enquiries and application forms: Bruce West, Howmans Gap (057) 583 228 Warwick Papst (03) 479 1230 (BH) (03) 809 2454 (AH) Presented by the Department of Conservation and Environment Farewell to Miss Laura White Miss White attended the Botany Group Meeting on Thursday night and on Friday told Dr Elizabeth Turner how much she enjoyed the subject and the speaker Hilary Weatherhead. On Saturday morning the 13th October she passed away peacefully. Age 95 years. An obituary will be printed in a later issue of The Victorian Naturalist. 186 . ' Victorian Nat. FNCV Diary (cont.) Fauna Survey Group General Meetings (First Tuesday) Tuesday,, 5th February Tuesday, 5th March Excursions Saturday, 15th December 26th Dec. - 2nd Jan. Night, Leadbeaters Possum Watch. Xmas Camp. Nooramunga Marine Coastal Park. Sunday Island. New Members Metropolitan: Joint Metropolitan - Jenny Anson, Narre Warren North - Beth and Eric Ibbitson, Black Rock - Michael Russell, Chelsea — Philipa Burgess and Alec Donaldson, - Helen Geyer, Langwarrin East Kew | - Tony Barton, Bundoora — Nigel and William Delaney, | - John Spencer, Brighton Sandringham - Karen Wilson, Parkville - Patrick Driver and Marita Sydes, — Louise Brown, Glen Waverley Rosanna — N. Robert Doreian, Rosanna — Patricia Brennan and Joseph Leahy, - Felicity Garde, Mt Waverley Oak Park Joint Country - Bronwen and Gordon Myall, Coffs Harbour FNCV Membership and Subscriptions 1991 Membership fees and journal subscriptions for 1991 are due on January Ist 1991 Membership rates 1991 LSTRST SOUTER DY tag A RS olen twa coed a en Praeger $30 Raita hy OhLOTO ILE Maen en Me PEN tee RE Enact Gs cts tap ids TO abvtem famines $35 BR ONUCTIC IRV 4 RICCI SPAN Gar cRRR ROME TE TIME EEE TE FE bene a Se 2. foie « olbie «Meas 4 tcakare $27 [STAC LSAT MIELE os, 8 1 ARAB BLO CONS OS CO eae cate p En ee tot areca $32 MOTIGESSIONAL TAG COUMCENLS/PENSIOMOENS)> Ai tutisl sere wei Pere ote gyal ol ges Sis alee aie © $22 Baia ORGES SOc Mtl en Pea L Tey, Tee. Pele osc5 88s Keath a ottle aly $27 MEGUMI CT abare MO I TCLOLIONSNGLUFQNIST) Mer setis fees Amie ey i netgen tiga e oF $5 Subscription rates 1991 Toler stay een Bes o cus guess kde adeeag Re aM Ee in Ere: San ns a a $30 VED DTaTD AND SSDRETDED hart = lero thistte cian ac eh beth oat ian aa Bs Pe $40 URVSRGE Oo Ao 2 cy tl Reh ete o 4k ree ee ee AUD $50 Field Naturalists Club of Victoria In which is incorporated the Microscopical Society of Victoria Established 1880 Registered Office: FNCV, ¢/- National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, South Yarra, 3141. OBJECTS: To stimulate interest in natural history and to preserve and protect Australian fauna and flora. Members include beginners as well as experienced naturalists. Patron ; . Fg j His Excellency, The Rev Dr John Davis McCaughey, The Governor of Victoria. Key Office-Bearers 1989-1990 President: Dr. ARTHUR FARNWORTH, 47 The Boulevarde,Doncaster 3108 (848 2229) Hon. Secretary; Mr, JULIAN GRUSOVIN, | Warriner Court, East Oakleigh, 3166. (543 8627 A.H.) Hon, Treasurer: Mr, BRUCE ABBOTT, 4/597 Orrong Road, Armadale, 3143. (529 4301 A.H.) Subscription-Secretary; Ms DIANNE CHAMBERS, FNCY, c/ National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, South Yarra, 3141, Editors: ROBY N WATSON and TIM OFFOR, FNCYV, P.O. Box 4306, The University of Melbourne, Parkville, 3052, (419 3532), Librarian: Mrs. SHELLA HOUGHTON, F'NCYV, c/ National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, South Yarra, 3141 Excursion Secretary; DOROTHY MAHLER (850 9379 A.H.,). Conservation Co-ordinator: Mr. WIL ASHBURNER, c/- National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, South Yarra, 3141. Sales Officer (Victorian Naturalist only); Mr. D. B. McINNES, 129 Waverley Road, East Malvern, 3145 (541 2427) Publicity Officer: Miss MARGARET POTTER, 1/249 Highfield Road, Burwood, 3125. (889.2779), Book Sales Officer: Mr. ALAN PARKIN, FNCV c/ National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, South Yarra, 3141 (850 2617 A.H.) Group Secretaries Botany; Miss MARGARET POTTER, 1/249 Highfield Road, Burwood, 3125 (889 2779), Geology: Miss HELEN BARTOSZEWICZ, 16 Euroa Avenue, Nth. Sunshine, 3020 (311 5106 A.H.) Fauna Survey: Mr, ALEX KUTT (347 0012 A.H.) Microscopical: Mrs, ELSIE GRAHAM, 147 Broadway, Reservoir, 3073 (469 2509) MEMBERSHIP Membership of the F.N.CN, is open to any person interested in natural history, The Victorian Naturalist is distributed free to all members, the club's reference and lending library is available and other activities are indicated in reports set out in the several preceding pages of this magazine. Membership rates 1991 BARRIODONRN Swarts erettas eeu sane ee ee nt oyu Joint Metropolitan ah : y Nighy Ais ete Ce? +e Le sa5 Country/Interstate members... ...,,.., .. Hee Me $27 Joint Country/Interstate ..,, , . Abe sp Ogee AS ESOS (te LW An Ae oa) | ice erie) A ee eee $32 Concessional rate (Students/pensioners) , $22 Joint Concessional Mocs Ara UWA Hel 8 eee AA 8g sok GASVCBR 8 cit ee ie $27 Junior (under 18; no Victorian INGER EE ot tcime the an ee een ee so) Eee aie $5 Subscripti Club subscription ; id egie at Ae $30 Within Australia . Ne ag STs Overseas de Aah y ge a ne Ui ths ort i crore sys 5 AUD.$50 _ — _ Key te . - ? JENKIN BUXTON PRINTERS PTY, LTD. its ADHOTSFORD ST WEST MELBOUMNE, ava-a7 | 4 st Er ey: Reports CLUB IMPROVEMENT ACCOUNT Balance of Account at 31 December 1988 14,909 13,888 Book sales account profit 758 1,021 Balance of Account at 31 December 1989 15,667 14,909 EXCURSION FUND Balance of Fund at 31 December 1988 28,919 25,442 Interest on investments and bank account 3,881 3,389 Surplus on tours 2,646 88 Sundry 530 a Less: Transfer to Kinglake Project (2,345) —_ Transfer to Library Fund (150) _ Balance of Fund at 31 December 1989 33,481 28,919 FIELD NATURALISTS CLUB OF VICTORIA BALANCE SHEET AS AT 31 DECEMBER 1989 1989 1988 $ $ ASSETS Current Assets Cash at Bank 8,245 eA) Cash at Bank ~ Bicentennial Grant 19,043 10,197 Australian Savings Bonds at Cost 10,000 Accounts Receivable — 213 Stocks on Hand at Cost Badges & Sundries 85 85 Books for Sale 297 331 Victorian Naturalist Subject Index 765 790 28,435 35,395 Fixed Assets at Cost Library Furniture & Equipment 9,328 9,328 Land — Cosstick Reserve, Maryborough 213 213 9,541 9,541 Investment of Funds at Cost Australian Savings Bonds 8,300 Esanda Ltd. Debentures 8,600 8,000 ANZ Term Deposit 20,352 — ANZ Savings Bank ~ Deposit 6,055 5,472 Bank of Melbourne ~ Deposit 4,321 2,443 39,328 24,215 Building Fund Australian Savings Bonds at cost 900 3,100 Esanda Ltd. Debentures at cost 4,700 5,900 Bank of Melbourne — Deposit Py alyph Quine ANZ Term Deposit 36,446 — Cash at Bank 4,723 3,591 48,941 15,364 72 Victorian Nat. Reports Publications Fund Australian Savings Bonds at cost 9,100 45,380 Esanda Ltd. - Debentures at cost 2,500 5,000 Bank of Melbourne - Deposit 5,158 6,916 Telecom — Bonds at cost — 1,500 ANZ Savings Bank - Deposit 11,956 10,804 ANZ Term Deposit 46,067 _ Book Stocks at cost 5,841 6,084 Cash at Bank 17,549 12,248 98,171 87,932 Excursion Fund Australian Savings Bonds at cost _— 1,000 ANZ Savings Bank 11,981 10,826 ANZ Term Deposit 1221 Cash at Bank 26,949 29,052 Sundry Creditors (6,670) (11,959) 33,481 28,919 257,897 201,366 AUDITOR’S REPORT TO THE MEMBERS OF FIELD NATURALISTS CLUB OF VICTORIA We report that we have audited the accounts of the FELD NATURALIST CLUB OF VICTORIA in accordance with Australian Auditing Standards. In our opinion the accompanying accounts, being the Balance Sheet, Statement of Income and Expenditure, Notes to Accounts, Statement of Source and Application of Funds and Statement by Members of the Council, are properly drawn up in accordance with the provisions of the Companies (Victoria) Code 1981 and so as to give a true and fair view of:- (i) the state of affairs of the company at 31 December, 1989 and of the results of the club for the year ended on that date; and (ii) that other matters required by Section 269 of that Code to be dealt with in the accounts; and are in accordance with Australian Accounting Standards and applicable approved accounting standards. GORDON CLARK & ASSOCIATES MELBOURNE Certified Practising Accountants March 1990 Vol. 107 No. 2 (1990) 73 Naturalist Notes Sitting in the car at windy McLoughlins Beach I knew little of the past activities of the group I was to spend the week with, All [knew was that they were out to catch New Holland Mouse. My association with the Fauna Survey Group began in early December 1989 when a friend of mine, a second year ecology student at La Trobe University, invited me to a meeting to be held that night at the Astronomer’s Residence in the botanical Gardens, South Yarra. Malcolm Turner, a prominent member of the group and a biologist with the DC&E, had told her that membership with the Fauna Survey team could help her career. I attended to give her moral support. The air was hot and rich with pollen in the Botanical Gardens that night. As we trekked through the open parklands yuppy cyclists whizzed by in flurries of fluor- escent limbs and whirling wheels. It was only with difficulty that we eventually found the stately Victorian residence of the Astronomer — we had been searching for a white dome-shaped shed with a telescope sticking out of it. When the Fauna Survey Group were all seated to begin the meeting I surveyed them. I suppose I was expecting to see the stereotype field nats of old; on the one hand the Crosby-Morrison, bushman-type naturalists, on the other the English country gentleman-type naturalists who long ago exchanged their shotguns for binoculars and picnic baskets. The people before me, however, looked more like the congregation of a Catholic church. A distinguished old lady occupied the front seat. However to my ignorant eyes she seemed as though she would be more at home judging poodles at the Royal Dog Show than scratching in the bush for the scats of marsupial rodents, Behind her was an elderly gentleman whose name | later learnt was Tom Sault, a long standing member of the group. More than any other present Tom em- bodied the bushman-naturalist image. 110 However he later told me that he rarely sacrificed life’s common comforts while on camp. He was known for pulling a little campervan on every trip and cooking such wonderful meals in it that it became known as ““Tom’s Restaurant”. There was a core of young people in the room who all looked as though they had done some time at university. They had that intangible feeling of leisure about them that three or four years of campus life installs in people. The tall, blonde tradesman Russell Thompson was also present. Returning from the bush on one occasion I showed Russell a slender bone I thought came from a horse. Without lifting his eyes from the curling steam of the cup of tea he was drinking, Russell amiably said, “That’s a swan’s thigh bone”. My friend’s contact, Malcolm Turner, was to provide the main attraction of the meeting — a talk and slides about his recent adventures which included a trip to Queens- land. Malcolm gave a sly grin as he began + his talk, as if to say, “Look how much fun I’ve been having”. Physically he looked as though he was still in Queensland. While the rest of us had perhaps shed one or two winter jumpers Malcolm arrived wearing shorts and T-shirt. As Malcolm showed us his slides the room took on a warm and homely feeling. I felt at ease with the group as we peered eagerly at the curios of nature that Mal- colm had captured in his slides; things like turtle’s eggs and the great boomerang tails of Southern Right Whales which he had photographed in the cold sea near Warr- nambool, Looking around at the naturalists pre- sent, their faces illuminated by the slides of northern Queensland, | reflected that each face was a slide itself, showing a keen interest in nature - and occasional disgust at Malcolm’s habit of making weak puns. Malcolm flicked the slide machine and a monster-faced Moray Eel swivelled into view. The eel’s head was sticking out of its coral lair and was cupped in the hand Victorian Nat. Naturalist Notes of a scuba-diver - Malcolm. As Mal ex- plained ‘his relationship with the eel, the scene took on the dreamy quality of a distant friendship hatched in some far-off polyp grove. For me Malcolm exuded the love for nature that all keen naturalists share. When such people discuss the natural world it is as though they are talking of an old friend. I first encountered this relationship between the naturalist and the subject of his work as a young boy watching Harry Butler on TV. You could say that I was brought up “In the Wild with Harry Butler” because the show gave me many of my first insights into the bush. Harry’s program left me with two strong needs; a desire to understand the natural world and an urge to preserve it. As the meeting concluded | felt that this group could become the outlet for these needs that I had been waiting for. Despite this it was still with some re- luctance that | put my name down for the forthcoming trip to St Margaret’s Island. Long camps with family and friends had taught me to be suspicious of spending time at such close quarters with people I had newly met. However the possibility of finding the New Holland Mouse lured me and I ended up signing to go. Nothing went well on the first day of the St Margaret Island camp. We carted our luggage the one hundred metres or so to the end of the McLoughlin’s Beach pier under guerilla attack from squall-force gusts of wind. It was then a matter of waiting for the DC&E launch that had been arranged to drop us at the island. However the launch only stayed long enough for its captain to tell us that one of its motors was out and that they were not going to risk a trip to the island in those conditions. We reloaded our cars and drove to the McLoughlin’s Beach jetty. This long foot- bridge crosses a muddy backwater separat- ing part of the Ninety Mile Beach known as Reeves Beach from the mainland. Vol. 107 No. 3 (1990) We camped the next few nights in a dell behind Reeves Beach, an area, according to Malcolm, where New Holland Mouse had been found. When the winds even- tually died away we emerged from the heath, spread our gear across the middle of the jetty and again waited for the fateful DC&E launch. Standing and sprawling forlornly about the breezy jetty we must have appeared to the locals like a group of refugees. However I was learning too much to worry about the occasional hardship. I had always enjoyed camping and considered myself a lover of the bush but a week with the Fauna Survey Group soon showed me how little | knew of my beloved. The group had immense collective knowledge. There were science graduates like Eva Demetriadus, Sarah Brown, Karen Lester and Malcolm Turner on the trip. Jenny Chappill had a Ph.D in Eucalypt Taxonomy. Russell Thompson was, of course, great with bones and Wendy Clarke was partial to spiders. Whatever the field there were people in the team who knew something about it. As one of several novices in the group I was made to feel welcome. When an animal was caught the experienced people were happy to explain the creature to us and answer our questions. Without complaint everyone who felt the need set about the often difficult tasks before them. There were pitfall lines to be filled in and new ones to be dug. There were traps to be set, 10 to a person, and bat mist nets to be checked at regular intervals before bed. And of course there were morning and night swims to be had on the island’s pristine beaches (that is, when we did get to the island). At night Malcolm took us spotlighting into a grove thick with spiny Grass-trees and saw-leafed Banksia. We were looking for pigmy possums. However our quest for these animals ran like an episode of “Scooby Doo”, the children’s cartoon of the seventies. Whenever Malcolm stopped those in the darker back ranks would keep ill The Victorian Naturalist Index to Volume 107, 1990 Compiled by K.N. Bell Australian Natural History Medal Medalist, 184 Report, 182 Authors Bartley, M. J., 80 Bird, E. C., 86 Bird, P. R., 107 Blackburn, J. A. D., 128, 173 Clarke, I., 28 Corrick, M. G., 99 Coulson, G., 112 (review) Dixon, J. M., 159 Endersby, I. D., 126 Entwisle, T. J., 163 Fulton, W. N., 124 Gillbank, L., 165 Gillespie, G., 144 Houghton, S., 35, 182 Kershaw, R. C., 134 (review) Kloot, T., 184 Koehn, J. D. and Morison, A. K., 13 Kuyk, K. van, 130 Leahy, J., 109 Lintermans, M. and Rutzou, T., 26 Lunt, I. D., 45 McInnes, D. E., 58 McIntyre, S., 154 Morison, A. K. and Koehn, J. D., 13 O’Conner, W. D. and Koehn, J. D., 5 Offer, T., 120 Phillips, H., 174 Poiani, A., 105 Rutzou, T. and Lintermans, M., 26 Schleiger, N., 132, 177 (meeting reports) Strother, S., 97 Thiele, K., 179 (review) Willis, J. H., 135 (review) Wilson, C. G., 52 Birds Bell Miner, communal roosting, 105 Budgerigars at Hamilton, 107 Manoria melanophrys, communal roosting, 105 (it) Book reviews Bernhardt, Wily Violets and Underground Orchids (K. Thiele), 179 Dunn et al., Mornington Peninsula - a field guide to flora, fauna and walking tracks (J. H. Willis), 135 Richmond, Tasmanian Sea-shells common to other Australian States (R. C. Kershaw), 134 Botany Autumn fire effect on Themeda triandra, 43 Bush-peas of Victoria, Key to Pultenaea in Victoria, 99 Germination of eight native species, 154 Lepilaena spp. at Swan Bay, 97 Plant drought messenger, 163 Olearia pannosa, fruit, germinability, morphology, 80 Sandy heaths, Wilson’s Promontory, 120 Species list, Merri Creek, 28 Themeda triandra, autumn fire effects, 43 Velvet Daisy Bush, notes on, 80 Erratum Lindenmayer, D. B., Smith, A. P., Craig, S. A. and Lumsden, L. F,, (Victorian Naturalist 106), 136 Excursion report Mt. Buffalo, 175 FNCV Annual Report, 66 Financial Report, 66 Group reports, Botany, 181 Library, 114 Meeting Report, 132, 177 President’s Picnic, 35 Fish Gadopsis bispinosus, new locality, 26 Native freshwater fish, conservation status, 13 Threats to Victorian native freshwater fishes, 5 Two-spined Blackfish, new locality, 26 Frogs Giant burrowing frog in Victoria, 144 Heleioporus australiacus, in Victoria, 144 Geomorphology Cliff instability, 86 Invertebrates Gastropod radual, 126 Helicarion niger, search for, 130 Pond hunters dream, 58 Localities Altona Bay, Southern Right Whale skeleton, 159 Gurdies, Western Port, mammals of, 52 Hamilton, Budgerigars at, 107 Merri Creek, Flora list, 28 Mt. Buffalo, 175 Mt. William, ascent of, 128 Norramunga, 109 Swan Bay, Lepilaena spp., 97 Wilson’s Promontory, sandy heaths, 120 Mammals Australian sea-lion, Eastern Australian coast, 124 Echidna, intertidal activity, 174 Mammals of The Gurdies, Western iPOni2 Southern Right Whale skeleton, Aitona Bay, 159 Miscellaneous Field Naturalists in Victoria’s Alps, 165 New Museum, 132 Where?, 173 Tape reviews Littlejohn and Smith, Calls of Victorian Frogs (G. Coulson), 112 (iii) Dae t ’ €. i ey ane)